JOHN’S FIRST NOVEL

FOR KING

AND

CORNWALL

By

                                                             John H Wooler

Dedicated to my dear friends Madeline and Derek Carter

Without whose inspiration

This book would not have been written

       INTRODUCTION

May 1990, the first time I had watched the re-enactment of the Battle of Stamford Hill.  I found the event fascinating and wanted to know more about the English Civil war and the part played by the Cornish. After reading all I could find on the subject I decided that I would film the next battle and produce a documentary film of the battle of Stamford Hill which would be as true a record as possible of this historic event.

I began researching in earnest, but this proved to be more difficult than I had anticipated as there was little apart from the official account in the County records. By the following year I had read and recorded all I could find of the events leading up to and including the battle of Stamford Hill.

My fascination with the battle in Cornwall continued long after and I began to research further into the life of Bevill Grenville, grandson of Richard Grenville who was a soldier and adventurer and a favourite of Queen Elizabeth 1.

By Chance Bevell’s life ran parallel with Anthony Payne the legendary “giant” of North Cornwall, who stood well over 7 feet tall. They lived in within a few miles of each other in the North of Cornwall and although their lives were completely different, this was to be changed dramatically and forever by the English Civil War and the events leading up to it.

It was around the second year of my research that I had a dream, vision, call it what you will. Perhaps it was the effects of my research playing tricks with my mind but that night I was confronted by the image of Bevill Grenville himself, who in a soft voice told me that I should fully record the story of his life. This experience was so vivid I can still see his face today.

I decided that my best option was to put down all the facts that I had gathered and the events of his life along with all the people that were affected by the civil war in Cornwall in book form which would include all the true facts of the events that I could gather. There were gaps and pieces missing from my research which would not be found as there are no records and as a result I used my imagination to produce this novel of which is what I believe to be a fascinating story and record of one of the great events in our history.  

The main characters and the Battles of the Civil war are fact and based on my research and historic writings of the time. Other characters are fictional and loosely based on Cornish characters I met during my time living in the north of Cornwall.

Chapter one – It Begins!

Cornwall in the year 1630, to be more precise the North Cornwall coast close to the border with Devon. A place so remote that few people, apart from those that lived there, knew of its existence. The deep valleys with heavily wooded hillsides kept most people from wandering far from the main trails.

For much of the year the westerly winds brought cool, moist air in from the Atlantic Ocean. Air that was fresh and clean with the slight smell of salt lifted from the sea. Often the winds brought thunderous storms and the seas off this coast were known by sailors as some of the most dangerous around the country. In numerous inlets cut into the massive cliffs by the sea, rugged rocks stuck their points through the surface of the sea, now, as they had been for thousands of years, lay waiting to tear the bottom from any vessel unlucky enough to venture too close. The remains of ships, which floundered off the coast and were swept into the shore to be driven onto the spikes of rock, could be found along with the bleached bones of those who had managed to swim or had been swept ashore. Few survived and those that did in most cases were unable to climb the almost sheer cliffs.

On this day at the edge of the cliff top a lone man sat motionless astride his horse his eyes set on the horizon. Far out to sea he watched as a ship in full sail made its slow progress up the channel. Huge flocks of sea birds circled high above him screeching out their continual warning cries and dived low over his head in an attempt to drive him from their nesting sites.

Falling away in front of him was an almost sheer cliff of rock and sandstone, bushes of gorse and heather clung precariously in cracks and crevasses, only the hardiest of plants survived here. At the base of the cliffs more than two hundred feet below crashed the wild and pounding sea onto the black granite rocks, like a living beast, always changing and unpredictable. Huge tides brought flotsam and jetsam ashore and deposited it on the high tide line to remain undisturbed until the next storm.  Westward, beyond the horizon, there was no land between these cliffs and the Americas. 

The man on the cliff top was Bevill Grenville, at the age of 35 he was at his physical prime. At almost 6ft he was tall for Cornishman. His long curly hair was a dark ginger and held in place by a wide brimmed leather hat.  His meticulously trimmed beard and moustache added to his distinguished features. His shirt was of the finest silk and his dark tunic and trousers had been tailored by the finest craftsmen in London. His long boots were of polished leather and had been crafted to fit his feet perfectly. The saddle and horse’s harness were engraved and trimmed in silver and of the highest possible quality with no expense spared. Bevill Grenville was a very wealthy man.

 Most Cornish men lived out their lives working the land as serfs, giving their time and efforts in return for a place to live, others providing the services that supported the lives of the most wealthy landowners in the country. This was a form of serfdom and a way of life in the countryside that had changed little in 300 years. This was the way it was and the law was always on the side of the lord of the manor and owners of the land.

Not the life or fate for this man as Bevell’s grandfather had been the Great and famous soldier Sir Richard Grenville, a favourite of Queen Elizabeth. For his bravery and magnificent feats against the Spanish she had bestowed on him great wealth and honours and estates throughout the West Country. Richard had died in the battle of the Azores and his fortune handed down to his son, Bevill’s father,  Bernard.

Richard was not the only member of the Grenville family to achieve greatness, it seemed as if all the male members were great soldiers or sailors, and all were born to be the leaders of men. The Grenville family line could be traced back to Rollo, first Duke of Normandy.

Now after so many prominent ancestors it was Bevill Grenville’s time. He was the Member of  Parliament for Cornwall and had been representing the county in parliament since his election nine years earlier.

Bevill was born in mid Cornwall at the family estate of Brinn in the parish of Withiel close to the market town of Bodmin. He was the first son of Sir Bernard Grenville and his wife Elizabeth and Bevill had spent his childhood at the family estate at Brinn with his four brothers and two sisters. The Grenville family had the great wealth and estates across Cornwall that it had inherited. Bevill’s mother Elizabeth Bevill was the sole heir to the Bevill fortune and had estates in her own right across southern Cornwall including those at Brinn and Killigarth. The children lived lives of luxury and indulged themselves in riding, hunting and falconry. Bevill loved to join his father on trips to his great castle at Stowe in the north of the county whenever he was allowed.  

This was Bevill’s favourite place and he came to love the wildness of the valleys and hills and the great house had intrigued him from an early age. It was half castle and half farmhouse and stood impressive and remote in this wild extreme corner of Cornwall.  The main buildings had been modified and developed over 500 years of occupation by the Grenville family and had many rooms some of which would impress visitors by their magnificent furnishings, few would expect to see such grandeur in such a remote place.

Bevill had been educated at Exeter College; Oxford during his teenage years and from an early age he had developed a great interest in the parliamentary system of government, so much so that he felt his future would be as a politician. He stood for the seat in Cornwall and his family spent a fortune on bringing about his election, buying off the opposition and securing the necessary votes. After his election to parliament at the young age of 25 years he had thrown himself into the life of a socialite and spent much of his time in London. He became good friends with a young man called John Eliot whom he had met at Exeter College several years earlier where they had shared lodgings.

It was surprising that Bevill and John Eliot had got on so well, John was so different from Bevill in appearance being short and thin and suffering ill health all his life. A lung condition caused him to wheeze constantly but he lived with his disability without complaint. He was also from a wealthy family and he and Bevill realised that they were not so different, their ideology and interests were similar, and they spent many an evening together, their long ranging discussion took in every subject from politics to the rights and wrongs of their society.

 Whenever his work in London would allow Bevill would return to his family home near Fowey in the south of Cornwall. The journey was long and tiresome but he put up with the incontinence because he enjoyed the life that was so totally different from London. On his long vacation he would travel from Fowey to the great house of Stowe in the north and spent as much of his time enjoying the solitude.

Bevill sat resting his horse, his eyes shifted to survey the land about him, it was natural to consider this his land, as long as it could be remembered this was Grenville country. Wild and rugged with rolling hills and deep wooded valleys. His love for this place was great and at every opportunity he would set off early in the morning and ride alone along the cliff edge.

He did not forget the people who lived and worked on his land and made regular visits to the hamlets and villages throughout the estates. He insisted on knowing the details of events and happenings and called for regular reports from across his estates. His bookkeeper was obliged to list the names of everyone, where they lived and their occupation. Those that worked the land were instructed to report on what crops were sown and where, this was the method used by Bevill to keep a close watch on his estates and ensured that they were run at maximum efficiently.

He would often invite wealthy land owners to visit Stowe and lavishly entertained them. He enjoyed the days he spent hunting on horseback with his friends and his fine pack of hounds. Deer were plentiful in the woodlands across the estate and provided great sport. He had learnt how to handle the falcons that he kept for hunting and loved to watch his falconer at work.

This rough looking old man had been a legacy from Bevill’s father and he knew more about falcons than any man. They spent days hunting across the open countryside, racing his horse and shouting to the dogs while the old man scurried after him. Rabbits, hares and wood pigeons were in abundance. For Bevill it was a good life one which he enjoyed to the full.

The Grenville estates were as extensive here in the north of the county as they were in the south, The family had bought or acquired most of the countryside in the area encompassing virtually all the lands from Kilkhampton, four miles to the north of Stowe house, to Budehaven on the coast and the villages 6 miles to the south along the coast and inland to include the small towns of Stratton and Marhamchurch.

Bevill Grenville was a quiet spoken man but with an iron will, his very presence commanded obedience and respect from all who knew him, but he was also a fair and kind man and because of this he was well loved by the many workers on the estates.

Bevill had met his wife Grace, daughter of Sir George Smith of Madford, at a social event at the family manor on the outskirts of Hatherleigh to the north of Exeter. She had been 18 years old and Bevill was at once struck by her beauty, she was tall and slim and with her long fair hair and her milky skin she was a most attractive woman.

Once he had seen her enchanting smile and listened to her happy laughter he had made up his mind to seek her company at every opportunity.

It had been love at first sight and he could not get her out of his thoughts. For Grace it was a similar situation. This tall handsome man with his long curly hair. His sparkling eyes and his quiet confidence. Her skin tingled in his presence and she could think of little else. It was to take just a few months before he had asked her to marry him and for her to say yes as there was no doubt in her mind. It went without saying that her family were delighted when they were told that their daughter was to marry into the Grenville family.

They had married a year later with a wedding at Bevill’s family home that was attended by dozens of wealthy friends from across the country.

For the first two years of their marriage lived at the family estate in Tremmer near Fowey; and here in 1621 their first child Richard was born. Bevill was in London on important business when the child was due but fretted all the time he was away, not knowing the fate of his wife and the new born child. He sent a continuous stream of letters back to her and he insisted on word being sent to him when the child was born. He gave a great party for his friends when word arrived informing him that he had a son and his wife was well. He hurried back to Cornwall as soon as his duties would allow.

As soon as Bevill could arrange it after their wedding Bevill had insisted on showing Grace his second love, the Great house of Stowe  he arranged a long vacation and with a convoy of carts and horses Grace’s personal staff made the journey north.

Bevill had called the convoy to a halt as they came to the crest of the hill above the great house. He took Grace by the hand and led her to a gateway through a stone wall from where she could have an uninterrupted view of the valley. This was her first visit to this area and Grace stood for an age taking in the sight of the great house that was Stowe. The buildings had a gray brooding beauty of their own and she fell in love with the place at once. The peace and solitude, the remoteness and wild ruggedness of the country, so different from that in the south of the county. She came to love all the things Bevill himself lived for and loved.

During their time at Stowe they rode their horses to the most remote corners of the estates, racing along the golden sands in the south and taking in the breathtaking views of the northern cliffs. They hunted deer with the hounds and followed the falcons. They enjoyed each other’s company so much that and were inseparable. Each evening they would retire to their state room with its huge bed and spend the night wrapped in each other’s arms.

All too soon it was time for the Grace to return to their home in the south and for Bevill to resume his duties in London.

It was a year later that Bevill’s father, Sir Bernard, decided he was getting old and did not enjoy the long journey and the remote life at Stowe or the effort required to look after the great estate. He had been spending more and more time at his town house that he acquired in Bideford across the border on Devon and now he felt that he did not have time to look after the estates of North Cornwall and Stowe. His intention was to divide his time between his estate at Withal and his house in Bideford. The estates of Stowe would pass to Bevill for him to take overall responsibility. He sent a letter to Bevill explaining his decision. 

When Bevill received the letter in London he made arrangement and set off as soon as he could to see his father at Stowe. He arrived a week after receiving the letter and greeted his father fondly. Between them they came to the conclusion that it would be best for all if Bevill came to Stowe and took over the running of the great house and the estates. Bevill returned at once to Fowey to discuss the idea with Grace. Grace was delighted at hearing the news and they lost no time in moving their family and their servants to the north. It took a dozen carts and carriages several journeys to convey all they wanted at the great house. They arrived at Stowe in the summer of 1622.

Here they settled easily into life in North Cornwall and spent, what was to be, the most enjoyable period of their lives. To Bevill it seemed that Grace was with child each year and in 1623 their daughter Elizabeth was born, sometime later when he remarked on the fact she laughed and told him that it took two to produce children and he could sleep in a different bed if he liked. Bevill had laughed aloud, swept her up in his arms and carried her to their room.

Even with all the wealth of the family it was not possible however to avoid life itself and the experiences of having two of their children die in childbirth often haunted them over the years as Grace went through her pregnancies. Three years later in the year 1626 their third child, a boy was born, they christened him John but his father always referred to him as Jack.

A squall of wind and spray caused Bevill’s thoughts to return to the present. The horse was now rested and flicked his tail, impatient to be on the move, at the side of the horse sat Bevill’s trusted hound Bartle, a huge brown dog with large head and massive teeth, it was now too old now to join the hunt but the big hound followed his master everywhere and was good company. When matters of state took Bevill away from the house the old dog would sit at the gate during all the daylight hours awaiting his masters’ return.

The wind from the west was now damp and chilling. The black stallion of 14 hands was a beautiful beast with long strong legs and heavy barrelled chest; it could carry the 13 stone horseman for hours hardly pausing for breath. Of all Bevill’s horses this was his most reliable mount and had been with him since he had bought him as a foal eight years previously.

The rider tapped the horse’s flank with his heals and it moved off slowly along the cliff top trail. Looking south Bevill could see the long stretch of sand where a shallow river emptied into the sea. The deserted beach stretching away for miles into the distance.

He was in a thoughtful mood and there was much on his mind at this time. Apart from running the estates his duties as Member of Parliament took him to London for much of his time and there were many things to consider. The problems at Westminster were considerable.

This was no doubt one reason why he enjoyed his time in Cornwall so much and he could push matters of state to the back of his mind for a short while. He had arrived the week previous and had spent several days with his wife resting and enjoying her company. The children were a constant joy to him but would give him little peace and he found the need to ride out on his own from time to time. This was one of these occasions and once again his thoughts were involuntarily returning to the problems of state and country.

Without warning the silence was broken by a crashing through the bushes to his left and before he had chance to  move a huge wild pig burst through the undergrowth at the feet of his mount. It was as startled to see the horse as Bevill was to see it and it grunting loudly and lurched in front of the horse causing it to rear up on its hind legs. Bevill struggled to calm the startled animal but as it staggered backwards, its hind hooves fell away over the crumbling cliff edge. Bevill was a fine horseman and instinctively leapt from the saddle as the horse’s pounding hoofs fought to grip the stone and sand of the cliff edge but the sand crumbled and the horse went over. Bevill dived clear from the falling horse but as he did so a front hoof struck his ankle a fierce blow which pushed him towards the cliff edge, the sand and shale crumbled away and took him further over the edge. He grabbed out catching the branch of a prickly gorse bush to which he hung on for his life.

He heard the sound of the horse’s screams which rang in his ears as it crashed over and over down the almost shear drop to the rocks below. Hanging by his fingers he fought to get a foot hold, now he could hear the agonized howling of the dog as it fought the slashing tusks of the crazed boar in the thick scrub a short distance from the trail.

Bevill struggled to get his foot on a slight ledge in the crumbling cliff but his left ankle was in agony and he could only get purchase with his right foot. The branch of the gorse began to come away from the sand unable to withstand the weight of Bevill’s body and he knew that when it gave way he would follow the horse to the rocks below, death was now close.

He felt a hand on his wrist and another grabbed his arm, slowly he felt himself being dragged up inch by inch onto the firm soil of the cliff top. He struggled to sit, coughing and gasping with the effort. He looked at the face of his saviour, it was that of a young man, taller than any man Bevill had ever seen, huge shoulders and massive arms, his face was big and round and his hair was dark and curly. Bevill did not recognise him and took the hand that was offered to him, he was surprised at the size of the stranger’s hard rough hands, and he could feel the strength and power within them.

The young man spoke for the first time. “Be ye  alright my lord” He spoke in the local dialect part Cornish and part English, here so close to Devon where English was the language the people had developed a language of their own and it was most difficult for outsiders to understand. Bevill had become used to his servants way of talking and fully understood what was being said to him.

“I think my ankle could be broken” Bevill replied.

The youth knelt in front of Bevill and attempted to examine his foot but as he gently lifted the riding boot it caused Bevill to cry out in pain. A dark trickle of blood was seeping from the boot to his trouser leg “I am sorry my lord, I will wrap it best I can and we will have to get to Doctor Barnes as soon as we can”. “You will need to keep your weight off it, me thinks”.

Bevill slumped back and allowed the pain to ease, he told the youth to leave the boot alone and let him rest.                                                                       

Bevill looked at the fresh young face and asked “Who do I thank for my life”.

“I am Anthony Payne my lord, son of David Payne, landlord of the Inn at Stratton and your servant my lord”

“How can this be” Bevill asked, “I know every man of Stratton and I know David Payne as well as any”? He has only one son a boy of about 12 years”

The last time we met was seven years ago my lord I be 19 years now, I am David Payne’s only son”.

Bevill looked in disbelief at the boy, there was a familiarity about the face but this person was over a foot taller than he was and must be all of 20 stone in weight.

 “Cut me a staff” Bevill commanded “we will make Stratton by nightfall” He moved his leg again and the pain causing him to clench his teeth.

Anthony Payne went off to do his bidding and Bevill remembered the hound, he could still hear the sound of the pig crashing through the brush, still angry but now a long way off. He called to the dog. It never came and there was no sign of it.

Anthony came across the dog in a clearing as he searched for a sturdy branch. It lay on its side a great gash in its back and another from its groin to chest and the red blood ran freely from the wounds. Anthony knelt by the dog and it rolled its frightened eyes towards him.                                                              

He reached under it and lifted the hound in his huge arms as if it were a baby and carried it back to where Bevill still sat propped against the trunk of a dead tree.

 “He ain’t dead yet me lord but not far off it.”  He laid the dog at its master’s feet and went off once again. He found a stout branch from which to fashion a crutch. On his return he found Bevill with his hand on the big dog’s head. He looked at Anthony and said “I think it best that we dispatch him now and save him the suffering”. Anthony looked down at the dog, its eyes followed him and although he was a country lad and used to the death of animals there was something about the look in the hound’s eyes that compelled to speak up for the dog. “If it is all the same to you me lord I would like to try and save him” “If you will allow it I will take him with us me lord”.

Bevill dragged himself up on the stick and looked closely into the young Payne’s face.

 Not many people would speak out against his wishes. He saw the conviction on the boy’s face. “Very well young man, you carry him.” He spoke softly, turned clumsily on the crutch and hobbled along on one foot as best he could. He was glad that the heavy riding boot kept the ankle from moving although every step sent a shaft of pain through his leg.

Anthony wrapped his coat around the hound and scooping the big dog gently into his arms set off with long strides along the coast path towards Stratton. Bevill made his best pace behind him but it was more than 4 miles along ancient tracks, through the heavily wooded countryside with steep slopes and deep valleys, to the town. Anthony waited every few hundred yards to rest and let Bevill catch up with him. The effort of carrying such a big dog was having its effect on him and even his powerful arms were becoming leaden.

 They did not speak on the journey and it was fully dark by the time they reached the outskirts of Stratton. 

Both were totally exhausted although Anthony did not complain. Bevill’s leg throbbed with the pain and every movement was agony.

 The flickering lights of the town were a welcome sight. This was a small but busy town with the Payne’s inn at its centre close to the church. To either side of the narrow main street were shops and stores of every kind. The people of Stratton were strongly independent and clothing, shoes, food, drink and a dozens of other products were made here mostly from what was gathered or grown locally, along with the goods that were carted in from other market towns in the area.

Bevill could walk no further and sat on a low wall by the church. “Leave the dog and get your father” Bevill told the boy. Anthony was glad to put the dog at its master’s feet for although he made light of it later, it had in fact been a supreme effort of strength on his part. He made his way as fast as he could to his father’s Inn, calling out to him as he got nearer.

David Payne met his son as he reached the heavy oak door; the boy’s face told him something was amiss. “What be the matter son”? He called.

Anthony could hardly speak from his exhaustion and excitement, he gasped out “It be Lord Grenville father, he has lost his horse and hurt his leg real bad. He be up by Church cottage”.

David called back over his shoulder to his wife. “Get the lads to bring the cart, hurry girl, tis Lord Bevill and he be hurt”.

“Sit here lad” he told Anthony and set off up the street, it was only a short distance to the church and he was soon at Bevill’s side. “Tis I my lord, David Payne”.

“Glad to see you David, your son did well, now get some help and take me to the Inn”

“Tis already in hand me lord, they will be here in no time at all”

By now several people had heard the commotion and were gathering in the church square. A two wheeled cart came lumbering up the lane, two of David’s workers pulling for all they were worth, his wife chasing them on from behind. Other men joined them and brought the cart to where Bevill was sitting.

They carefully lifted Bevill onto the bed of straw and it was but a few minutes before they had him back to the Inn.

“You must get word to my wife and arrange my carriage to come for me Mr. Payne, Tell her not to worry it is not serious. In the meantime I could drink some of your strongest brandy”.

“I will see to it right away my lord, I will have the lad ride over to Stowe right away, and he will be there within the hour”. “My wife will have food ready for you in no time at all”.

Chapter two

The night was black and with no moon the darkness was all embracing, few men travelled at night in this sparsely populated land. Ned Thacket had been dispatched by David Payne to tell her Ladyship what had happened. He was a brave and strong young man and although he knew  well the road and tracks to Stowe he had never travelled this way at night and without company it was not a pleasant feeling, a cold mist found its way into his clothes making him more uncomfortable. He urged his horse forward although it was reluctant to move through the dark, not sure of its footing. His eyes eventually adjusted to the dim light from the stars and he picked his way slowly along the trail from Stratton, north towards the Manor at Stowe.

It was almost two hours and close to midnight before he had covered the four miles, and he could make out the welcome lights of the big house. He urged the horse into a trot and the noise of the horse’s hooves on the cobbles of the yard broke the silence and brought the servants running from the stables.

When her husband had not arrived back from his ride at the normal time Grace began to feel concerned and sent two of the stable lads to look for him. Although they searched as best they could once it became dark and there was no sign of him and they reluctantly returned and reported back to her. Grace feared for the worse but being a strong woman and used to commanding others she hid her despair from the servants and organised all the staff men and women to begin a search of the estate from the north sweeping to the south. An hour before Ned arrived, they had given up for the night, there was no hope of searching further on such a black night and the danger of falling from the cliffs was very real.

Lady Grace sat in her study and with her senior staff began planning the search to begin at dawn.

Ned’s arrival and news that the master was found was a great relief to his wife and she ordered the staff to prepare her carriage and horses without delay.

Everyone wanted to go to Stratton to fetch their master but Grace ordered a party of ten on horseback to accompany her. By the time they set off it was well into the night and still as black as pitch with a thick mist rolling in from the sea.

Two men rode ahead carrying lanterns and two rode alongside the carriage horses holding them by lead ropes. With the lights they made better speed than Ned had done and arrived in little over the hour. Dawn was not far off as they arrived as a dim sun climbed lazily from the thick haze.

The whole town was roused by the noise and commotion caused by the arrival of the horsemen and the carriage. The head stableman pounded on the Inn door which was soon opened by the landlord David Payne still partly dressed and dishevelled. “Where is he” Lady Grace asked. “In the parlour my lady, near the fire” he replied, as she swept past him into darkness of the interior.   Bevill Grenville sat propped up in a large chair; David had been forced to cut away the leather riding boot and his leg had already swollen to twice its normal size. Apart from that he had recovered his good nature and had enjoyed a bottle of brandy with the Payne family, who had administered to his every wish, Bevill Grenville was after all not only the most important person they knew but he was also popular and although they generally moved in different social circles Bevill was well-liked by David and his wife.

Bevill was pleased to see his wife and hugged her with an uncommon display of affection. David Payne arrived almost at once with a hot drink of beef stock. He left the two of them to talk until full daylight came over the town.

The local doctor had been sent for but was away from his home attending a patient in Marhamchurch. David Payne sent servants to find him and get him back as quickly as they could. It was still several hours before he arrived and but for the copious amounts of drink that he had consumed, Bevill would have been in agony. The doctor was a tall, middle-aged gentleman with considerable experience in broken limbs. He attended the animals and people over a wide area, setting bones and stitching wounds which were common in a farming community. He had also been the doctor for the Grenville family for many years and new Beville well.

When he arrived he found Bevill quite drunk and incoherent which he thought probably was for the best. He examined the ankle it was a clean break just above the foot. He set about straightening the bone back into place and sewing the skin where the bone had cut through. He worked quietly and quickly, he knew only too well how easy it was for infection to set in. He was hampered by the swelling but eventually was satisfied that it was the best he could do.

He ordered Bevill to rest and remain at the Inn. Bevill was in no mood to argue falling at last into a deep sleep.

Grace slept in the chair by his side and it was evening again before they woke.

Bevill was in a better frame of mind and by the time they had eaten was well into telling her the details of his accident. They remained at the inn for a further night before making arrangements for a carriage to take them home on the third day.

The dog had been forgotten for the time being by everyone except for Anthony.

 In Stratton, living in a small cottage just beyond the church was a very old woman, no one new exactly how old she was but everyone knew her as she was well known for her herbs and potions. She was also the midwife assisting in many births in the town where she passed for as the poor-man’s doctor, she was equally adept at healing animals as humans. Everyone turned to her for help when needed although the children of the town were all wary of her. Eccentric and strange were her ways but she had a great knowledge of plants and their healing properties and could cure tooth ache and all manner of ailments, it was to her that Anthony decided to seek help.

Anthony carried the dog to her door and kicked it with his boot. She soon answered and asked what he wanted. “Tis Lord Greenville’s hound I want you to fix him”. He said.

She lifted the dog’s head and looked at the long slash along its body. “Can’t be done, not worth savin” She said turning to go back in the house. Anthony followed her with the dog still in his arms without giving her a chance to slam the door.

 “Show me what to do, I will save him” he said.

She cackled and looked into his face; she could see his strong and determined look. “Okay let’s see what we can do”.

She told him to put the dog on the table and ran her hands down its back and legs; she was surprised to find that there were no broken bones. “It’s the blood” she said “he has lost a lot and his guts are hanging out” “I will stitch him up and that is the best I can do”.

Anthony watched as she washed off the congealing blood and set about stitching the wound in his belly. She gently eased the insides back into the gash and taking a strong thread and needle started stitching. Anthony was intrigued he had never seen the like. The dog lay still its eyes set in a stare; he must have been in great pain but never murmured.  The old woman fingers moved deftly as she put in one stitch pulled the skin together and tied off in a neat knot. He watched closely and by the time she was half way through stitching the dog’s belly he asked if he could have a go. He didn’t know it then but this operation was to be most useful in his later life.

The woman looked at him and saw that he was serious. “Here then”, she said, handing him the needle and thread. She watched over him with her face close to his hands. She saw that he had strong gentle fingers and after two or three attempts he has able to tie off the knot in the special way that meant they would not come undone.

They finished stitching and wrapped clean rags around the dog’s belly. All the while the dog had been still and as if he knew they were helping him. “That be the best we can do for him now” “you must make him keep still for a day or two and get some water in him he probably won’t want to eat”.

He picked up the dog, thanked the old woman and left. It was getting dark as he carried the dog back to the Inn and out to the barn. He lay him down and fetched water which he poured into the side of its mouth. The dog lapped weakly and lay still once more. Anthony lay down beside him, exhaustion took over and he fell into a deep sleep.

He was wakened with a start. The old cock was perched on the gate a few yards from his head crowing as loud as it was possible. The sky was less dark; it was the dawn of another day.

He rubbed his eyes and looked around at the dog. The head was up and the big eyes were looking right back at him. “Yes” Anthony exclaimed with great joy. The night’s sleep had done them both the world of good. The dog tried to get up but Anthony made it stay. He fetched water from the rain barrel and let the dog lap it up. He then went into the kitchen to eat. Anthony was becoming famous for the amount of food he could eat and today he was starving.

His mother had forgotten all about him in the excitement of having the Grenville family staying at the Inn. She was none the less pleased to see her son. She put her arm around his waist and hugged him to her, the top of her head came up to his arm pit and he was far too tall for her to put her arm around his shoulder. He was so tall he was obliged to duck as he walked through each doorway.

He was the hero, it was all over town. Everyone was talking about Anthony Payne the boy giant who had saved Lord Grenville from a wild boar and how he had carried the huge hound for miles rather than let it die at the cliff.

Anthony nursed the dog for two weeks, each day it became stronger and soon seemed to be eating all the scraps he brought him. Anthony’s mother commented on the amount of good meat Anthony was giving it. It was fortunate that running the inn gave them access to plenty of left-over food from the customer’s tables.

The dog made a remarkable recovery and by the end of the month was jogging alongside Anthony and accompanying him everywhere.

One morning just after a month from the accident a servant arrived from Stowe house. It was a message from Lord Grenville to Anthony Payne; he was summoned to attend the house on the following day.

Anthony was awake early the following morning and ate a huge breakfast; he was looking forward to seeing Lord Grenville and to discover how his leg had mended. On the other hand he would be sad to give the dog back now they had become good friends, the young giant and the huge hunting hound had become a talking point around the area.

However it was Lord Grenville’s dog and he was sure the great man would be pleased to get his favourite dog back. They set off together for the house at Stowe it took not much more than an hour at the pace Anthony walked.

He entered the courtyard, where there was much activity. To his left the blacksmith furnace was blazing and horses waiting to be shod. Grooms were cleaning and preparing a carriage.

He waved to them most of them new him and called out greetings.

He went around to the back entrance and knocked and waited. A maid answered. “Anthony Payne to see Lord Grenville”, he announced himself. He was shown into a room behind the kitchen. He stood hat in hand and waited. The big dog sat at his feet looking up into his face.

He was not kept waiting long before the door opened and the imposing figure of Lord Grenville came into the room, he walked with a pronounced limp and carried a stick in each hand. Anthony was always surprised at meeting him. His very presence seemed to exude authority. Men who were taken into his household were faithful and trusted his leadership without question.

“Come with me Mr. Payne” he said and strode out through the back door into the yard. Anthony followed him with the dog close behind.

They marched around to the front of the building into the courtyard. Bevill still used his silver cane but felt much better, his leg would probably always give him pain but he was pleased to be on his feet. He had a mischievous look on his face but it was lost on Anthony.

He called to all the people in the yard to come to him. They left their duties and gathered around.

“This man lifted me from the cliff with one hand; I want to know how strong he really is. He ordered the blacksmith to clear his anvil. A solid iron object of considerable size and weight.

He looked at the blacksmith, a man of medium height but with massive arms and shoulders.

“Lift it up Arnold” he ordered pointing to the anvil.

The blacksmith had a puzzled look on his face but did as he was bid and walked around the anvil, it had been purchased in Exeter the previous year and he remembered that it had taken four men to carry it from the cart to the forge. He put one hand under the square end and the other around the point and heaved. The anvil came up an inch; he lowered it and got a better grip. The veins stood out on his neck and his eyes bulged. But the best he could do was to lift the one end a few inches.

“Anyone else think they can lift it “Bevill asked.

One big young man stepped forward and put both hands around the anvil he strained with all his might but the anvil remained as if bolted to the ground.

Bevill looked into Anthony’s eyes “You lift it Mr. Payne.”

Anthony walked around the anvil observing its shape. He had to lower his head to get into the forge

He took a deep breath and wrapped his forearms around the anvil’s centre. Linking his fingers he bent his knees and heaved upwards his muscles bulged and the veins stood out like cords of wire.

As he straightened his legs the anvil came up into his arms, he turned and with a mighty heave tossed it into the yard.

The men roared in admiration. Such a feet of strength they had never seen. It took all the men to get it back into the forge.

Bevill chuckled and put his hand on Anthony’s arm. “Come” he said and led Anthony back to the Big House, this time through the front door.

They went into a great hall. Anthony had never been in this part of the house, he was amazed at the paintings and drapes that covered the walls and the huge silver candle holder suspended from the high ceiling. They passed through into a smaller room with fine furniture and ornaments. Lady Grenville was sitting at a table. Two female servants stood next to her.  “Grace, this is Mr. Payne the young man to whom we owe my life”

Grace Grenville rose from her chair. Anthony looked at her face, a more beautiful woman he had never seen.

When she spoke to him her voice was soft and gentle. She was tall for a Cornish woman but had to look upwards to his face. The ceiling in the room was high but Anthony seemed to fill the room with his great size. Anthony was already over twenty stone with thick arms and broad shoulders. He could not take his eyes off Lady Grace. She spoke again. “I can never repay you for saving my husband from certain death but there are things I can do for you. This house is your house, you will always have a place at my table and your family will never be without food”. She turned and lifted a sword, which was in a leather scabbard, from the table. She handed it to Anthony. “This is a small token of my gratitude”.

Anthony took the scabbard and slowly drew out the sword; He lifted it to the light in front of him. He had seen many at his father’s inn but never one such as this. The hand guard was finely patterned silver with gold trim. It had been hand carved and had been a treasure of Grace’s family for more years than even she could remember. The scabbard was of the finest leather with ornate carving.

Anthony could only mumble, the servant girls giggled at his discomfort. Bevill laughed and poured two glasses of claret into fine cut glasses. Anthony took the glass, the finest glasses in the inn were nothing in comparison and although he had tasted a numerous drinks at the inn none were ever better than this and he could appreciate its quality. The taste of the wine was different from anything he had ever tasted before.

Bevill could see his discomfort and led him from the room. Anthony clutched the sword and mumbled his thanks once again to Lady Grenville.

Once in the yard Anthony let out a deep breath and began to relax again.  Bevill asked him to walk with him. They exited the courtyard and climbed the hill above the house. Bevill leg ached and he struggled to walk by the time they reached the summit.

They stood for a moment looking out across the woods to the sea.

Anthony felt he had to speak. “Why the game with the anvil my lord”

Bevill was silent for a moment “No game Mr. Payne.” I have a plan and you are part of it. I want you to join my regiment. I will teach you to be a soldier and more than that I will teach you to be a leader of soldiers. If you wish you will become my master at arms you will lead the foot soldiers.

Anthony asked “but why the anvil”

“You are young and to get respect you will have to have an edge, your size and strength will ensure obedience from people far older than you. I was confident that you could lift it and the word will soon get about; no one in their right mind will challenge your authority. He turned and looked the young man in the eye and said “but first you have learning to do, are you ready”??

“Yes sir it would be my honour to serve you”.

Bevill turned and headed down the hill. “Go home and tell your father of my plan. Join me at Stowe on Friday next”

Anthony turned to go followed closely by the big dog that had followed close behind them. He turned back and said. “My lord I forgot to tell you I have returned your dog”.

Bevill looked at the way the dog followed in the footsteps of Anthony Payne and smiled. “Take him home Mr. Payne he is more your dog now than he ever would be mine”.

Anthony set off home the dog trotted by his side, Anthony’s mind was in a spin he tried to take stock of the days events, he took the sword from its scabbard and swung it back and forth as he walked; life would never be the same again for Anthony Payne.

It was ironic that although he became a respected member of the Grenville household, in the following twelve years of service he never once sat at the great table with Grace Grenville or took food from the house for his family.

Chapter 3

The bone in his ankle took longer than expected to heal and Bevill became frustrated because he could not get full mobility in his foot. It ached in the cold weather and although he brought a surgeon from Exeter to attend to him it was several months before he was able to ride without pain.

 He spent most of his time writing and reading, letters were dispatched on an almost daily basis to his colleagues in London and he read avidly the replies as they were delivered. He also had time to consider replacing the beautiful horse that he had lost.

He knew more about horses than most people and above all he knew what he wanted, eventually the frustration of sitting around was too much and he had the stablemen make adjustments to his carriage so that he could sit comfortably with his leg elevated on a stool which was clamped to the seat opposite. With the carriage ready he could be taken into Stratton and on to Holsworthy, some ten miles away, for the weekly markets where everything could be bought or sold. The sales at these markets were brisk and interesting with a great deal of bartering. Much of the town’s business was conducted at the market and farmers, professional traders and people with just a few items would come from miles around, many on foot to sell their wares. Horses and cattle, sheep and pigs, chickens and ducks.  Every form of leather crafts and clothing, shoes and boots were stacked high on carts and pack ponies.  Bevill searched in vain for a classic horse one that would stand out from all the rest, everything he had seen had been heavy and clumsy, fine for  pulling a cart or carrying a soldier with full equipment. He wanted a lighter horse that could travel at great speed but strong enough to carry him on a hunt across the hilly country and one that would run for ever. 

He did not find the horse he was looking for and put the word out that he was in the market for a good horse before returning home. Six weeks after the accident he received word from the solicitor and great friend Andrew Scott. Andrew lived in the central Devonshire town of Hatherleigh; he reported that he had seen a horse at the market. He described it as the finest stallion he had ever seen. It was from Arabian stock, jet black and with unusually graceful lines.

He had made enquiries about the horse’s owner and subsequently discovered that it had been purchased by a wealthy merchant at Oakhampton who had bought it for his wife. The horse had proved to be too powerful and she was unable to control it. The merchant had no option but to look for a buyer. Andrew had told Bevill that he had intended to buy it for himself but the asking price was way beyond his means. He had mentioned to the dealer that Bevill Grenville might be interested and the dealer said he would return with it to Hatherleigh for the following weekly market.

 Bevill knew that Andrew was a fine horseman and would not exaggerate. Intrigued he told Grace that he was off to Hatherleigh for the next market day and as it was more than 30 miles he would stay overnight with Andrew. She was pleased for him to go and instructed his groom and servants to take him the following Sunday. Market day in Hatherleigh being Monday. He sent word to Andrew telling him of the arrangements and told Will and Daniel that he wanted them to accompany him.

Sunday arrived and Bevill said farewell to Grace and the party set off early for Hatherleigh, Bevill was in high spirits and tried to forget the ache in his foot.

They left at first light, Will and Daniel rode in front of the carriage. Arnold, Bevill’s head groom drove the carriage, which was pulled by two heavy horses, Bevill sat facing forward resting his leg on the improvised stool in front of him. From his seat he had a good view of the road ahead.  These were not good times to be travelling without adequate protection and in addition to Will and Daniel he had asked Jonas Page to make the journey with him. The old soldier rode close up at the rear. Jonas was the eldest of Bevill’s personal guard and knew his duties without having to be told.

 At approaching forty years of age he had been with the Grenville family for most of his adult life, he lived in a small cottage on the estate close to the great house with his wife and three sons, two of his boys were already training with Bevill’s foot soldiers. They reached Stratton in an hour and were joined by a young man who went by the name of John Pascoe, at 17 years of age he was the newest to Bevill’s personal guard. Bevill had watched him in training and his horsemanship was as good as Bevill had seen among his horse soldiers. He had shown great skill with the sword and would be a fine cavalry soldier. Bevill had asked for him to join them he felt the experience would be good for him. John greeted Daniel and Will with enthusiasm as he had already met them at the training camp, he looked up to them for their skill and horsemanship, he was proud to be allowed to travel with them. He had a ruddy boyish face and an innocence of a 17 year old. He smiled often and Will joked with him and teased him about the length of his hair which was thick and curly and grew down to below his shoulders. John enjoyed the banter knowing that it was a sign of acceptance by the older men. He rode his horse into place beside Jonas at the rear and the party continued their journey without stopping. Jonas nodded to the lad but said nothing; he was a man of few words.

Most of Bevill’s troops still lived and worked at home, being summoned for training as he commanded.  John would soon leave his family in Stratton and live with his fellow men in the barracks at Stowe as part of the personal guard. 

The party passed through Stratton before most of the town’s folk were about and the hooves of the horses clattered on the cobbles of the quiet market square, they turned out of town at the crossroads and began the climb up the long hill out of town, soon they were on the main road to Holsworthy.

The journey was so far uneventful. Bevill sat back in his seat and spent much of his time deep in thought. His eyes drifted to the broad backs of the two men riding ahead of him. Although they were known as servants, they were much more than that. In the five years since they had been with him he had taught them to all he knew about sword fighting, pistols and muskets. They were his most trusted soldiers.

 His mind turned back to the time of their first meeting. Bevill had ‘found’ them in Truro on one of his visits to his father’s mansion. As he rode into town he had come across a noisy gathering with several dozen men forming a circle on the grassy space close to the river.  From his vantage point on his horse Bevill had a commanding view of events. Two men were in the middle of the crowd. Both were stripped to the waist and engaged in a ferocious bare-knuckle fight.

They stood toe to toe and the punches from each were striking hard blows, they staggered back and forward but neither giving way, soon they were bloody and exhausted. He watched with interest, Bevill was a good judge of men and two stronger fighters he could not recall seeing. He called to a man close to him. “What goes here my good man”?

“Tis a fight for the Truro champion and there be a lot of money on it. The matches have been going on all day and they two are the ones left. They two hates each other. They will fight till one goes down and can’t get up.”

 The fight continued and the crowd began to get restless, this was lasting too long and many wanted the fight to end.  Feelings were running high as a lot of money had been bet on both men. Suddenly a member of the crowd lashed out with his boot and took out the legs of one fighter. The young man went down and, in an instant, the jovial mood of the crowd changed. At first they pushed and shoved each other but that soon changed and fists began flying in all directions as the good mood changed suddenly to bad temper and mob rule took over. Suddenly knives appeared and the two men at the centre of the crowd were being pushed and pulled in all directions, both too exhausted to properly defend themselves.

  Bevill could see the danger to the two fighters and decided that his best course was with direct action; he drew his pistol and fired over the crowd. They fell back in surprise and before they had time to recover, he rode into them, several at the back crashed into the river in the Mêlée, as he reached the two men at the centre he yelled at them “to me”. “Take hold”.

 Both had the presence of mind to grab for the saddle straps. Bevill put spurs to the horse and it leapt into full stride. The two fighters were dragged by the powerful horse out of the crowd before most of the mob realised what was happening.

Bevill urged the horse on and it galloped away with the two men running hard to keep up with it along the river bank and into the open country beyond. Some of the crowd gave chase but seeing the futility of it soon gave up, A few hundred yards and they could barely hear the voices behind them.

Bevill slowed the horse and came to a stop the two men fell to their knees and gasped for breath. “Thank you sir” one managed to gasp as they got their breath back. “I think we would have been hard pressed to get out of there alive”.

“I don’t think we will be welcome back there for a while” the other said with a wry laugh.

Bevill was studying the men they were both younger than he had expected under 20 years he guessed. Both were tall and muscular with the Cornishman’s thick curly dark hair and leathery skin.

He watched the men as they slowly regained their wind. A plan was already forming in his mind.  He addressed the nearest “I have work for strong men” “Are you interested”?

The man looked into Bevill’s face and saw something there that moved him to say softly. “Yes Sir”

“And You”? He looked into the face of the second. “Yes sir I would be proud to work for you sir”. He hesitated for a moment before adding “doing what exactly”

“Fighting of course” Bevill said with a smile.  “My name is Bevill Grenville; meet me at the Bell Inn in Bodmin at noon in three days’ time that will be Friday. I will be returning on that day to Stratton”. He turned the horse and set off at a steady trot towards his father’s mansion at withal.

Although the two men were from different towns and different backgrounds they did not hate each other as the old man in Truro had said. In fact they did not know each other, they had opposed each other in a fight for the title and that was all. Now that was now in the past, they looked at each other and eventually shook hands. The two men were to discover that they had much more in common than they could ever believe and already had more than a grudging respect for each other. They set off together skirting Truro city so as to avoid any incident; they were men of few words and merely exchanged names and arranged to meet up at the Bell Inn on the Thursday evening. At the outskirts of Truro they shook hands again and went their separate ways.  Will headed north and Daniel south.

Daniel Postlet lived with his widowed mother and his sister Rachael in a poor area of Falmouth close to the docks; he walked at a good pace and covered the twelve miles from Truro to Falmouth just as the evening as the sun went down. Daniel had since childhood helped support his mother in anything he could do, he could always get work in the dockyard but it was labouring, heavy and dangerous, accidents were common. Fighting came easy to him and he was often in trouble.

He made his way through the bustling streets, Falmouth was a town that was kept busy day and night, the ships came in and out depending on the tides, loading and unloading went on at all times. Eventually Daniel arrived home and was greeted by his sister.  Rachael was a good looking girl, two years younger than Daniel but the heavy work she was forced to undertake took its toll on her and her face was tired and drawn. He hugged her and kissed his mother as she came out of the back room to greet him. They were pleased that he was home he had not told them where he was going and it was now after dark.

 He could not wait to tell them of his day and his meeting with Bevill Grenville avoiding mention of the fight. He could not fool his mother however, even in the poor candle light the bruising under his eye and his split lip were a certain giveaway. His sister went to fetch a cloth and wiped the dried blood from his face. They sat and looked at him until he had no option but to confess to fighting and they insisted that he tell them of the fight for the Truro title. His mother and sister were angry at him but they knew there was no point in scolding Daniel he had been fighting before and would surely do so again. He explained that he had given his word and he had to go and that it would be for the best, he would be able to send money to them and life would be easier.

They were both upset at the thought of him going so far away from them for what could be a long time but they understood his reasons for leaving, they were such a close family it would be hard for all of them.  The two were in tears when Thursday came and he had to say his goodbyes.

He set off early in the morning not sure how long it would take him to get to Bodmin. Daniel promised to return as soon as possible and left, he felt sad to be leaving his mother and sister but the prospect of a new life away from the docks with the chance of adventure was more than any young man could resist.

 He had few possessions and apart from a spare shirt stuffed in a bag slung over his shoulder and a few hard biscuits that his mother had insisted he took with him, he had nothing else to carry, it was good to travel light.

It was the month of May and the sun was already high and with the weather looking set fair he was in good spirits. His reading was not good but he followed the road signs as best he could but once past Truro he was in unfamiliar country and he was careful to make sure he kept to the right road. He rested in a village centre where he found a well with fresh water and was glad of the biscuits his mother had insisted he take. He pressed on and managed to cover the 30 miles to Bodmin in just less than 8 hours, good time considering the roughness of the roads.

After leaving Daniel at Truro Will Hooper had travelled north through the town of Redruth and on to the family home at the village of Chasewater located some four miles north east of the town. His father was Jake Hooper, a Blacksmith and master Ferrier. Will’s mother Mary had a small bakery where she baked bread and cakes which she sold in the village as well as looking after her hungry family. Jake was well known as a master blacksmith and as a consequence was kept very busy; they had six sons all of whom from an early age worked at shoeing and making fittings for horses along with wheels for carts and even helmets and armour for soldiers.

The youngest son William caused concern for his parents, unlike the other boys he was in trouble and fighting at every opportunity and today was no different, Will had been gone all day and it was now late evening. His father was closing down the furnace for the night, the thick ash that he shovelled onto the coals would keep the fire burning through the night, and it was never good to let the fire go out, he found that it was always the devil’s job to relight it.

Will caught up with his father at the forge. He had been busy and not missed Will but his wife had told him that Will had been gone all day. Will had not told them that he was going to Truro and had slipped away before first light. His father looked at his face in the failing light and could see the puffed cheek and black around his eyes and knew that he had been in a fight. He told Will to go into the house and tell his mother that he was back and safe and that he would join them soon. Three of William’s brothers were at home along with his mother and father. His brothers, Samuel, Henry and Benjamin were all big and strong like his father, and like their father their hair was cut short and face hair trimmed short, there was no place for people with long hair near a roaring forge and the short hair was a traditional trade mark of a smith. The brothers were very fond of Will but none of them could understand his fondness and ability for getting into trouble, they made fun of their younger brother and demanded to know where he had been and what he had been up to. 

He knew that there was no way that he could avoid telling them the truth and eventually the family gathered around and listened with great interest as he retold the day’s events. Will’s mother was a big woman and after giving birth to six boys and bringing them all up, she was still good looking. Her dark curly hair was tied back on the top of her head and her face was ruddy and healthy looking from her life with her blacksmith family. She brought a great board of food for all her hungry men, this was a daily ritual.  The Hooper family made a good living and ate well. Home-made bread and cheese with a large knuckle of ham for starters. One of his brothers brought a large jug of home-made cider from the cellar and they settled down to hear every detail.

His father had listened with interest saying very little. Will told them how he had got talked into fighting to be Truro champion and the prize money he could have won. Once he got to the point where he made it known that he would be going to Stratton his mother shouted and made a fuss about her youngest son leaving home, secretly she felt it could be a good thing and she consoled herself that Stratton was not all that far away even though none of her family had ever been there.

On Thursday morning she sorted out spare clothes and packed food and a canvas drinking pouch full of cider for the journey. Will’s father went back to the house and came out with a long leather bag. “I want you to take this William” he said. He handed over the bag which Will opened with interest. It was a sword, not an ordinary sword but a sword made of the finest hammered steel. His father had made it himself, it had taken weeks to complete and it was a prized possession. “I cannot see into the future my son but I do believe you will have more use for this than I”. Will replaced the sword in its holder and shook his father’s hand. Will’s brothers came to see him off. His eldest brother Benjamin who at 38 years was like a second father to him, he seemed to have spent half his life getting Will out or bother, he put their arms around Will’s shoulders and hugged him firmly. Will had a tear in his eye as he said farewell to his mother but as with Daniel the urge to travel and have great adventures was too strong to resist.

 His father had to travel to Redruth that morning and told Will that he could travel with him that far. They set off on the cart. It was still early morning. Will was aware that the journey would take most of the day. They spoke very little but his father crushed him warmly to him with his bear like arms and they parted company at the crossroads to Bodmin.                                 

Will’s bag was heavy but he made little of it. He rested several times during the day. He was in no real hurry and enjoyed the walk through the rolling moors. There were few travellers and he spoke to no-one, arriving at the outskirts of Bodmin as the sun went down.

He had never been to Bodmin, it was a busy market town and the narrow-cobbled streets were becoming noisy with people going about their business. Numerous inns and drinking houses carried on a lively trade in the town centre. Will wandered around stopping to ask a street trader where he could find the bell Inn. He followed the instructions and eventually found the Inn in a narrow street near the northern outskirts of the town.

Will found Daniel sitting on the step outside the Inn. They shook hands pleased to have met up without problems. Will said “let’s get a drink and see if we can get a room for the night.” “Fat chance of that” Daniel replied. “I an’t got two farthings”

“Ah well Daniel I will have to let you in on a secret”

He opened his shirt and drew out a leather pouch. He loosened the string and poured a handful of silver coins into Daniels hand.

“You remember I said we would not be welcome back in Truro? “well this is the reason, I got people to put money on me before the fight and I told them I would hold the money for safety.

“ I think there are a dozen or more people who would cut my throat given a chance.”

They laughed together and went into the Inn. Whether by chance or design Bevill Grenville’s choice of the Bell Inn at Bodmin as a meeting place was, on refection, not a place for naive young men to be. It was a known meeting place for cut-throats and men who made their living in any way that did not involve working.

On this Thursday there were perhaps a score of people in the inn, several travellers laughed and drank beer in the centre of the main room and a group sat around a table on the far corner playing cards. The roof was low with thick oak beams and the interior was poorly lit, a cloud of thick smoke hung in the air from the tobacco pipes of the drinkers. The lamp over the bar made it possible to identify the landlord and his wife. They were as different as you could imagine he was small and thin and she was a very big woman with huge breasts sagging low on her waist.

The two young men strode up to the bar their heads brushing the low beams.

“A beer for each of us if you please” Will spoke first. “We have walked a long way”.

 “Show us some money lad” the landlord requested.

Will took out his purse and poured out the coins onto the counter. In hindsight he was to regret the move. Several eyes watched his actions.

“We would have a room for the night” Daniel said looking at the woman.

Her face was poke marked but friendly and Daniel warmed to her.

“We have several travellers staying tonight but I can give you the attic room” “do you want food?” “I have a mutton and potato pie hot and ready”

“That will do us fine” Will replied. “How much will that be?”

The landlady told him the room and food came to one shilling and eight pence. Will counted out two silver shillings; he told her he would pay for the beer when they had had enough. She was happy with that arrangement, and they headed for a quiet corner at the back of the room. The beer went down a treat and they ordered a gallon jug to last them the evening.

They were both excited at the prospect of working for Lord Grenville. Daniel because the prospect of regular employment which he hoped would give him the chance to help his mother and sister get out of the dump they were living in. Will because he had no intention of following his father into the blacksmith business, this was a great chance to have an adventure and see more of the country. Although Stratton was only around fifty miles North West from Truro nether had been that far away from home.

They ate their fill of the mutton pie and potatoes and quaffed the beer with relish. The Inn got noisier and busier as the evening went by. Will noticed a woman watching them from across the room. He looked back again; he caught her eye and she realised he was watching her and this time she smiled at him. “That be a good-looking wench and no mistake” he said to Daniel. Daniel chuckled. He had seen a lot of women who frequented the bars in Falmouth and could spot a whore without difficulty.

If she was in the inn at night then she was certainly a whore. Will on the other hand had no experience of women outside the village where he grew up and lived until today, young women were difficult to come into contact with and he doubted whether he had spoken to half a dozen in his whole life.

He smiled back at the woman. Daniel told him he thought she was a whore and after his money but Will did not want to know. She was quite good looking in the dim candle lights and Will was flattered by the fact that she was taking notice of him, and why not, he was big, strong and handsome.

With the woman was a tall, heavy built man with a thick beard which covered most of his face, she whispered in his ear, and they laughed together. She left the man and wandered around the room until she arrived at their table. She smiled at Will and leaned forward her breasts almost fell out of her top; Will’s eyes almost fell out of his head. Daniel observed her with his knowledgeable eye. She was not so close up with a pock marked face. Will was not looking at her face. She spoke for the first time “see anything you fancy deary”. Will went red in the face. “No need to be shy, buy me a drink of gin and you can have a feel of em if you like”. Daniel chuckled and Will was stuck for words he got up clumsily and went over to the bar and ordered a gin. The landlord handed him the tankard with a wink. “You be in there lad” he chuckled and took Will’s offered three penny coins. When he got back to the table the woman had sat herself down and was looking at Daniel. “How about you darling, you fancy a feel”. Daniel said  “No thanks darlin” and turned to Will. He could see that Will not in a mood to leave and said “I am off to sleep I will see you later” “Okay Daniel me and the lady want to get better acquainted an’t that right” he looked across at the woman. “That’s right love” she smiled and put her arm through Will’s. Daniel got up and left and whispered in Daniels ear “Be careful”. Daniel was not Will’s keeper, but he knew the potential for trouble was there for all to see.

The corner where Will and the woman sat was quite dark with just the flicker of the lantern lighting the white of her breasts, they were forcing themselves over the top of her dress and her nipples were almost clear of the material. Will was transfixed by them and she leaned closer to his ear. “Want to feel them do you”. Will nodded and she took his hand and placed it against her. He had never felt anything like it before. Soft and tender flesh. She whispered in his ear again, “For a shillin you can have something else” She guided his hand down to her thigh and opened her legs slightly. He could feel her warmth. Will was now well out of his depth but excited and fumbled for his purse. She watched as he took out a shilling coin and handed it to her. She noted the bright colour of the coins in the purse and that the purse was heavy. “Let’s go outside” she said in a husky voice. Will thought that everyone would be looking at them leave but no one turned a head as they went out into the warm night air, he was unaware of the two men watching his movements from a shadowy corner of the room. The woman led Will by the hand and into the stable through the entrance at the side of the inn.

A solitary lantern burned dimly outside but once inside the stable was in darkness. The woman pulled Will to him and lifted her skirt. His hands fumbled inside the fords of cloth. Not too sure of what to do he allowed the woman to expertly guide his hands as she pressed against him. Will was absorbed in the experience and almost taken by surprise, a slight movement off to his left caught his eye; instinctively he stepped back from the woman just as a heavy weight crashed across his shoulder. Had he not moved the cudgel would have broken his skull, instead it struck a glancing blow on his shoulder but with enough force to send him to his knees. His heavy jacked absorbing much of the energy. His fighting and survival skills took over and he rolled across the floor deeper into the shadow. He was up on his knees in a flash and took in the surroundings as well as he could in the near darkness.

He heard the woman call out “you got him Jed, over there” He could see her in the doorway as a third person lifted down the lantern and came into the stable.

Back in the inn Daniel had been handed a lantern by the landlady and had said goodnight. He made his way up the narrow staircase to the attic room. It was hot and smelly and he forced open the little window. He stood breathing in the cool air. From the window he could see the roof of the stable next door and the lights from the inn lit up a little way down the street. He could hear the murmur of voices from the Inn below. He was about to turn back to the bed when a movement caught his eye. Someone was slowly moving towards the stable keeping to the shadows. His curiosity aroused he stood and watched for a couple of minutes and saw no further movement he decided it was none of his business and as he went to turn again when he caught sight of two people hurrying into the stable. He recognised the big shape of Will and the voice of the woman from her raucous giggle.

Daniel knew that what Will did where women were concerned was not his business but his cautious nature took note of all the movements in the street, someone was lurking in the shadows and the hair on his neck bristled as the sudden realization came to him that the woman was taking Will into a trap.

He hurriedly pulled on his boots and headed down the stairs. He decided not to go through the bar but sought the back entrance into the yard where the drinkers relieved themselves into the sewerage ditch. He was as light as a feather on his feet as he skirted the building and came silently up to the stable door.  He could see two men and the woman they were cursing and searching among the horses. Daniel picked up a pitchfork and entered the stable. One of the men heard his footsteps in the straw and swung around. Daniel was slow to realise that the man was armed with a pistol and he leaped to one side as the thug’s gun boomed a few feet from his body. The ball tore across his ribs and swung him around. He went to his knee but still held onto the pitchfork. The second man ran at him the heavy stick raised high to strike. He never saw the pitchfork until it was six inches into his chest and his weight drove him forward onto the sharp spikes.  He was dead by the time he hit the ground. Will came out of the shadows and hit the man, holding  the pistol,  under the ear with a mighty punch. He fell heavily the lantern flying from his hand to burst on the floor the oil quickly spreading and set fire to the straw in an instant.

 Daniel caught Will by the arm and rushed him to the stable entrance. The woman had been silent until now but crouching over the two bodies began to shout “murder, murder” “they have murdered them”.

At the sound of the shot people had begun to come from the Inn. They came cautiously to the stable entrance where they were met by a billowing cloud of smoke pouring out into the street. Fire was a real and terrifying threat and the fear of the Inn burning down or catching adjoining buildings sent the men scurrying for water.

The reason for the shot was forgotten for the moment. Daniel shouted to Will to get the bags and ran back through the gathering crowd into the barn and he pulled down the fences releasing the horses that were now terrified and spooked by the smell of smoke. The horses scrambled and crashed out of the entrance careering into the crowd that was still gathering. Daniel could not see through the smoke but heard the scream of the woman inside the door; she had been trampled by the stampeding horses.

 Everything had happened so fast and his instinct was to grab at the last horse holding on for his life to its mane as it crashed in fear out of the barn dragging him with it, he was well away from the barn before he could stop the terrified animal’s headlong flight.

Will circled to the back stairs and ran up to their room. He was in a hurry to be gone but not without their bags and in particular the sword his father had given him. The smoke was filling the Inn from the fast burning straw and no-one noticed him scurrying into the darkness.

Daniel led the horse off the road and tethered him to a tree. The night was so black that he could barely make out shapes around him. He moved a few yards from the horse and settled down on his haunches it would be a long night but he dare not wander around in the dark. If men were sent out looking for him he would be at a great disadvantage for he knew nothing of the area.

Chapter 4      

As the first light of dawn crept over the hills Daniel was alert and easing his aching joints.  It had been a long night and even in May the night air had been chilling him to the bone and getting any sleep had been almost impossible.

He went over to the horse; the mare was intelligent and eyed him with suspicion. Daniel had little experience with animals but he could see it was a fine big horse. It had a rope around its neck but no saddle or harness, all its equipment had been left in the barn.  Daniel untied the rope from the tree and led the horse out and back to the track. He looked in each direction and strained his ears for any sound. A startled crow flew from a nearby tree and some way off other birds were beginning their dawn chorus. It was still early and the sun had not yet cleared the horizon; there were no other sounds that he could detect.  Daniel stood still for several minutes thinking of his options. His brain was in turmoil. Where was Will, what should he do?

Did Will get away?

Which direction should he go?

Should he wait and see if Will followed him? Not a good idea he concluded as the one other major problem was that he did not know in which direction he had left the town and had no idea which road he was now on.

The sun slowly climbed from the mist. Daniel looked in that direction. He knew that the sun rose in east. The road he was on led north away from Bodmin. He decided to follow the road north and find somewhere to hide until he could think things through.  His belly told him he had to get something to eat but that was not likely. Daniel kept close to the trees avoiding the open road as much as he could but soon the trees gave way to the open moor, here there was little cover and he could be seen from every direction.

He had covered a couple of miles and had not encountered anyone else travelling the road the horse insisted on stopping every few yards to eat the lush grass at the roadside and Daniel spent his time pulling the rope and cursing the horse which instinctively knew that it could get the better of him.

As he came over a low rise he noticed a clump of trees off to his right. As he got closer he could see the trees were in a thick group set well back from the road, an ideal place to rest up.

He led the horse through a gap in the trees into the copse. He stopped suddenly and stiffened, he sniffed the air. Smoke! Someone was here.

He tethered the horse to a tree and crept silently forward. He stood motionless in the small clearing for a few moments; he could see the remains of a still smouldering fire which had been hurriedly scattered. The horse stood stock still behind him as if it could feel Daniel’s tension.

A sound from above caused him to look up into the trees. Too late, a body came silently out of the tree above him. He crashed to the ground instinct causing him to roll onto his back. On this occasion he was far too slow and the assailant was heavy, in an instant he was sitting across his chest. A knife flashed in his right hand its blade forcing his neck back. “Daniel?” He looked into the face above him. “Will” “God it is you” Will rolled away from Daniel and got to his feet, he dragged him up from the ground and Daniel shook him firmly by the shoulders. Both men were shaking with relief but soon gathered their composure.

The last 24 hours had been a hard learning experience. Will raked the embers of the fire into a heap and it soon burst into life. He brought their bags from behind a tree where he had quickly hidden them once he had heard someone approaching and as if by magic pulled a rabbit from his pack. “Where did you get that” Daniel asked in amazement. “I caught it of course”. Will replied. “You have a lot to learn about the country Daniel”  “you wouldn’t last long out of town that’s for sure”.

Will took his knife and skilfully slit the rabbit, he showed Daniel how to pull off the skin. Will rigged up two sticks and pushed another through the length of the rabbit. Within half an hour they were chewing on the sweet fresh flesh. It was as good a meal as Daniel could ever remember.

They sat quietly for a while both silently contemplating their situation. Daniel opened his shirt and examined the red weal across his chest. The heavy lead ball had hardly broken the skin and he knew just how lucky he had been an inch further and the ball would have been buried deep. Will took off his jacket and shirt and examined his shoulder, there was a blackening area across the top of the bone but it was not broken, they concluded that they had got away lightly.

They sat in silence for a long while until Daniel spoke.

 “Do you know where we are Will?”

“Well I saw the signpost for Launceston back a ways so we are in the right direction”.

Daniel had seen the sign but ignored it as he could not make a word of the letters. Will on the other hand had had a good schooling his father had insisted that he and all his brothers had to learn to read and write. 

“We need to decide what we are going to do” Will stated. They sat thinking for a while the silence broken eventually by the horse. It was still tied up where Daniel had left it and as the heat of the day increased the flies had started to drive it wild. Unable to get out from under the tree its patience had broken. It started to stamp and call out. Will realised what was happening and moved quickly to tend to it. He was a master with horses and stood in front of its head. He spoke quietly to it and the horse became calm. Daniel was impressed. Will led the horse into the clearing away from the swarm of flies. “Where did you get him” Will asked. “She saved me from the fire so I brought her along, I didn’t know what else to do”.

Will filled his hat with water from his bottle and the horse drank greedily, he ran his hands over the animal’s entire body checking its neck and flanks closely, from its size and looks Will concluded that it was quite young probably not more than a yearling.

 Will continued his examination.

“What are you doing “Daniel asked. “Looking for the owners mark” “if it has a mark we will have to leave it” “horse stealing is a hanging matter” Will replied. Once he had checked the horse thoroughly, he declared it was all clear it did not have a sign of ownership which would have been burnt into its skin, probably on its way to market for the sales. Daniel could keep the horse after Will had put his mark on it. 

Will stoked the embers of the fire and put his knife into the cinders. The end of the blade was soon glowing red. “Well Daniel what is your mark” Will enquired.

Daniel thought for a while and began drawing in the dust of the fire with a stick. He laboriously drew a ‘D’ for Daniel and tried to write a ‘P’ into the centre to represent his name but it didn’t look right. He crossed the stick through the middle and got up. “Forget it “. He said and gathered his belongings together. Will looked back to the ground he could see a clean picture of the “D” with an “X” through the centre. “That’s it Daniel” “Daniel X”. Will worked expertly at his task. He ran the hot blade over the horses rump in the shape of the D and drew the blade through the centre with an

X, the horse shivered and tried to back away from the smell of burning hair but Will held it firmly. He observed his handy work “Good, Now Daniel hold his head still” Daniel pulled the horse’s head to him while Will pressed the blade swiftly through his original mark. Horse reared in pain but Daniel hung on with all his weight. The horse calmed down and Will gathered dust from the edge of the fire, he rubbed the dust into the burn. Daniel watched with interest. “What was that for“ he enquired. “Within a day or so that mark will look like it has been there for a long time, a trick I learned from my father”   Will replied. “Only one thing left to do” “give her a name”.

“I “said Daniel “ will have to think on that”.

They gathered up the rest of their possessions and Will rigged up a rope harness so that the horse could carry the bags. He also twisted the horse’s rope with some knots and fashioned a makeshift rein so that they could manage the horse easier. Daniel was again impressed with Will’s knowledge of horses.

They left the woods and continued their journey north. After another six miles they approached a small hamlet on a hillside and alongside the road they could see an Inn. They stopped and observed the area. Still well aware that people from Bodmin might still be looking for them for killing the two men in the barn.

A black closed carriage drawn by four black horses stood by the Inn door and a number of horses were tethered alongside. Two men with muskets stood guard on them. The two young men decided it would be safer to get off the road and continue avoiding the attention of the group, a confrontation with the men was the last thing they wanted.

They walked slowly on the far side of the road keeping the horse between them and the carriage. The two men guarding the horses eyed them with suspicion but did nothing. As they drew level Will had a good view of the carriage. It was striking and to his trained eye, well build and obviously the property of a wealthy family, it even had the insignia on the side, a family crest. The letters formed into an ornate BG. They walked on and Will suddenly stopped. “Daniel, ‘BG’ the writing on the side of the carriage, I think its Bevill Grenville’s carriage.”

“Daniel stopped and the two men turned around. The two guards stiffened and reached for their muskets.

“Hello there mates” Daniel called out “Would that be the carriage of Lord Bevill Grenville” he asked.

“What is it to you” one of the guards called back.

“We are going to work for him “.  Will shouted.

There was a sound behind them. Will spun round. Two heavily armed men had silently circled behind them and had their muskets pointing at them. “We are not armed “.  “We wish to speak to Bevill Grenville”

One of the two behind them motioned with his musket for them to go forward. They did are they were bade and stopped at the entrance. Bevill stood in the doorway. His manor was as imposing as ever and they found it difficult to look into his eyes.

“So you made it this far did you” “I told you to meet me at the Bell Inn in Bodmin” “people who work for me do as I say always without question.”

“Well sir it was like this” Daniel began to explain. “Silence” Bevill commanded. “Come with me” He turned and walked back into the Inn the two young men fell in behind him.

Their eyes soon adjusted to the darkness of the interior. Bevill stopped and put his arm around the shoulders of the woman sitting at the table. “Gentlemen this is my wife Grace” “You will obey her as you would me” “now sit over there and eat, no doubt you have had little since Bodmin.” “And yes I know all about the fire and the dead men”.

The two sat at a table on the other side of the bar both transfixed by the woman Bevill had introduced to them. She was tall and slim and elegant with sharp features and smooth skin they both decided that they had never set eyes on a more beautiful woman.

Bevill told them to order food and sent over two large jugs of beer which the young men downed in one go. Will got to his feet. “Excuse me my lord” “I forgot the horse she ain’t had a drink since yesterday. “Bevill nodded to him. He had admiration for a man who would think of his horse before his own belly.

Will went outside. One of Bevill’s men took him to the well where Will drew a bucket full and gave the mare a long drink.

Bevill had arrived in Bodmin at midday. He was a man who had a strong dislike of being late and he did not tolerate anyone else being late. His friends in London kidded him over his obsession with time keeping. However, they learned to live with it as did everyone else.

His carriage and riders stopped at the Bell Inn or what was left of it, the fire had burnt off one side and the barn and stables were gone, just a smouldering pile of wood and straw was left.  He sent his driver to enquire after the two young men he had arranged to meet. His driver asked around without being too obvious and it seemed that the two had fled during the fire and not been seen since. Three people had died in the barn, they were two men and a woman all were local people and regulars at the inn.

He reported back to his master. Bevill decided to continue his journey to Stowe. He would waste no more time on the two men.

Bevill was secretly well pleased to see them again and eventually learnt their side of the story. They were strong and hard young men but they would need to get wise to the ways of the world if they were to survive.

Bevill and his wife finished their meal and he escorted her to the carriage. He introduced Daniel and Will to the driver. Andrew Trescow a man of few words. He was short and thick set as were many of the North Cornwall inhabitants, Daniel estimated his age at about 40 years. Andrew had been with Lord Grenville since childhood and like all of Bevill’s men he was utterly loyal and trustworthy.  He told the two to get on the rear running board and tie the horse to the corner fitting. Two riders went ahead and two to the rear of the carriage. Bevill had learned at an early age to take precautions when travelling and never went without an armed escort.

 They set off at a steady trot towards Launceston.

Will and Daniel spent the journey getting on and off, the carriage running board was most uncomfortable to sit on, with no padding on it each jolt sent pain up their backs, they decided that alternate jogging and riding was the best way to travel.

The group spent the night in the company of Lord Trethorn of Launceston. His home was a rather run down mansion to the south of the town. Trethorn was a similar age to Bevill and he and Bevill had been friends since childhood and both enjoyed the others company although now the family had fallen on hard times and the estate had been losing money for a long time. Bevill was pleased to see his old friend but made it clear that he had to get back to Stowe and ordered that the party should leave at first light on the following morning.

Grace was up and ready to go by the time the horses were hitched to the carriage, her maid helped her into the carriage and the party was on their way soon after dawn.  Bevill was eager to get back to his home at Stowe and pushed everyone on.

CHAPTER FIVE

A loud clatter from the trees to his left brought Bevill’s thoughts back to the present. Two noisy pigeons flapped and dove past his head. His meeting with Will and Daniel had been five years previous and they were now seasoned soldiers. He had appointed Will as head of his personal guard; Daniel had been a quick learner and was now as natural around horses as Will. The two had become close friends and followed Bevill’s every command without question. He had armed them and all his cavalry with a pair of high-quality flintlock pistols as well as the short harquebus muskets that he had had imported from Holland. They each carried a sword and Bevill had personally taught Daniel and Will to shoot straight as well as how to handle the heavy swords on horseback. They were young and strong and quick to pick up everything he showed them, to such an extent that they he believed they were as good as he, although he would never have admitted it to either of them.  His armourer had instructed them on making lead ball and cleaning and repairing their weapons. They were now master soldiers, ready and willing to do whatever their leader ordered.

The two horses pulling the carriage were heavy and slow as they plodded steadily along the road through the rolling green fields and heavy woodland, Bevill was enjoying the journey and the open air.

 Although he was relaxed his sharp eyes continued to scan the tree line and the road ahead. Will called a halt and the group rested without dismounting.

The entire group was wary and were observing the road and countryside around them without realizing it; they were all on their guard. The local news was that a farmer from north of Holsworthy had been attacked and murdered on this road, several stories of attacks and robberies had been the news in the villages and towns over the past weeks. None of the men would relax until they got to town, these were troubled times with groups of men wandering around the country taking what they could get away with, they had little or no regard for the consequences. A degree of law and order existed in the towns and villages but in the remote rural areas it was up to the landowners to provide protection, it was a situation where the strongest survived. Bevill had instructed all his staff not to travel alone. He also purchased more muskets and swords of high quality and set in place a training regime that was strict and calculated to ensure that all his staff was efficient in every type of weapon.

The past two years in parliament had been very worrying to Bevill and the problems between the King and parliament appeared to be insurmountable. Bevill hoped for a solution but rumours of armed confrontation could not be ignored. He had already set in motion a programme of training for his staff and recruitment of good strong young men who would work the land and learn to be effective foot soldiers. His stock of heavy horses was steadily increasing; they were being trained as his front-line cavalry. He was by now paying from his own pocket for more horses and equipment for his men, all this put a great strain on his finances and he was forced to take out loans on some of his property. He was not greatly concerned but knew he had to keep an eye on expenditure to ensure that he could support a full regiment of soldiers if it was required.

The trees were heavy with leaf and formed an arch as the track narrowed. It was here, as if from nowhere two men stepped out in front of them. They raised their hands for the group to stop. They were less than twenty yards away. Will and Daniel reined in their horses. The two riders at the rear of the carriage fearing a trap turned their horses to face back up the trail. Another three men leaped from the trees further back along the trail cutting off retreat, a well lane trap.

A call rang out from one of the men in front “Money or your lives” Bevill took stock of the situation and slowly lowered his sore foot to the floor. The two men confronting them were big and scruffy looking they had obviously been living in the open for a long time. Both held a pistol pointing at Will and Daniel who still sat unmoving on their horses.  Bevill stood up as if to speak but in a blur of movement drew both his pistols, he fired through the gap between his two riders; Andrew, on hearing Bevill’s movement behind him instinctively dived sideways off his seat.

One of the would-be thieves flew backwards hit in the chest by both heavy lead balls. The second taken by surprise fired at Will who lurched sideways, the ball passing his face by inches. Both horsemen spurred their horses and the beasts shot forward crashing into man in front of them before he had a chance to move.

His broken body was thrown to the side of the road. The two turned and with a roar charged back past the carriage. Jonas and John had drawn their pistols and fired at the three men in road as Will and Daniel flew past them. The would-be robbers returned fire. Jonas was thrown back from his horse hit by one of the balls. Will and Daniel were at full gallop; they released the reins and drew a pistol in each hand, the four weapons roaring as one.

Two of the men were hit; one fell to his knees facing them. The second was sent spinning around with a pistol ball in his shoulder. The third man turned and ran.  Will and Daniel gave chase their pistols back in the holster and heavy swords were drawn in a swift movement. The distance was short and they were on the men. There was no chance of escape Daniel cut downwards on the man on his knees as he swept past, slicing through his neck and shoulder. He was dead before he hit the ground. Will was upon the running man slashed his back in a classic cavalry stroke. Backbone broken he crashed to his face, he never moved again.  Bevill watched from the carriage, he observed the manner in which his men had dispatched the would-be robbers. He knew the value of training and there were few more deadly a fighter than a skilled soldier on a heavy horse.

Will turned and dismounted. He caught hold of the wounded man who was lying face down moaning in pain and dragged him to the carriage. He screamed in agony from his wound but Will ignored him. Bevill spoke to Will. “Get him to tell you their names”. Will pushed him to the ground and grabbed his damaged shoulder. The man screamed again in agony and did not hesitate to give his name and the names of all the other men. Will relayed the names to Daniel. They would remember them better that way.

Daniel was kneeling beside Jonas who had been shot, the two men new each other well, they lived in a close unit and fought and drank together. He was still breathing but not conscious. Bevill arrived and knelt beside him. He unbuttoned the man’s tunic. The lead ball was in his chest almost centre. Bevill knew it was a death wound. He would not let his man die here. He took a cloth from his pocket and gently pushed it into the wound to stem the blood, but it was soon seeping around his fingers. John helped Will lift their friend into the carriage and laid him on the seat.

Will took a rope from the carriage box and cut it into lengths they tied the feet of the dead men together and secured the other end of the rope to the rear axle of the carriage. A rope was tied around the neck of the wounded prisoner, John looped the other end around his saddle horn and they set off ant a steady pace towards Holsworthy, with the prisoner stumbling and trying to keep his feet behind the horse. Jonas’s breathing became worse and he died before they reached the town, Bevill covered the old man’s face with his jacket.

On the outskirts of town Bevill called a halt. He climbed from the carriage and walked to the roadside. He looked around and pointed to a huge old oak tree. “This will do” he said and the three horsemen dismounted and dragged the bodies and the prisoner over to the oak. Will threw the rope of one dead man over the branch and the three hauled the body feet first into the air. They did the same with the four dead men and they hung with their arms trailing six feet off the ground in a row. Their heads distorted and bloody from being dragged along the trail.

Bevill nodded to Will and he slung the rope of the prisoner over the branch next to the dead men.

The man realized what was happening and screamed begging for mercy. Bevill stood in front of him. “You would have shown no mercy to us and I am sure you have shown none to any of your victims. You will act as a warning to others of your kind”.

Bevill took hold of the rope and all four men pulled hard. The man was launched upwards body kicking as his neck broke from the force. He twitched for a few moments and was dead.

None of the party had feelings for the five highwaymen. They died as they had lived. Their sorrow was for Jonas. They continued into town and stopped at the stables adjoining a tavern in the marketplace. They took the body from the carriage and laid him in a stall. Town people gathered and Daniel took it upon himself to tell what had happened.

Bevill called for paper and pen. The innkeeper returned handing the paper and pen to Bevill. He stood and watched as Will had committed to memory the names of the hanged men and Bevill wrote the names on the paper. “See that this gets to the town magistrate without delay” he handed the paper to the innkeeper who nodded handed the paper on to his servant; The innkeeper was to keep Jonas’s body where it was until Bevill returned to collect it. The man understood, he felt the authority in Bevill’s voice and Bevill knew he would be obeyed. The body was covered with canvas and the stall closed off.

 The party left to continue their journey to Hatherleigh in silence.

Word spread quickly and during the day many people went out to the edge of town to see the men hanging from the branch of the oak. Over the following weeks the story was exaggerated and retold, word spread far and wide of the exploits of Bevill Grenville and his soldiers. It was to be, that for years following the event, that the Holsworthy to Stratton road was known to be the safest in the county; it was said that a man could leave a bag of gold at the roadside and it would still be there untouched a week later. 

They approached Hatherleigh as the sun began to set. This was the main market town for the whole of the huge county of Devon. A bustling and lively place with numerous Inns and guest houses but at dusk it was relatively quiet with most people engaged in eating and relaxing.

They entered the town from the west and their arrival caused no concern for the few people that were about and the party went directly to Andrew Scott’s house arriving as the last of the light went from the sky.  A few lamps cast their light from nearby houses.

 Andrew had arranged for double lanterns to be lit over his door to guide the men to his house. Daniel dismounted and pulled the long bell string. The noisy clatter of the bell brought Andrew to the door. Bevill Grenville had clambered stiffly from the carriage and the two men embraced each other like brothers, genuinely pleased to meet once again. A servant stood close behind them and Andrew told him to show the men to the stable and see to the horses.

Bevill carrying his heavy saddlebag followed Andrew into the house and the four riders followed the servant through the adjoining arch and into the stables at the rear. The carriage followed and was parked in the small courtyard. “You can sleep ere or in the Inn down the road ifen you got any money” the servant informed them bluntly and went into the back of the house.

Neither Will nor Daniel were in any mood to sleep in the stables and told the others they would be going to the Inn. They all worked in silence until the horses were fed and watered and settled in the barn. Daniel, Will and John set off leaving Arnold to guard the horses and tack. They left their swords and pistols with Arnold; they did not feel any threat and considered being so heavily armed would cause concern to people in the Inn.

The weekly market would be held on the following day and the Inn was almost full by the time they got there. They ordered food and beer and found a table near the open fire. They were dry and the beer tasted good, they ordered more. The food arrived and they tucked into hot mutton and fresh bread. More flagons of beer followed before they began to relax.

Will went to see if they could get a room and spoke to the landlord, he was in luck. The landlord was extremely thin with balding head, he was a jovial type who said he had a room but it was one of his best so it would cost two shillings for the night. Will returned to Daniel to tell him of the arrangement.  John decided that he could not afford a room at the Inn and would go and join Arnold; they would sleep in the stable.

 Daniel and Will agreed to share the cost of the room and get a good night’s sleep. The group said goodnight and split up. Daniel followed Will to the room which was large and well-appointed for an Inn, the four poster bed was huge and covered with a soft heavy quilt. They took off their boots and lay on the bed. Neither bothered to undress and the drone of voices from the Inn soon sent the tired men into a deep sleep.

They woke early with the low March sun bright through the little window. Nether men spoke but pulled on their boots and went down to the main room of the Inn. Although it was still early several men were already at tables eating chunks of bread and cheese washed down with large jugs of ale. Market day was the busiest day of the week and everyone was up with the dawn.

There was a buzz of expectation, dozens of visitors would be in the town to buy or sell their wares. The two went out the back to the yard to find the lean-to where the large hole in the ground served as the lavatory for the guests. An old well in the corner of the yard provided fresh water for those who wanted to wash. They both used the hole in the ground and went to the well to splash water on their faces before heading back to the Inn. 

The landlord greeted them and took them to an empty table they asked for a big breakfast, and he went off to tell his wife who soon arrived with a loaf of freshly baked bread, huge chunks of cheese and cold ham. Will ordered two jugs of local ale and they tucked in with relish.

They were keen to get back to the others and as soon as they had eaten Daniel settled the bill with the landlord and they set off the few yards along the road and through the arch to the stables.

They found the other three working on their horses and sorting their harnesses. There was much to do and Daniel and Will joined them in feeding and watering. They had instructions to wait for Bevill and they did not have to wait long, as he appeared with his friend Andrew before they had finished with the horses.

They quickly finished off what they were doing and joined him in the yard. Bevill told Will to join him, at the same time handing Daniel a piece of paper, it was a list of provisions, he also handed Daniel a pouch of coins. He instructed him to take the others and get the items at best price.

They all set off towards the market. This was the first time in Hatherleigh for either Will or Daniel and they were impressed by the size of the cattle area and number of stalls spreading out from the centre.

Bevill followed Andrew in the direction of the compound where they would find the horses and Daniel set off along the rows of stalls. There was so much on sale, stalls selling shoes, clothing, food or every kind. Although Bevill’s estates were largely self-sufficient there were some items they had to buy in. Daniel haggled over the price of everything on the list and made sure he got a good deal. He bought two sacks of barley which he gave to John to take back to the stables, returning in quick time. It had been a long winter and some items of food were running low. He bought a large sack of peas and ten bushels of oatmeal and a large sack of salt. The four of them carried their load back to the Inn and stacked them on the rear of the carriage covering them in a large leather blanket to stop them getting wet if it should rain before they lashed the cargo into place.

Arnold did not seek the company of others and was happy to stay with the carriage to make sure nothing went missing while the rest returned to the market. It was mid-morning and the cattle sale was brisk. Bevill and Andrew had found the horse dealer and began to talk casually about horses. Will stood behind Bevill listening to the conversation. The dealer was a short man with a large belly, his beard was long and Will observed that it was compensation for the lack of hair on his head, he was a man who obviously enjoyed his drink and from his attire was not lacking in money. Eventually they had said all they had to say and he got up and led them to a fenced off enclosure away from the main market. This was where he kept his special horses. The dealer had three horses. “Here we are then” he said to Bevill” What do you think of these bootees then??”

The three horses were magnificent. Two mares and the great jet-black stallion that he had heard so much about. It threw back its head and snorted as the men approached. A groom entered the enclosure and caught its rein; he put his arm around the horse’s neck and talked to it all the time. The horse was wary of the men approaching and the groom had to pull its head down, trying hard to hold it in place.

Bevill nodded to Will who climbed the fence into the field. Will knew exactly what was expected of him. Where horses were concerned Will was the best. Bevill used him for all his horse buying. Growing up at his father’s blacksmith shop, he had been around horses all his life and he had a natural way with them. He would select the best and refuse the rest.

He took the rope from the groom and the stallion circled him warily. Will talked to him in his soft voice for a few minutes before the horse allowed him to run his hands over its neck and back. Will looked at his teeth and looked him in the eye. The horse looked back into his face. Will was not easily impressed but he could not think of a finer horse he had seen in many years. He continued to examine the horse running his hands down its flank and feeling each leg in turn until he was satisfied.

“Tis a good one sir” Was all he said. Bevill had throughout stood silent and watchful with the other men.

“Thank you Will” “get him saddled for me will you” Will and the groom set about saddling and preparing the horse while Bevill got into conversation with the dealer. Andrew stood patiently listening to the two men haggle.

Will led the horse from the field and assisted Bevill into the saddle, his leg still pained him and the horse at 15 hands somewhat bigger than he was used to. 

Bevill nudged the horse with his knees and guided it out of the enclosure to the open land at the edge of the town before putting his heal into the horse’s flank and encouraging it to break into a trot. The horse responded to his every wish and Bevill urged him on. The great stallion built up speed until it was travelling at full gallop. Out across the open ground, over the downs and along the riverbank. The feeling of immense exhilaration and the knowledge that he was travelling faster than he had ever done before swept him along and it was a couple of miles before Bevill finally reined the stallion in and the horse came to a halt blowing hard.  Bevill allowed the horse to rest a few minutes before pointing its head back towards the town. He let it go at its own pace and it trotted at a good rate. Bevill ran his hand down the horse’s neck it was hardly sweating.  They returned to the compound where Bevill dismounted and handed the reins to the groom. He could not conceal his excitement and joy at the horse. The dealer had been patiently waiting for him to return. Now was the time to talk money. He and Bevill headed to the tavern where they ordered drinks and the use of a private room.

Will unsaddled the horse and the groom gave it a rub down with straw. The stallion was a highly intelligent animal and responded to the men around it. It remained calm and alert. Will left the horse and joined Andrew who suggested that they find Daniel and the others and get lunch. They found the men sitting in the stable yard awaiting their return.

 Andrew took them all to the Inn where they had stayed the night and ordered a round of drinks. The main room was full of traders and there was a most wonderful smell of stew permeating from the kitchen. They all ordered a bowl and enjoyed the fine food and the light-hearted atmosphere of the Inn. Will and Andrew had the common liking of horses and talked at length about the amazing stallion.

Eventually Andrew said he had work to do and shook hands with all of them. The four men drank up and went back to the stables to wait for Bevill.

It was mid-afternoon by the time he returned. He was astride the stallion and leading the two mares.

He was still full of excitement at buying the horse and ordered them to saddle up and get the cart ready. He had concluded his business, and it was time to leave, he wanted to make Holsworthy by nightfall. He never told the men what he had paid for the horse but it had been a hard bargain. Eventually he had agreed a price that included the two mares and the men shook on the deal. Bevill had been to see Andrew and arrange a bill of sale before returning to the stables. The heavy saddle bags were a lot lighter on their return journey.

Bevill decided to ride the stallion for a while and set off at a canter out of the town. The carriage and riders set off after him, clattering through the streets and onto the dirt track that was the road to Holsworthy. Bevill rode for an hour before his leg began to pain him. He dismounted and waited for the group to catch up. Once they arrived, he tied the horse to his carriage next to the mares and clambered into his seat. He was glad to rest his leg on the stool. The party rode in thoughtful silence for the remaining five miles into town.

They pulled up outside the Inn that Bevill had selected as it had plenty of space for the carriage and horses out front. The weather was fine and sunny so they decided to sit at the tables outside the inn. Bevill was feeling better after his rest and his ankle no longer throbbed. He did not need to tell the men to water the horses; everyone knew what was expected of him. While they looked after the animals he spoke to the landlord who had come scurrying from the Inn at the sound of the horses approaching. He ordered a bottle of wine for himself and beer all round for his men. The landlord told him that he had cheese and fresh baked bread and Bevill ordered enough for all of them.  The group of men was well acquainted by now and enjoyed Bevill’s company. On these journeys he ate and drank with the men but when he spoke they would listen to every word without interruption, there was always the element of master and servant. As they got to know him better Daniel and Will would get into long discussions about the state of the country and parliament and of course the King.

Bevill calculated that it would take the best part of three hours to cover the 15 miles back to Stowe so after a break of an hour he climbed back into the carriage and the party set of off at a steady pace towards Stratton and home.

It was early evening by the time they arrived at Stratton, Young John Pascoe waved them goodbye as they went through the town without stopping. He was heading home to tell the family of the amazing events of the last two days.

They reached the manor of Stowe in another hour and all were glad to be home, Bevill ordered the horses to be looked after and went in search of Grace. The stable staff and grounds men gathered around the new horses, amazed at the arrival of the magnificent of the black stallion.

Chapter 6

 Daniel and Will discovered that although their backgrounds were quite different, they did have a lot in common. They enjoyed the outdoor life and discovered the pleasure of fishing and hunting in the forests and streams and galloping their horses along the miles of sand that they discovered as they explored the coast where the river emptied into the sea just a mile or so from the big house. They spent most of their time together and in the months that followed they had become like brothers.

Bevill had set them on a training program in which they were to become soldiers in his regiment as well as do whatever was asked of them. They enjoyed their new life at Stowe and were both quick learners. Their strength and fighting ability became well known in Kilkhampton and Stratton and Bevill was kept informed of their bare knuckle fighting in the local towns, they rarely got beaten and the money they waged on themselves brought them in a steady income, they would spar together to keep fit but they were so well matched and such good friends that they did not feel the need to fight each other for real.

Before long none of the young men in the area would stand up to them; together the two soldiers from Stowe were a formidable pair, and the only man apart from Bevill Grenville they would not wish to take on was young Anthony Payne. He was more than a head and shoulders taller than either of them, his weight was almost that of the two of them together. On one occasion while watching him practising hand to hand fighting in the stable yard.

 Will had observed him when matters got out of hand and Anthony got into an argument with two older men. He did not lose his temper; he simply grabbed each by the neck and lifted both of them off the ground one in each hand. Will made the mental note not to pick a fight with him and he noted that Anthony appeared to still be getting taller.

The winter of 1632 was very severe with heavy snow and prolonged cold. It had been two years since Daniel and Will had left home to live at Stowe and they had not been back in that time. Daniel would receive a letter from his sister once in a while but her writing was poor and she found it difficult to communicate. Daniel could not understand much of what she wrote anyway and had Will read his letters to make sure he understood what had been said. Despite this he was always pleased to receive her scratched notes.

Letters were brought through the north of Cornwall by the weekly stage from Truro but with the snow the riders were unable to travel to this remote part of the county and mail delivery to Stratton had been cancelled, Daniel had receive no word from his sister for over a month.

Daniel discussed his concerns with Will and not knowing how they were faring in this terrible winter was eating at him more than he expected. He knew that the plight of Rachael and his mother was still desperate, and they struggled to live by cleaning and slaving all the hours in the Inns close to their lodgings, he believed that their lives could only get worse in the prevailing weather conditions. His only hope was that further south the cold weather and heavy snow had not been so severe.

Eventually it was March and with the new month the snow began to melt, the weather steadily improved. The mood of all the men improved along with the weather and with the thought of approaching spring everyone began to become more active.

Bevill sent Daniel and Will into Stratton to get word of the mail coach. He too was desperate for news from the outside world; most importantly he had heard nothing from Parliament for longer than he would have wished. The remoteness of Stowe from London caused him concern but he could see no way around the predicament. He had to consider his family and growing regiment of staff and soldiers along with his duty to parliament and the king.

Bevill had set up a town house following his accident. It was close to the centre of Stratton and meant that he could have a meeting place and to perform his official duties as well as making it easier to meet his officers and staff living in and around Stratton. The town house was manned by three servants. One elderly gent that everyone knew as Mr. Spence. His wife the housekeeper and a young boy who acted as page and handyman for Mr. Spence.

Mr. Spence had retired from Plymouth where he had been a well-respected member of the community and an important administrator within the postal service. He was a very tall thin man bent over from the shoulders so that he did not appear as tall as he should have, he had grown the most imposing moustache which he considered had enhanced his importance to those he met. His manner was overbearing, and he was a man who commanded respect from everyone. Since his arrival all the mail which was previously been delivered to the Inn for collection was taken to Bevill’s house and delivered to Mr. Spence. Everyone was pleased with the arrangement not least the landlord, acting as the town postman was not to his liking.

Mr. Spence sorted the post and delivered it around the town. He soon enjoyed the important position as the town postman. Mr. Spence took to the position with relish; if the letters were addressed to someone of importance, he would send the lad to tell of its arrival or on special occasions take to his carriage and deliver it himself. Retirement was an alien concept, he would still be working in Plymouth but for his declining health. The north coast sea air was good for his chest. Mr. Spence was also one of the few who could read and write well, he spoke so clearly that he was soon asked to read the news of an evening in the town square. A role he took to with great zeal.

Daniel arrived at the house and rapped on the door which was answered by Mrs. Spence. She was the opposite to her husband short and thick set. Not having children, she had spent her adult life looking after Mr Spence. Daniel and Will had called often at the house and the old lady had taken to them like her own children. Daniel always had a chuckle at the fact that Mrs. Spence as well as everyone else called her husband Mr. Spence.

Mrs. Spence led Daniel and Will into the parlour and went to call her husband. She called up the stairs “Mr. Spence Will and Daniel are here”. Will looked at Daniel and had to suppress his grin as Mrs. Spence came back into the room.  “We had the post two days ago and there are several letters for his lordship. I think there is one for you Daniel as well”.

Mr. Spence clomped down the stairs coughing loudly. His lungs were in a poor condition and he could not breath deaply, taking many short breaths at a time, the freezing cold of this winter had made matters worse. He gave them a friendly smile and told them to come to the kitchen. He led the way ducking to enter the room at the back of the house. Mrs. Spence was a fine cook and they could smell the fresh bread in the oven. She offered them a cake and Mr. Spence poured three jugs of dark beer. They sat and chatted for a while before Mr. Spence went to the side room that he used as his post office. He came back with a mail bag for Bevill and a single letter for Daniel. “I could hardly read the address Daniel but I recognize the writing as your sister. And there is a mark from the Falmouth office I can see”.

Daniel took the letter and ripped it open. It contained a single scrap of paper. He found it difficult to read and went to back door where the light was better. He read the letter with difficulty. Daniel mother is not well, I have been trying to do her work and mine. I haven’t got the rent for this week   Mrs. Tresco is helping me with her. We have today been told to leave. The weather is bad I fear for mother’s life. Your loving sister Rachael.

Daniel stood in brooding silence for a while. Will and Mr. Spence sat in silence. They could both sense something was amiss. Will could keep his silence no longer “What is it Daniel”? Daniel ignored him but addressed Mr. Spence. “How long ago do you think this letter was written Mr. Spence”? Daniel asked.

 “Well can’t really say but the post has been held at Truro for three weeks so it must have been written before that. Day or two I’d say”. Daniel turned to Will and handed him the letter. “I have to go to Falmouth, mother is ill and Rachael says they have been kicked out of their lodgings. If I set off now I will be there by tomorrow night.”

He turned to leave Will caught his arm. “No Daniel, think it through my friend, how are you going to get there, what are you going to do when you get there?” “An don’t forget Lord Bevill will not be happy if you take off without his say so”. He told him of the need a horse and supplies if you going to help them, the lord Grenville will be able to help, anyway if he is going to Falmouth Will told him he was going along as well. “I have not been home for two years and it is time I visited my folks, we will go back to Stowe and discuss the problem with Lord Grenville”.

Daniel knew he was right and Mr. Spence added that another day will make no difference, if his mother and sister had survived this long they will be okay for another day.

They thanked Mrs. Spence and said their farewell to Mr. Spence.

Daniel set off at full speed out of the town scattering traders to right and left with Will just a few yards behind. He caught up with Daniel and they slowed to a steady trot eating up the four miles to Stowe in half the normal time it took.

The horses were blown and exhausted after the run and as they came through the gate the farm workers in the yard were forced to jump back to avoid the galloping horses.

Daniel went straight to the big house. The front doors were open as was usual in this milder weather. Daniel banged on the wooden door frame, he felt uncomfortable, it was not normal for him to come to the front of the house or for anyone who was not of the house staff. Apart from Bevill Grenville and his family and honoured guests only the housekeeper was permitted to use this entrance. Daniel banged again and the housekeeper came to the door drying her hands. She recognized the young man at the door “What’s all the noise about Daniel” she asked.

“Got to see my Lord right away Mary” “It’s urgent.”

Mary saw the distressed look in his face and told him to wait at the door and she hurried off to find her master.

Bevill appeared within minutes he had been waiting on Daniel’s return with the mail but did not expect him so soon. “Ah you have my post at last Daniel, I thank you”.

Daniel handed over the mail pouch and started to tell Bevill about his mother and family. Still out of breath from the ride he made little sense. Bevill was taken aback by the Daniel’s excited gabbling and held his hand up. “Stop Daniel I can’t understand what you are trying to say”, he put a hand on his shoulder and told him to calm down.

He led Daniel into the house and into his private quarters. Daniel had never been in this area before and was surprised at its splendid furniture and decoration. Bevill told him to sit and start at the beginning. Lady Grace had been told that Daniel had arrived with the mail and came quickly into the room she too was anxious to read the post. No one had heard a word from the outside world for so long.

“My dear”, Bevill spoke to his wife, “Daniel here has a problem, I am not sure what it is yet but would you sit with us and listen”.

“Of course I will” she spoke softly and took her seat at the table opposite Daniel, Bevill stood at the far end where he could best see them both. After all their time together, he still looked at his wife with admiration in the half light from the window she was a beautiful sight.

“Well Daniel what is troubling you” she asked.

Daniel produced the scruffy letter and handed it to her. “I got this today with the mail my lady, Mr. Spence said it ad to be written at least three weeks ago and I be worried sick.”.

Grace read the letter and passed it to Bevill. They sat silently while he scanned it.

Bevill handed the letter back to Daniel

He thought for a moment and then spoke “You will have to go to help them Daniel but not today. This will need a plan.” “Leave us now and I will consider the options”. Daniel thanked them and quickly left the big house returning to find Will in the stables.

Bevill poured a glass of claret for himself and his wife. They sat in the heavy leather chairs, both silent for a while.

Eventually Bevill sat upright. “I think I have the answer” he said. “What have you got in mind dearest”? She asked.

“Mr. Payne is taking a party of men to father’s to collect the equipment I ordered next week. He can go tomorrow instead. First to Falmouth with Daniel and sort out the problems there. It is a fine port for trade I will give him my letter of credit and he can purchase extra muskets and powder where he can find it. It will be a good chance for him to use his own initiative. I will put him in charge. They can be there and back in a week”

Grace agreed that it was a good idea and Bevill sent word for Mr. Payne to come to him at his office and to get Daniel at the same time. Bevill had taken to calling Anthony Payne ‘Mr.’ he felt it gave the young man more authority with the other troops, he was still grooming him to be his master at arms.

 The three men met up in Bevill’s front office which was becoming his centre of operations. They talked at length. Developing the plan and the men they would need for the operation. Daniel asked if he could take Will as he was best with horses and they might get the chance to purchase more, Bevill was always looking for more animals suitable for his growing cavalry force and agreed, this would be more than a small force. The equipment that would be at his father’s was considerable and several wagons would be needed to bring it back to Stowe.

Will called at the house and asked Bevill for permission to leave the troop at Truro it would not be far out of his way to go to Redruth. He had not seen his family for two years and would like to take the opportunity to meet up with them even if it was a short stay..

Bevill said he could but not until after their business was concluded in Falmouth. The town had the reputation for cut-throats and thieves of all nationalities.  He wanted his best men to escort Mr. Payne and although he had no doubt about the giant’s ability to look after himself Bevill’s natural caution meant that he always preferred the odds in his favour.

The next morning there was a flurry of activity in and around the manor. Wagons were being prepared and horses gathered and harnessed. The chosen riders prepared their equipment. Grace came out to watch the activity. Suddenly she turned on her heel and sped into the house. She found Bevill in his front office with Mr. Payne. “Dearest, you know your mother and father have not seen the children for such an age and I know they would love to see them for a few days. If I take my carriage and an escort, we can accompany Mr. Payne, I will not be a burden to them.”

Bevill frowned and looked at his wife. He knew it was pointless to argue but tried to put her off anyway. “The men will be ready in a couple of hours, you will take forever to get ready”.

She laughed at him “nonsense, I will travel light after all I have all I require at the house you’re your mother will love to see the children.”

The decision was made; she kissed him on the cheek and left the room. She gathered their three children and told them of the plan; they were so excited at the prospect of a holiday at their grandparent’s wonderful estate.

Bevill was none too happy but set about changing his plan. He sent word for four more of his cavalry to get ready for the journey and the large family carriage had to be prepared. Grace had not considered the extra work involved in ensuring that his family would be well protected on road. He had thought of going with them but he had much to do before he went back to London, he could not leave the estate at this time. He did insist however that his family return with Mr. Payne he did not want the problem of having to send another escort to bring her back during his absence.

Mr. Payne would lead the group. They were to travel to his father’s estate at Withiel close to Bodmin and six horse soldiers would stay with lady Grace and the children along with three carriages, the men would assist in loading equipment and await Mr. Payne’s return from Falmouth. Two riders along with Will and Daniel would accompany Mr. Payne with the three wagons to Falmouth.

Preparations took longer than expected and it was late before the convoy was ready to leave Bevill decided that they should get an early night’s sleep and set off at first light on the following morning.

It was just after dawn when everyone was up and ready to be on their way, the children running around the carriages in their excitement. Grace gathered them with her maid and their nanny and deposited them in their carriage.  Mr. Payne rode on the lead wagon as he no longer enjoyed riding horseback and the horses enjoyed his weight even less. His 25 stone body was more comfortable on the wagon. Lady Grace and her children along with her personal maid and the children’s nanny followed him in the family carriage. The seats of the carriage were very comfortable and placing it near the front of the column meant they were out of the dust kicked up by the horses and wagons.

Daniel and Will trotted in the front with the rest of  the mounted soldiers bringing up the rear. They caused considerable interest as they clattered through the busy streets of Stratton in the early morning and many residents came out of their houses to watch the convoy go past. Most wondering where they were going. Anthony called a halt at his father’s house and took a minute to tell him where he was going. His family came out to wave them off. The road out of Stratton was very familiar to the riders and they set the horses on a slow walk for the first couple of miles. It was a steady climb uphill out of Stratton before they turned onto the Bodmin road.

The weather was still set fair and they made the twenty miles to Sir Bernard Grenville’s estate by evening. Sir Bernard and his wife Elizabeth were most excited by the surprise visit and the children ran off on their arrival to explore the hidden garden that was Lady Elizabeth’s new venture. The family disappeared into the mansion and Anthony Payne set about arranging quarters for all the men and horses. They would leave at first light to make best time to Truro and they planned to push hard to reach Falmouth in one day.

Anthony was not familiar with this road and had never journeyed further south than Bodmin. He and Will talked over the plan and decided to take the road across Bodmin moor skirting Truro and follow the river to Falmouth. Truro was still a place that Will and Daniel were keen to avoid.

They were up at first light quickly harnessing the horses to the wagons and saddling up their mounts. They were on the road before the Grenville family was awake.

Although the weather had been warm and settled, they knew that it could change with storms blown in from the ocean. Predictably the wind swung around to the west and brought wet and windy weather as they traversed the high ground of the moor. They met few travellers and journeyed much of the time in silence their cloaks pulled up around their necks and hats down over their ears. They came off the moor without incident and the weather improved with just the odd shower as they reached the lower plain.

With the sun drying out the mud on the road they made better time stopping near Truro in the afternoon to eat and rest the horses. Daniel said it was a further 15 miles to Falmouth and they would make it by nightfall. Anthony told them to go ahead and arrange somewhere to stay for the night and to stable the horses.

Will and Daniel were pleased to go ahead they could make good time without the heavy wagons.

Daniel knew an Inn on the outskirts of town that had a large stable and fields where they could keep an eye on the wagons and horses. They made it to the Inn in two hours and headed for the bar. Daniel was eager to get on into town to see his mother and sister but went with Will to arrange accommodation and water his horse.

He ate a plate of bread and cheese with Will but would not delay his departure, he bade farewell to his friend and set off once again into the bustling town that was Falmouth.

It was still daylight and the weather had improved considerably, it would be a fine evening Falmouth was even busier than he remembered with laden carts, wagons and riders heading in all directions. As he reached the docks, he noticed numbers of soldiers and sailors sitting outside the roadside ale houses. The streets were narrow and dingy around the dock area it was not a place to be for the unwary after the sun went down.

Daniel dismounted and walked his horse along the cobble and dirt road through the alley to the lodging houses where his mother and sister had been living. The dirt and rubbish was piled up around the door and the stench of rotting food and human waste was more than he could remember smelling.

  He thought it unwise to leave the horse in the narrow lane and held its rein while he banged on the door. He could hear voices and called out “Rachael is that you its Daniel??”

The door creaked open and in the gloom he could he a man of middle age. He was a big man with a bald scarred head and great barrel chest. He stuck his face to within an inch of Daniel’s. “What you want” be snarled.

“This is where my mother and sister live and I have come to see them, who are you” Daniel said stepping back a pace. He didn’t like the attitude on the man but kept his temper from boiling over.  “I bin ere for weeks and there ain’t no women ere so clear off”

“Not until I know were they went” Daniel was beginning to get annoyed with this bad tempered individual.

“I told you to get lost” The bald head pushed his head closer towards Daniel and that was a big mistake. Daniel’s gloved fist came up like a hammer. The man’s head snapped back and he crashed back against the door post. As he fell forward Daniel hit him a downward blow which caught him behind the ear. He was unconscious by the time he crashed into the rotting rubbish in the doorway. Two other men came running to the door but stopped in their tracks. They could see what happened to their roommate and both men being a head and shoulders shorter than Daniel had no intention of receiving the same fate. Daniel spoke “My sister and sick mother were living here where did they go”??

One of the men told him that the room was empty when they arrived and the three of them were sharing the rent and working in the docks unloading the ships. The landlord came each week to collect the rent that was all they knew.

Daniel believed what they said and that they could not help, he turned and led his horse out of the alley, he was thinking what to do next when he remembered what Rachael had said in her letter, Mrs. Tresco!!

He knew she lived close by but where??

The area was a dingy collection of houses crammed together from the docks to the town centre. It was getting late. He asked a few people but they eyed him with suspicion and said they didn’t know Mrs. Tresco.

He had no option but to head back to where Will and the others were staying and start his search again in the morning.   

  It was just about dark when he arrived back at the Inn. He unsaddled his horse and gave him food and water. He rubbed its flanks and legs with straw and led him into the field where the other horses had already been released. The cavalry soldiers and the wagon drivers were busy rigging their comfortable shelters under the wagons. They lit a fire and heated up a large pot of soup with vegetables and a piece of mutton. Each took their turn to go into the Inn and fill a jug with ale. After several jugs they settled down to sleep under the wagons.

Daniel, Will and Anthony would take a room in the Inn and Daniel went into the front bar to find his friends. Anthony was not difficult to find he was sitting by the window filling the three-seat bench and leaning one elbow on the table. A huge jug of ale in on hand and a leg of lamb in the other. Will sat opposite tucking into a big bowl of soup and fresh thick bread. Daniel ordered the same and went to join them.

They were pleased to see him back safely and he told them of his problem finding his mother. They agreed that Will should join him and go find them in the morning. Anthony would leave the wagons here with the cavalry while he went in search of his merchandise. He had a letter of introduction to a prominent figure in the town and was sure of good service as a representative of the Grenville family.

Anthony attracted attention to himself because of his great size and the fact that he could not speak the language of the locals. They all spoke in a broad Cornish dialect whereas Anthony spoke with a mixture of English and Cornish which was spoken in the north of the county.

The landlord made a joke about it but one look from Anthony caused him to apologise profusely offering to buy him a drink. The Inn was on the edge of town and away from the dock workers trade which meant it did not get as busy as the taverns in and around the docks.  The men spent the evening drinking ale and enjoying each other’s company.

They had booked a large room that took up most of front of the building on the first floor; there was a large double bed and two singles. About midnight they decided they had had enough to drink and went to bed. Anthony took off his boots and fell back on the big double bed his feet sticking way out from the end of the mattress. He was asleep within minutes and proceeded to snore, his snoring became a roar and once asleep they could not rouse him or turn him onto his side. Daniel and Will were still awake an hour later whereupon they both decided enough was enough, they got up, put their boots back on and went out to the field. At least the horses were quiet. They stumbled out of the Inn and opened the gate to the field. 

A distinctive click of a musket being cocked caused them to stand still. Will whispered his name and they inched forward. There was still a glow from the fire, they stood close to it identifying themselves to the guard. They could still not see anyone, but they knew that the picket was close by and the camp was well guarded. Once they had been identified the guard stepped forward and they saw that it was one of the cavalry escort, Samuel Baker. A young man that they knew well. He came from Kilkhampton and had been living at the barracks for a year or more. He had been given the first watch of the night, they explained why they had returned, and they all laughed at Anthony and his snoring. The two men made a vow never to share a room with Anthony again.

The guard returned to the darkness and the pair found a space under the end of one wagon. They pulled their heavy coats around their heads and were soon asleep.

They woke as the sun came up. The air was chill and they stamped around to get the blood moving in their legs.

The wagon drivers oversaw the food and vitals, it did not take them long before they had a small fire going. They warmed up the thick soup that had been left from the evening before and gathered around the fire, they ate the hot soup and enjoyed dipping pieces of dry hard bread into the pots.

As the sun came up the air became warmer and they gathered their equipment for the day ahead. Anthony joined them before the pot had been emptied and had his share of the soup. He explained his plan to the soldiers and the drivers. Once he had established where the supplies were stored, he would return to fetch them. Daniel and Will were to report back to the Inn by evening no matter what. Anthony did not intend staying in this area longer than he had to.

                                                             CHAPTER SEVEN

As soon as Daniel and Will had saddled the horses they set off into town. It was early but already several people were on their way into Falmouth. Traders, merchants and workers, some on foot others on huge heavy carts and wagons, they would toil to unload the ships at the docks and transport all manner of goods to the warehouses to in turn be shipped or sold on eventually distributed around the whole country.

The two men headed for the narrow street where Daniel had been the night before. Dismounting and leading their horses, their hooves made a loud clattering on the cobbles. Daniel decided that he would have a better chance of finding his sister and mother if he asked around the market and stalls where they had lived for as long as he could remember. They came to the area where three streets met and although it was early the carts and stalls were being set out for the day’s trading.

Will stood at the junction with the horses which allowed Daniel to walk freely among the workers. They were suspicious of the tall stranger at first but once they heard Daniel talking in their own Cornish tongue and with the Falmouth accent they relaxed and most ignored him. He recognised a number of young men and called a greeting to them, the men waved back to him in half recognition.

He went over to a woman who was setting up a stall to sell her pile of fresh bread and asked her about his sister and mother. She told him that of course she knew them but they had left suddenly and she had never heard where they had gone but she did remember Mrs Tresco and told Daniel that the old lady had died in the winter. Many people had not survived the cold and there had been a lot of illness brought in by sailors or so they understood. She told him to go and speak to the Reverend Salter who had attended to Mrs Tresco until her death. She told him that he lived in the cottage alongside St. Mary Church. Daniel knew where it was and wondered why he had not thought of the Reverend before, he was the obvious person to know the whereabouts of just about everyone in the parish. He thanked the woman and returned to Will. He told him what he had managed to learn and the pair set off in the direction of the church.

Although it had been several years since Daniel had been to the church, he still remembered the way.  It was a short distance to where the narrow street gave way to a large area of common grassland with the church and its Saxon tower standing on the far side of the park. The minister’s cottage was adjacent to the church separated from it by the large graveyard. They tied the horses to the gatepost outside the cottage and Daniel banged on the front door.

There was no answer but they could hear voices, they walked around the corner where a stone path led along the side of the building to a little vegetable garden, they found the Reverend with his back to them, he had no jacket and was busy lifting potatoes with a fork, heavy work for an elderly man, a woman of similar age stood by him knocking mud off the potatoes and putting them in her basket.

 The reverend heard their footsteps and turned towards them as they approached. “Good day gentlemen” he spoke in a crisp Cornish accent. The reverend was not a local man and although he had been at this church for many years he still spoke slightly differently from a Falmouth born person.  “Are you looking for me” he continued. Daniel stepped forward and offered his hand. The man shook it firmly. “I doubt that you remember me sir? “I am Daniel Postlet; I lived in the high street with my mother before I moved away. This is my good friend Will Hooper of Redruth” The reverends face lit up “I remember a lad who was useful with his fists and always in trouble” he chuckled. He introduced them to his wife a friendly faced woman of considerable girth, her long grey hair pulled back on her head and tied in a bun.  “We are seeking my sister and mother” He took his sister’s letter from his pocket and stood silently while the Reverend Salter read the scribble.

His face was stern and he handed the letter back to Daniel. “I will help you all I can but I fear you are too late. Come sit with me”. They all sat on the back porch seat and although it was still early morning Reverend Salter asked his wife to fetch them cider and she went off into the cottage returning in quick time with three tankards of the dark gold liqueur. He told them of the happenings of the last year. How the boom in trade had forced up the price of rooms and accommodation around the docks. Many of the poor had been forced out onto the streets and taken to living on the rough land where the woods met the rocks and the sea to the west of the town. Here the poor had set up makeshift shelters and many of the sick had succumbed to the coughing sickness and other diseases that were common among the many sailors, they had tried to survive in their shanties, but it was the hardest life. 

He told them that Mrs Tresco had taken Daniel’s mother and sister into her house after they had been evicted; Mrs Tresco’s house was large with several bedrooms and was within sight of the shipyard and docks. She had been offered on several occasions far more than it was worth but she refused to sell, she had lived there all her married life and it was her home. The reverend told them that her life had become very difficult after that. 

She was constantly followed and threatened and on one occasion she had been knocked to the ground and her purse stolen. He was sure that the men behind the threats were owners of a large dockside warehouse close to Mrs Tresco’s property called Burgess Import.  They bought up property and let the rooms to those dockworkers that could pay. Anyone who could not or didn’t pay was forcibly thrown out or worse. Few people argued and many of the locals had been forced out of their homes. He explained that the company employed a number of cut-throats and thugs to carry out their work.

One dark evening just after Christmas Mrs Tresco had been attacked in the alley behind her house and when she was found she was close to death.  She died three days later without regaining consciousness. No one would say who was behind the attack but just about everyone knew. Reverend Slater had been incensed by the attack and been to the magistrate to demand justice. He was warned not to get involved and was sure that the magistrate was taking payment or had been scared off.

With no evidence and no one to help him to his undying shame the Reverend had given in to the bullies and remained silent. They buried Mrs Tresco and her house deeds had been transferred by the same magistrate to the Burgess Company. She had no other family and nobody stood up to them. Now the company was a major player in the import and export of everything through the port.

The Reverend continued to relate events and told them that the widow Postlet and her daughter Rachael were evicted even though the old lady, Daniel’s mother, could no longer walk without assistance. Rachael had taken her mother to the beach to the west of the town and he had visited them there. They had been sheltering under a thatch lean-to and Rachael kept them warm by pulling falling branches from the woods inland with which they managed to keep a fire burning day and night. It was heavy hard toil but there were several other women with their families along with a number of children, the impoverished residents of a beach helped each other, they were a strong and determined race and all of them had the will to survive.

When the weather allowed the able men in the squatter camp went out to sea and along the coast in small sailing boats, fish were plentiful and it was surprising that these desperate people had plenty of food even if the diet was almost all fish.  The fish they caught was cooked with the rich dark green seaweed; they gathered the crabs and shellfish from along the coast. They had enough to eat but it was the cold wet wind from the sea that cut into their bodies and after days of rain everything was soaked through inside and outside their shelters, the cold eventually took its toll, many did not survive the winter.

The bodies were buried in the sand above the tide line and covered in rocks collected off the beach. Rachael did her best for her mother but she remained frail. The reverend had not seen them since January and had heard nothing.

Daniel and Will decided that they would waste no more time and said their farewell to the reverend and his wife. They walked their horses to the edge of the common before mounting. The narrow streets gave way to open countryside and they made their way down the narrow lane which the reverend had said led to the sea.  It was by now nearly midday the weather was improving with the sun was getting higher as the summer approached. They rode along the beach to the far western edge where it gave way to steeply rising cliffs. Here they could see the fires of the beach dwellers in and around the shallow caves in the distance.

Several men came towards them as they approached; they were armed with clubs and pitchforks and stood in a line across their path. Daniel called out to them in a friendly greeting and they relaxed. They rode slowly up to the line.  Will counted six young men and three more in their old age. They looked a rough bunch and he was sure they were hard and tough fighters, they would have to be to live a life that they had been forced into.

Daniel told them who he was and what they were there for. They were still suspicious and both riders dismounted. The men made way for them to pass, one went ahead and the rest followed close behind. As they approached the first lean-to the lead man told them to wait and went inside.

They heard a yell and a young woman with long black hair came running out. She stood and looked at the tall broad shouldered soldiers, she noticed the pistols in their belts and the swords at their waists they stood alongside their fine horses. The men had thick beards and long hair, it took a while to decide which was her brother.  She spoke for the first time “Daniel is that you is it really you”

Daniel ran to her taking off his hat, he picked her up in his arms and swung her around. “Yes, yes it is me”. The tears ran down her face and she made no effort to wipe them away. She had her arms around Daniels neck and hung on to his as if her life depended on it. They hugged for what seemed an age before her face became serious once again. “We thought you would never come, mother is near death and we fear constantly for our lives. These good people have given us protection”.

“Take me to mother” Daniel insisted.

Rachael took his arm and led him into the dimly lit shelter. There in the corner on a pile of rags lay an old woman, Daniel did not recognise her at first; her eyes were shut and the gaunt look of a very old woman. Daniel knew his mother was no more than fifty years of age. He knelt and took her hand in his, it was cold to the touch. As if she knew someone was there her eyes opened and the old lady looked into his eyes.

 “It is me Daniel”. He whispered.  Her mouth opened and she whispered his name “Daniel, Daniel”. Her eyes closed once again. He knew she was gravely ill.

He stood up and turned to his sister. We leave here today, you and mother will come with us to Stratton. “Oh Daniel how will we she could never stand the journey”. “I fear she will be dead before we get there”.

Daniel took her by the arm, she felt the strength of her brother’s hand and the authority in his voice when he spoke. He had been a thoughtless and irresponsible boy when she had last seen him and now we was a man, a soldier and she could tell he had taken on responsibility for his own destiny. Her brother was a different person from the one she had known.

He looked at her face she was the same Rachael but the tired lines on her face told of hard times, the skin was drawn tight across her cheek bones, she was still not eighteen years of age but she could be taken for a woman much older. The last two years had been hard indeed and he regretted that he had not come for her before this. He went outside and the small crowd had melted away. Will stood where he had left him, holding the reins and keeping a watchful eye on his surroundings.

“We have a problem Will” He explained the situation and Will stood silent for a while, he looked at the face of the young woman standing beside Daniel, he looked at her face with the stains of her tears and he took in the look of her body even with her tatty clothing something about her caused a lump in his throat, his heart missed a beat, he could not remember ever seeing any woman more beautiful in his eyes.

He took his eyes from her and looked at Daniel. “Right this is what we do”  “You know your way around Falmouth Daniel, go and find Master Payne get him to bring a wagon here as soon as he has finished his business. We will wait here for you here. He turned to Rachael “I have an idea, I plan to go to Redruth, that is not such a journey, we will take your mother to my family, it is less than a day ride from here my mother will know how to help her”.

Daniel was reluctant to leave his sister but with no better idea he knew it made sense to go rather than send Will. He could be there and back in a couple of hours. “Okay Will” He kissed his sister on the forehead and climbed effortlessly onto his horse. He turned and trotted off along the water line towards the town.

As soon as his two friends had departed Anthony Payne ordered the wagon drivers to get ready, they set off within the hour and headed for the docks.

The streets were crowded with wagons and people moved about alongside the ships like busy bees. Anthony found a place to park the three wagons and drivers along with the three-soldier escort who dismounted. He ordered them to be watchful but not to draw attention to themselves. The men looked at each other and chuckled as the man mountain strode off along the dockside. Heads turned as he went by and people stepped aside. His men were in little doubt that none of these dock workers or seamen had seen the like of Anthony Payne before, he drew attention to himself wherever he went even though it was not his intention.

Anthony Payne had always been a big man and took no notice of the looks from the dockyard riff raff. He looked along the row of two-story buildings. These were the warehouses and storerooms where tons of goods of every description were stored everything could be bought if you could pay the price. He was looking for the sign of Segin Parsons trader. Bevill had instructed him to seek out this man’s store as he was well known to him as an honest trader. He walked further along the row. He was sure he was in the right area but there was no sign that said Segin Parsons. He stopped a man coming towards him and asked the whereabouts of Segin Parsons. “You won’t find him here mate”, was the reply “He disappeared about six months ago, no one seen him since. If you want to know anything better ask the boss over there” He pointed to a thick set man who stood on a raised platform in front of a big storehouse. Anthony studied him for a moment. The ‘boss’ was a man of about forty years. Thickset with a thick black beard. He wore a wide brimmed hat and carried a stick with a thick knotted head. Anthony had seen this type of stick before it would be loaded with lead in the tip so that it could be turned into a dangerous weapon at close quarters, particularly in the hands of someone who knew how to use it. Anthony felt that this was a man who could and would.

Anthony did not fear any man but he was in a strange town and he had an uneasy feeling, he could not be sure what was causing his discomfort but for some reason he was wary and he was on his guard. He walked over and climbed the steps, the ‘boss’ turned to meet him as he approached.

The man’s eyes narrowed as he took in the sight of this giant in front of him. He was a big man but this stranger stood a head and shoulders taller and his shoulders were as wide again as his own. “good day stranger” he spoke first “welcome to Burgess trading post, I am William Hockin, part owner of Burgess Trading Company, what can I do for you”

Anthony took the offered hand and shook it briefly. “I am looking for Segin Parsons” he said.

“Ahh well, he is no longer here but this was his store, the Burgess Company bought it up after he left and I don’t think he had any relatives”

Anthony took out his list of supplies and showed it to him. Can you supply these items” he asked.

William Hockin studied the list for a moment and said “yes of course, quite a lot here but I am sure we can accommodate you with most of it, if you got the money.

Anthony didn’t like the man on instinct but as he could not see any option, he knew of no one else in the town and he was unlikely to find anyone with the supplies he wanted at such short notice, he decided to go ahead and get his supplies from the Burgess Trading store.

He followed him into the huge warehouse stacked from floor to ceiling with barrels and sacks, a mixture of unusual smells filled the air, the warehouse held all manner of imported spices from the orient.

Hockin shouted orders and set about gathering the items on the list. Anthony told him he was off to get the carts and walked quickly back along the dockside towards where he had left the wagons.

It was only a few minutes before he arrived and he was surprised to see Daniel there talking to the drivers. Anthony was very fond of Daniel and listened intently to what he had to say. He was in two minds as to what to do, his orders were specific and letting Will and Daniel go to Redruth with a loaded wagon was not part of his plan or the orders of Bevill Grenville. His instructions were to collect the supplies and get back to Bodmin as quickly as he could. “Okay Daniel we will talk it over when we get back to Will, right now we have to load up the supplies”. Anthony checked the box under the second wagon seat. Here he had stashed the bags of silver coin with which to pay for the supplies and the drivers were instructed to keep a close eye on it.

They turned the wagons and walked the horses along the dockside to the Burgess trading store. Many of the supplies were ready for loading. Hockin was there in deep discussion with two other men. Anthony did not like the look of them either. In fact everyone he had seen associated with Hockin and the Burgess Trading Company had the look of a thug, he concluded that the whole lot of them were a band of cut-throats. He was even more on edge now but he could not be sure of the reason. He had six well-armed men as well as Daniel and himself. No one was going to interfere with their progress but he continued to feel uneasy none the less.

Hockin explained to Anthony that the muskets and powder were stored on the far side of the docks for safety’s sake they were kept well away from the built up area.

They would proceed to the arsenal once the stores were loaded. This made sense, storing powder in the middle of town could prove disastrous. Anthony agreed and told Hockin to work out the price of all the goods.

Hockin went off with the two newcomers, he said he was going to see the agent and would be back shortly with the price.

He returned within the hour just as Anthony’s drivers were putting the canvas covers over the goods, two of the three wagons were fully loaded. The third would be for the munitions.

Hockin climbed onto the empty wagon and gave directions to the drivers as they set off to the munitions warehouse. It was only a few minutes to the end of the dockyard where a large building stood isolated from the others. Daniel counted three armed men guarding the entrance. Hockin spoke with them and they followed him into the warehouse. Anthony and his men followed into the dimly lit building. Hockin pointed out boxes of muskets. Anthony had an order for fifty muskets and ten barrels of fine black powder. The swords they had hoped to get were not there. Hockin explained that all the swords they had in the store had been bought up along with several cannon and dozens of muskets by the Plymouth militia who were fortifying the city.

This was disturbing news for Anthony and he knew that this information would be of interest to Bevill Grenville, he was well aware of the unrest between factions of city dwellers and the landowners in the countryside of Cornwall and Devon and also the problems between parliament and the king although it was news to him that they were arming themselves and fortifying Plymouth.

The men carried the boxes of muskets and carefully rolled out the big barrels of black powder. Hockin called Anthony over and brought out a large book he opened it and wrote for a moment. “Right” He said “here is a list of what we supplied and the cost”

Anthony looked at the amounts and was shocked he had two hundred pounds in silver coin but Hockin was asking double that amount. Anthony had no doubt that the price had been inflated and that he was being taken for a fool. He did not show any sign of his anger but reached forward and grabbed Hockin by the throat he lifted the man off the ground and began shaking him like a dog with a rat. Despite his size Hockin could do nothing but gurgle. Anthony let him go and handed over the bags of silver. “This is two hundred pieces of silver a good price agreed between Lord Grenville and Segin Parsons; this is what you will take”. Hockin fell to his knees gasping.

Anthony walked back to the wagons. “Let’s go” he roared and the wagon drivers whipped the horses into a fast trot. Two of Hockin’s men ran from the building drawing there pistols they fired at the fleeing wagons. Daniel felt the wind of a ball pass close to his head. Instinctively he wheeled the horse and galloped back towards the men. Releasing the reins he gave the horse its head as he drew both pistols, he shot first one then the other in the chest at close range the horse crashed into the men as they fell in front of him, he knew he did not need to check that the men were dead. Daniel spun the horse, its hooves kicking up dust and stones as he rode at full gallop after the wagons.

He looked back to see men running from the building, but no one dared to follow him.

The wagons slowed to a walk and within fifteen minutes they were walking onto the dry sand of the north beach. Will was sitting on a rock waiting for them, he led the way back to the cluster of lean-to buildings and caves. The beach dwellers came to meet them surprised by the arrival of so many wagons and horsemen. Anthony looked at them with pity, he could tell from their sunken eyes and weather-beaten faces that they were a desperate group.

It was late afternoon and Anthony noticed that the heavy wagons were sinking deeply into the sand he was concerned that they might have trouble getting them out when they wanted to and ordered the drivers to park them on the hard rocky path above the beach. The sun was setting, it would be dark before long, Anthony was more than keen to be away from this area he was certain that Hockin would not let the loss of the extra money and the death of two of his men pass without exacting revenge. He decided that Hockin would try to kill him and his men and take back the weapons and all the stores. Anthony called Daniel to him and asked his advice. Daniel explained that there was no way they could travel at night they would first have to traverse the sprawling town of Falmouth and then ten miles further on they would have to find the road that bypassed Truro. Will joined them as they sat around the big driftwood fire and between them, they made their plans for the following day.

The decision was to stay at the beach for the night and leave as the sun came up in the morning. They would take turns to guard the camp over night while the rest got what sleep they could. The men joined the tent people and pulled logs and branches to form three defensive positions where the muskets could train fire along the beach and they could not be taken by surprise from the woods. The beach dwellers told them that there was no approach from the cliffs and the beach would be the direction of attack if it came. They had chosen this place because it could be defended from all sides and was only approached easily from along the beach.

The men made beds under the wagons and pulled canvas covers over them to keep out the cold night wind which was blowing strongly from the sea.

Anthony sat on a log close the fire, he looked into the flames which were being blown high into the night air and tried to think through the situation he found himself in. His train of though was broken when he was joined by one of the beach dwellers. “Can I sit with you”? The man asked.

Anthony nodded and the man dragged a log close to him and sat down. They sat in silence for a while. Anthony eventually asked who he was and how he came to be on the beach. “I am Ned Hackett and I worked for Segin Parsons until he disappeared. I questioned as to where he was and that man Hockin had me beaten up for asking questions. I went to the magistrate to protest and next think I knew me and my wife and three children were thrown out into the street.” “ No one would give us a room so we came here, we had nowhere else to go”.  Anthony looked at him without comment. They sat for a while longer Anthony looking into the flames with Ned sitting uncomfortably next to this huge presence. “I’ll bid you goodnight then” Ned said. Anthony, deep in thought, did not answer. Ned shuffled away to his shelter.

The wind changed and blew sparks into Anthony’s face. It snapped him back to the present. He stood up and stretched his arms, he realised how tired he was and went up to the wagons, he rolled himself in a canvas cover and propped himself against the wagon wheel. He slept fitfully the sounds of the sea and the wind made unnatural sounds to him and he found it quite disturbing.

There were no incidents overnight but and as the glow of dawn came in from the east Anthony relaxed, they would soon be on the road.

A whistle from his lookout brought Anthony to fully awake. He went quickly up the rocks to a vantage point that he had set the lookout from here he could see the whole of the beach back to the trail which was the only approach from the town.

He could make out movement, they were coming, he had not expected them so early, it was still half-light, but he could make out at least twenty figures emerging and walking warily from the cover just below the tree line.

Anthony ran back down to wagons. Will and Daniel and the three cavalry escorts were saddling their horses. He whispered for them to get mounted. Daniel and Will checked their pistols and muskets, they were loaded and ready, they called to the others to get ready. The men mounted their horses and hid behind the wagons. Anthony ordered the drivers to get ready with their muskets and remain with the wagons.

The beach dwellers were already mostly awake and at the sound of activity on the beach came running, Anthony shouted for them to stay back but the young men could see what was happening and had already assessed the situation, they could see the band of heavily armed men approaching quickly along the beach. There were seven men of fighting age as well as their women who took their places behind them, he could see the fear in their eyes but all the men had knives and clubs.

They knew they would have to fight for their lives; these cut-throats would not stop after they had killed the giant and his men. This was it; the time had come. The beach dwellers took up a line slightly to the rear of Anthony Payne. He told the men to hold their fire until the gang had advanced to within a dozen yards from the wagons. He saw it was Hockin leading them as he cast his eye over the men in front of him. A sorrier bunch of murderers and cut-throats he could hardly imagine.

Hockin yelled at him. “Give back the wagons and we will let you go, if not we will kill you all and the scum behind you”.

Anthony made no reply but stepped slowly forward, no one had noticed that he had unsheathed his sword, for such a big man he moved with lightning speed swinging the big sword in high ark. Hockin tried to step back but his men were close behind him. The sword struck him high on the shoulder cutting down through his chest. He fell backwards into the men behind him. The stunned silence seemed to last for an age but was in fact just a matter of seconds. The drivers opened fire with muskets and with a roar the five mounted solders charged from behind the wagons down the beach and into the gang scattering them in all directions. They were cut to pieces by the swinging blades as the heavy horses crashed into them. The gang had never experienced a cavalry charge, and none would again.

The beach dwellers charged screaming and swinging their clubs and knives. It was all over in minutes. Three men who had not been cut down had turned and ran back down the beach.  Daniel called to the riders, and they galloped after the three running for their lives. They turned and looked over their shoulders, seeing the approaching horses they knew there was no escape and put up their arms in surrendered. The horses pounded on and covered the yards between them in a moment. Daniel swung his sword in the killing downward arc. Will and the others slashed their swords as they rode past. They wheeled their horses and dismounted. Daniel knew the three were already dead their blood running bright red and soaking into the white sand.

They walked their horses back along the beach towards Anthony.

The beach dwellers were sorting through the bodies taking everything of value, they removed the boots and trousers, jackets, pistols, anything they could use.

Will, Daniel and Anthony stood and watched. Daniel’s sister Rachael came over to them and Daniel introduced her to Anthony.

“I have heard much of you Mr. Payne but what will we do now? Surely the sound of the fight will bring others from the town you cannot fight them all. There are soldiers garrisoned at the river mouth where the ships are.  What will become of these people now, they will just as surely use the killing of these men as an excuse to drive them out or kill them.”

Anthony called Will and Daniel to follow him. They walked down to the seashore. The sea was running fast along the beach a strong south westerly wind driving the waves before it.

“We need to get through Falmouth without attracting too much attention, any ideas”?

Daniel said “we will want a diversion. “Will and I along with the troopers can ride into town and start a fight maybe stir up the soldiers and then we can lead them out of town the other way”

“I have a better idea,” said Anthony. “The munitions store is on this side of town and I want you two to go and set fuses at the powder store you to blow up the munitions there. That should give them something to think about while we slip past. It will also deny anyone who would use them against us the chance to get their hands on them.

I doubt we will want to return to this place. I will answer to Lord Bevill for my actions.

“One other problem” Daniel said. “What about the beach people”.

Anthony called for them to gather round him. They numbered twenty-five in all, six men, seven women and ten children.

“I give you a choice” he began. “I leave here within the hour and will be travelling to the north of Cornwall, my lord and master is in need of soldiers and workers. I offer you men the chance to serve with him and your families will be given shelter and the chance to live a better life” “Or you can stay and take a chance with Burgess Trading Company.”

They were silent. Ned stepped forward. “Mr. Payne, you offer us no choice if we stay we die if we follow you we have a chance of life” “We will be ready”.

“Good man Ned” “now drag the bodies into the sea the tide will take them far from here, also cover the signs of the fight, move fast now we must be gone from this place”.

Daniel went with Rachael and carried their mother to the wagons. The men set about shifting the stores from one of the wagons to make a space where Daniel could lay his mother. They put a thick layer of straw and old clothing on the wooden floor to make it as comfortable as possible and Daniel laid her out on it. Rachael climbed into the back and placed her mother’s head in her lap she planned to support hold her head steady during the journey.

Will and Daniel reloaded their pistols and set off towards the town. Ned went and took two burning branches from the fire; he walked quickly over the sand and set light to the lean-to shelters that had been their homes. He watched them flair up in the strong breeze before turning his back on them for ever and running back to the wagons. The children clambered onto the tailgates and settled themselves anywhere they could get a half comfortable purchase. Two of the older women got up beside the drivers of the second and third wagon with Anthony and his driver on the lead wagon. They were in sombre mood when they set off, getting through Falmouth and around Truro without attracting too much attention would be their main priority.

                 CHAPTER EIGHT

Will and Daniel dismounted before they reached the buildings at the edge of town. They walked their horses and chatted casually, mingling with the early morning workers whom they met as the men were setting off for their day of toil at the docks and on the ships. No one took notice of them as they walked their horses down the alleyway leading behind the big warehouse on the outskirts of the town in which the Burgess Company stored the munitions.

It was fortunate that Daniel knew his way around the narrow streets having grown up here he led Will quickly to their destination. They put the horses reins loosely through a hitching post at one corner of the building ready for a quick getaway should they need to leave in a hurry.

Daniel led Will around the rear of the building, they were looking for an entrance away from the front, but they search was in vain. The rear of the building was constructed of solid wood and any gaps were packed with clay and stones there were no windows or doors. They would have to go in the front which they knew would be well guarded. They put their pistols in their belts and pulled their big riding coats around to their waists to hide the weapons. Their swords swung in their sheaths at their sides also hidden by the long coats. The two men strolled up to door where two guards were outside the entrance, one man was sitting and the other stood by his side. They carried heavy wooden clubs and in their belts a pistol which could be pulled and cocked in one movement. They were hard looking men and no doubt well used to street fighting “Good morning “Daniel called out “Mr. Hockin sent us to collect another barrel of powder we were one short in the load”.

The men did not move from their position. “Sorry mister we can’t let you in without Mr. Hockin’s say so” the man lounging in his seat replied.

“Okay that is not a problem we will go and get him”. Will replied.

Both men turned as if to leave but with their backs to the guards they opened their topcoats and drew their pistols. Suddenly they swung around to face the guards. As far as the guards were concerned the pistols had appeared as if by magic. “Stand very still” Will ordered. The two guards were taken completely by surprise and were in no position to argue with a pistol a few inches in front of their faces. Daniel found pieces of rope inside the door and tied the guard’s hands behind them. He stuffed a dirty rag in each of their mouths and ordered them to sit down, he quickly tied their legs with another piece of rope and bound them to the hitching post near the entrance. Will kept guard on the street but all was quiet, no one else came near as it was still early morning.

Daniel went into the dark interior of the building and searched around until he found a small barrel of black powder, he quickly pulled out the stopper and began pouring the powder at the base of the stack of larger powder barrels. He made a thick trail of powder along the floor and out of the door just as Will set light to a taper with his flint striker.

He touched the taper to the black powder which flared up instantly, the flame moved quickly as the powder caught and within seconds it had reached the doorway to the building. The guards realised what was about to happen and struggled to get to their feet. Daniel cut the rope that held their legs and the two men ran as fast as they could away from the door and along the street towards the docks.

Daniel and Will ran hard around the side of the building to where they had left the horses; they leapt into the saddles and yelled at the mounts as they dug in their heels. The horses went away from the building at a full gallop with Daniel in the front. As they reached the corner of the side street the first of the barrels in the warehouse blow up. This set off the rest in a series of huge explosions each one seeming greater than the previous.

Will looked back to see parts of the roof of the warehouse lift high into the air with a massive cloud of black smoke belching into the sky. He could see nothing more as he was forced to concentrate on guiding the horse as it swept around the corner and into the narrow streets of the town centre its hooves slipping and sliding on the cobbles.

The roar of the explosion brought people running from their houses and shops towards the docks and the growing black cloud soon covered the town.

Anthony and the wagons made their way steadily through the town when the munitions exploded the blast took everyone by surprise. All of the townsfolk seemed to be heading towards the fire and the streets on which they now travelled were almost deserted. The soldiers from the garrison were also running towards the scene of the ball of fire and cloud that filled the air, they took no notice of the wagons passing in the other direction.

As the wagons left the town Anthony ordered the drivers to pick up speed, those members of the beach dwellers that could find a space leapt onto the wagons while the rest trotting as fast as they could behind. Will and Daniel dismounted and walked their horses through the streets not wishing to draw further attention to themselves and as soon as they could see the open country ahead they felt it safe enough to mount up which they did and urged the horses into a gallop.

The two men quickly caught up with the group of beach dwellers who were on foot. They were by now struggling to keep up with the carriages and falling further behind.  Daniel and Will dismounted and told the group to walk and get their breath. Two of the women were near to collapse so Will and Daniel helped them onto their horses. He told them to go ahead and catch up with Anthony. He said that they should ask Mr. Payne to turn off the main road at the junction in Penrin, a village that they would soon reach and from there they should head for Mylor.  Daniel knew this area and this was where the road ran close to the banks of the river Fal. He was confident that they would not be followed if they kept off the main road. Mr. Payne was to wait for them behind the Inn at Mylor.  Daniel knew Anthony would heed his words as this was an unknown part of the country for the men from North Cornwall.

The women climbed clumsily onto the horses neither of them could ride well but the huge horses were well trained and with a slap from Will they trotted off up the road ahead of them. Daniel, Will and the remaining group set off walking as fast as their tired legs would allow them.

The two women on the horses caught up with the main party after an uncomfortable ride for a mile or more. Anthony called a halt when they arrived and listened to what they had to say, as luck would have it they were already approaching the crossroads in the village of Penrin. He ordered the drivers to take the road off to the right which would take them to Mylor. The road was in fact little more than a rutted track. They arrived at the sign which told them that they were at Mylor after a journey of little more than half an hour and Anthony ordered the drivers to stop by the side of the road on the outskirts while the mounted soldiers were sent to scout the village ahead.

They returned in a few minutes and reported that the village was small and quiet with little more than an Inn and a bakery. The rest of the village was made up of a few cottages and workshops for repairing the small fishing boats that sailed from the head of Mylor Creek down to the sea.

Anthony led the party to the Inn and they found the wide yard at the rear as Daniel had told them, an ideal place to wait for the remainder of the party to catch up with them. It was now well into May and there was a lot of heat in the midday sun. The riders tended the horses while everyone else rested under the shade of a large oak.

 Anthony ordered the soldiers to take up positions on either side of the track and act as lookouts while he went to find the landlord of the Inn. He still had a bag of silver coins in his pack and in the circumstances, he had decided to spend some of it to feed his men and the beach people.

The landlord had heard them arrive and was coming out of the front entrance as Anthony arrived at the door. The landlord was a big man with a bull-like neck and thick leather belt that held in his great girth. Anthony could tell immediately that this man enjoyed his food and drink almost as much as he did himself. Filling the doorway Anthony appeared at first as a menacing figure. By far the biggest man the landlord had ever seen. He looked an Anthony without speaking.  Anthony put the man at ease by stepping out of his way before offering his hand, the innkeeper shook it with a strong dry grip.

When Anthony had told him that he had money to spend and more than twenty mouths to feed the Inn keeper’s face lit up, he called for his wife to assist him. Anthony said he required bread, cheese and whatever meat they had ready, as well as anything else he could get at short notice for his party. As he turned to go Anthony had a second thought and shouted after him to pull up a couple of dozen tankards of ale.

He returned to the yard and joined the drivers who were busy getting water and straw for the wagon horses. There would be no time to unhitch the horses and allow them to graze.

Daniel, Will and the rest of the beach people arrived within the hour.  It was all of eight miles from Falmouth and the two of them still had their heavy coats, riding boots and pistols in their belts their swords clattered against their legs, the two were not comfortable without their horses. Everyone was exhausted by the forced march and flopped down in the yard as soon as they arrived at the Inn.

The landlord and his wife came with jugs of ale followed by two of their daughters carrying large trays of bread, cheese, ham and cold mutton.

The men and women were soon tucking into the food as if they had not eaten for a week. Anthony downed his tankard of ale in one go and asked for more to be drawn up for them. The whole group were in better spirits and glad to be well away from Falmouth, even the people who had walked were soon recovered and drinking and eating with the rest.

 Rachael and two of the women from the beach tended to her mother who was not looking good after being bounced about in the back of the wagon, they tried to get her to eat but only succeeded in forcing some broth that Daniel had obtained from the Inn, through her lips.

They rested at the Inn for an hour before Anthony stood up, he had suddenly come up with an idea. He told Daniel to search the village and see if he could find a cart, if they could get something suitable for Daniel then he could take his mother to Redruth and Anthony would still have all his wagons to return to Stowe.

Daniel collected his horse and several silver coins that Anthony gave to him and set off to scout around the farms in the area while Anthony paid the Inn keeper for the food and drink with a several silver coins. He gave him an extra coin which was as much money as the landlord would make in a month. Anthony told him that it was for his silence should anyone ask questions about him the landlord was to say that he had seen no-one. 

Anthony was getting concerned when Daniel had not returned for almost another hour. He wanted to be well past Truro before nightfall and was greatly relieved when Daniel eventually came clattering along the lane on a two wheeled flatbed cart. His horse was tethered to the rear and the cart was pulled along by a very old looking grey carthorse. He explained that this was the best he could get but he had been assured that the horse was sturdy enough.

They set about making a bed of clothing and straw in the back of the cart and transferred Daniel’s mother to it, making her as comfortable as they could. Anthony was now able to get the entire beach people loaded onto the carts as well as the supplies. It would be an uncomfortable journey for them, but he could not afford to have anyone slowing him down.

Rachael drove the cart with her mother secured in the back. They all retraced their steps along the track from Mylor and rejoined the road to Truro at Penrin. They followed the Truro road for a further half mile. Here the road split with the signpost indicating Redruth to the left and Truro to the right. Daniel, Will and Rachael waved goodbye to Anthony and the beach dwellers and took the road to Redruth while the rest headed for Truro.

Fortunately the journey was uneventful and they met few people on the road to Redruth, the old grey plodded steadily keeping up a steady pace while Rachael attempted to keep her mother as comfortable as possible as they made their way along the deeply rutted road.

It was fortunate that it was not a long journey to Redruth and it was just over two hours before they reached the outskirts of the town. The streets were quiet in the late afternoon and they saw few people as they travelled through the town. Will was excited at the prospect of seeing his brothers and mother and father for the first time in two years. He jogged ahead of the cart for the last mile towards his home in the small town of Chasewater. He kneed the horse to a gallop as the houses came into view, his arrival scattering geese and chickens in all directions and causing several men and women to leap out of his way, two dogs started barking and chasing him along the road until he heaved the horse to a halt outside the blacksmith shop at the centre of the village.

His noisy arrival brought his father and two of his brothers rushing out of the building to see what was causing the ruckus. Will leapt from his horse and his father gave a great shout as he recognised his youngest son. Will hugged his father and brothers and his mother appeared from the side of the house. Her face lit up with delight as she saw her son. He had changed, he looked older and bigger if anything than she remembered, He had been clean shaven when she had last seen him and now a thick beard hid most of his face. Will lifted his mother off the ground in a great bear hug. He had always been fond of her and although she loved all her sons Will, being the youngest had a favourite place in her heart. Eventually he put her down and hastily explained why he had arrived so unexpectedly.

Jake Hooper went to the shed where he kept his ale store and drew several tankards of the strong   homemade drink.

He handed one to Will and each of his brothers and the men sat down on the bench outside the blacksmith shop. His brothers Henry and Benjamin were the eldest of the six boys and had become blacksmiths like their father. This was a time for them all to enjoy each other’s company. They brought Will up to date with the local news and family gossip while they waited for Daniel and Rachael to arrive, it was not long before the old grey horse, pulling the cart, came slowly down the lane into view.

The four men got up to greet the pair as they pulled up in front of the house. Will introduced Daniel to his family and they all shook his hand warmly. Will helped Rachael down from cart and Jake did not miss the look on his son’s face as the young woman came close to him. “This is Rachael” Will announced, “Daniel’s sister” They all shook hands as Will’s mother appeared from the house once again. “This is my mother Mary” “Mother this is Rachael and Daniel and looking towards the cart told them that this was their mother that he had been telling them about.

Will’s mother went to the back of the cart. Rachael’s mother was sleeping peacefully and Mary took her hand, it was cold and so thin the bones could clearly be seen through the skin.

“Bring her in the house Will and be careful with her” she told him. Daniel assisted Will to lift her out of the cart, it was difficult to lift her without hurting her but eventually they managed it and once out of the cart Daniel picked her up in his arms with ease. He followed Mary into the house and up the stairway to the first floor. This was a large house with several rooms. Four of Mary’s sons had moved out when they had married and when Will had moved away  there were two large rooms unoccupied. She had already made up the bed. Daniel’s eyes adjusted to the dim light as he laid his mother on her back on the bed. “Thank you Daniel”

“There is nothing more you can do Daniel, you can leave her with me now”. Mary was well used to looking after people. Bringing up six boys and having a husband working with horses in the blacksmith shop meant cuts and other injuries were commonplace. She had also helped deliver several babies in the village and was the person everyone seemed to come to for help with their problems these days.

Daniel and Will remained with Rachael and her mother for three days by which time there was a marked improvement in her general condition. Mary decided that she would make a good recovery with plenty of care. Will knew that they had to return to Stowe without further delay and told his family that would have to be on their way.  Friday morning, they made their farewells. Everyone was sorry to see them go but they understood that the two men had a duty to Lord Grenville. Daniel and Will promised to return in the summer.

Leaving the cart and old grey in the care of Will’s family they set off at first light towards Wadebridge. Without the cart to slow them down they made fast progress. The evenings were getting lighter and although Stratton was a good sixty miles they were sure they could make it by nightfall.

They rode at a steady pace resting often and watering the horses where they could, passing through Wadebridge without stopping. They rested for an hour at the Inn in the town of Camelford shortly after midday. They were eager to be on their way and set off once again for the last part of the journey, there were few people on the road and they made good time, arriving at Stratton in the late afternoon.

They went to the Inn of David Payne and were greeted like his own sons. He told them that Anthony and the wagons had arrived two days previous and had gone straight on to Stowe. Will and Daniel rested and drank the tankards of cool ale that was offered to them before saying farewell and mounting their horses for the last four miles to the big house at Stowe. They arrived at the hill overlooking the great house as the last of the sun dipped down over the horizon; it felt good to be home. 

The two men went looking for Anthony and were told he was at the big house with her Ladyship. They went to the side of the house and entered the corridor to the kitchen. They told the cook why they were there, and she told one of the maids to let her Ladyship know that the men had returned and to enquire as to any instructions she might have for them.

The girl came back shortly and told the men that her Ladyship would like to see them in the day room. They followed her through the long hallways lit by rows of candles at regular intervals. The two men had not been in this part of the house and were amazed by the size of the rooms and hallways, they were eventually shown into the Grenville’s day room. To them it was like no other room they had ever been in with a great fireplace in one wall and the centre table large enough for ten people. The walls were hung with drapes and paintings that were taller than a man, Will looked at one painting of a grand old man in a uniform of an army officer, his eyes appeared to follow Will as he walked further into the room which the young man found disconcerting.

Lady Grenville sat at the head of the table with Anthony standing at her side; they were going through a long list of figures. The pair looked up when the two soldiers came into the room and Anthony greeted them like long lost brothers putting his arms around their shoulders. Lady Grenville was also delighted to see them safely returned. She told them to sit and sent the maid for refreshments.

She explained that Bevill had received a letter from the king’s office and had set off at once for London. She had been left in overall charge, but her husband had insisted that Anthony was to implement a list of instructions during his absence. The refreshment arrived and they enjoyed a large glass of claret from the Grenville’s extensive wine cellar. Grace Grenville was a good listener and although she had heard Anthony’s side of events, she was interested to hear all that the two men had to say. It was late evening by the time she said goodnight to the men they were escorted from the big house. Anthony went to the cottage where he lived alone and was situated just a few yards down the lane from the estate. Will and Daniel had their quarters in the long low building which served as a barracks for the single men; they were glad to find their beds and were soon in a deep sleep.

CHAPTER NINE

It was now early summer of the year 1637. Bevill Grenville was in London where he had been for three months. He was desperate to be at home with his family and he longed to be with his wife whom he missed so much. His eldest son Richard had been placed in Gloucester Hall Oxford under the care of Mr. Whearle the Principal and a great friend of the Grenville family for many years. Bevill and his wife Grace had been concerned at the lack of education among the villagers and people on their estates so much so that they decided to set up an academy at Stowe with the intention of educating all the children and some of the young adults of the area in a variety of subjects. This however fell short of what Bevill felt he should have for his own family; he was well aware that the teachers he could employ at Stowe did not have the ability or qualifications of the masters at the universities and decided that his son should receive an education from the country’s finest minds he insisted that his son went to his old college at Oxford.

As a consequence, he had not seen Richard for a year and looked forward to spending time with him back at Stowe where he was to spend his summer recess.

Bevill had been outspoken about his support for the king and was unwillingly being drawn into the growing controversy between parliament and the king. A few days previous he had been invited to lunch with the Secretary of State John Pym. Bevill was angered by the line of questioning and the tone with which the meeting was held. Pym had quizzed him on where he stood with regard to the king and parliament and as to where his loyalty lay.  Bevill made it clear his allegiance was to his King and he could tell from the way the meeting went and the veiled threats the Secretary had made would make him a marked man if he continued in voicing his views. He told Bevill that it would be in his best interest, if he had doubts about where his loyalty lay that he should keep his thoughts to himself. The warning was clear enough to Bevill.

 The king had refused to have anything to do with the members of parliament who had opposed him regarding his absolute authority. For more than nine years he had asserting his belief that he was only answerable to god. He continued to govern, ignored the wishes of parliament and continued to raise taxes to support his own projects without recourse to the members of the house.

Bevill set his plans in motion for his return to Cornwall at the end of the session. On his instructions his staff began to pack his belongings and prepare his coach. The horses had been exercised regularly and were fit and ready for the journey home. Bevill kept eight horses in stables in London. Four of which would be harnessed to the carriage and a further four which would allow a change during the journey, in this way they would be able to make better speed. His driver and manservant were also soldiers; they looked after him and guarded him. When they were not with him, they spent hours honing their skills. Sword fencing, pistol shooting and target practice with their heavy muskets. Bevill insisted that they were not to sit around drinking and whoring in London in fact he would check on them from time to time and they knew the consequences of upsetting him were dire indeed.

Most of the time they kept to themselves and out of trouble although London was still a place of many distractions.

The day after his meeting with Pym, Bevill was leaving the Houses of Parliament to take the short walk to his chambers when he was approached by smartly dressed young man who introduced himself as a messenger. He said that he had a letter to be delivered personally to Bevill Grenville MP.

Bevill took the letter and turned it over. His hair neck bristled; the seal was large and distinctive, he recognised it immediately, it was the royal seal, a letter from the king.

He opened the letter and read the contents; it was a request from the king, written in his own hand for Bevill to attend Hampton Court Palace for an audience with the king. It was for that very evening. Bevill told the messenger to inform the king that it would be his great honour to attend and the messenger told Bevill that a carriage would be sent to his chambers at seven on the clock. With that the messenger nodded to Bevill and walked across the street to a black carriage. Bevill walked slowly along the embankment. His leg was aching but he enjoyed the exercise, he had spent far too long sitting down. He took every opportunity to ride one of his horses in the great park but pressures of an MP’s life meant hours poring over papers and attending meetings meant that he was not as fit as he would have liked. He wondered why the king should request a meeting with him and could only surmise that it was related to his meeting the day before with Pym.

Bevill spent the afternoon at the stables where he kept the carriage and horses. His five man team was in good spirits all were eager to be on their way home to Cornwall, they went to work with a will polishing the woodwork and greasing the carriage wheels, making sure everything was in good working order. Bevill inspected their work and was pleased with the results. He left them in the late afternoon to prepare himself for his visit to Hampton Court.

In the early evening Bevill was dressed and ready, he was wearing his new and splendid outfit which was made of the best cloth in a fine deep blue colour. It had been fashioned in the latest style by one of London’s most famous outfitters. The leather boots were of the finest workmanship, highly polished and fitted to his feet perfectly. He had selected a hat that he had found on display in one of the outfitters. It was black and made of soft leather, it had three white feathers at the back held in place by a wide had band, it had a wide brim, high fashion and without doubt a hat designed for a wealthy man.  Bevill could afford to dress for a royal appointment and although he was generally cautious with his money, he still felt the need to dress well when in the city.

His manservant came to tell him that the royal coach had arrived and Bevill went out into the street. The carriage was not one of the kings most ostentatious and the royal crest was a discrete size on either side. It was drawn by two fine jet-black horses with a driver and footman in attendance. The footman greeted Bevill with a respectful nod and opened the door to allow Bevill access. Bevill entered the dark interior and realised at once that he was not alone in the carriage. A gentleman sat in the shadow of the corner, his back to the horses. He was dressed all in black and indicated for Bevill to take the seat opposite him. He introduced himself as a king’s aide and would escort him to the palace. He called out instructions and the driver set of at a steady pace, the palace was just a ten minute ride from Bevill’s lodgings and he and the Kings aide sat in silence.

The carriage swept through the imposing gates past the soldiers of the king’s guard and up the drive to the magnificent building that was Hampton Court Palace.

Doormen come to open the carriage and took him up the steps into the great entrance hall. He was led through several rooms the walls of which were covered in paintings and amazing wall coverings. They came to a closed door, two guards with pikes stood on duty.  His escort told him that this was the king’s private quarters and asked him to wait while he informed the King of his presence. 

The guards stood impassively watching him, only their eyes moved; he stood at ease in front of them the thought crossed his mind as to how easy or difficult it would be to get past them and into the king’s quarters. The two looked hard and well trained and he silently concluded that it would not be possible to get past them before help arrived.

His thoughts were interrupted by the door opening and an escort arrived and nodded to Bevill. He asked Bevill to remove his sword and requested that he remove any other arms he might have. Bevill did as he was asked and unbuckled the scabbard and placed it on the vacant chair close to the guards. He was ushered inside the splendid room filled with many antiques and comfortable furnishings, there were great windows to his right and he observed that they overlooked the magnificent gardens befitting the king’s residence.

Bevill was shown through another pair of doors into the great room which was indeed of huge proportions, high ceilings and luxurious furnishings. The King was sitting at his desk at the centre of the room. Two men stood with him one on either side of the enormous table.

Bevill took in his surroundings before walking slowly forward; he stopped in front of the desk and bowed deeply in front of the King. The escort introduced him as Lord Grenville of Cornwall.

Bevill had met the king on two previous occasions but not on a close personal level as this. The King welcomed him and asked him to sit, gesturing to a vacant seat at the end of the table. The king told one of his aides to arrange refreshment; the servant bowed his head and left the room his shoes making a load clicking on the marble floor.

The King waited until the servant had left the room before addressing Bevill Grenville, he spoke to him as someone whom he knew well even though he did not, he explained to Bevill that he had been following recent events and knew of his meeting with Pitt. It transpired that the king had taken more than a little interest in the views of Bevill Grenville and would use this opportunity to discuss matters with him. He introduced the man on his left.

This was Sir Ralph Hopton. Bevill had met with Hopton previously and yet he still studied the man, Hopton was a short slim man with a long face and goatee beard; his eyes were bright and alert. Sir Ralph Hopton had been a long-time friend of the King and had attended his coronation and wedding. The king had invited Hopton because he had lands and estates in Wiltshire and Somerset as well as estates in Wales. Hopton was a very wealthy man besides which the King considered him his eyes and ears in the West of England and he believed that Hopton and Bevill Grenville should be better acquainted. The king introduced the other man; he was the King’s close aide and adviser Robert Devereux 3^rd, Earl of Essex. For some reason Bevill was not drawn to this man, he was fat and perspired readily, he looked at Bevill and nodded but never spoke, the eyes were cold and when Bevill shook his hand it was warm and clammy. Bevill shook the hand of Ralph Hopton, he did not mention to the King that he had met Hopton in the Houses at Parliament on a couple of occasions; Bevill was comfortable in his company. He was not sure of what to make of the Earl of Essex his demeanour was that of a sullen figure who said little for most of the evening.

There was something familiar about him and eventually Bevill recalled that he had seen him only once before. Bevill had observed him in deep conversation with Cromwell and Pym in a corridor of the house. It did not sit well with him that this man was the close aide of the King and that one of his most trusted advisers was also on good terms with the leaders of parliamentarian faction. 

It was Bevill’s opinion that he would not be the best person to confide in at this stage and did not engage the Earl in conversation.

The three men spent the evening discussing a wide range of issues with the King, he was keen to hear more of Bevill’s elite regiment. Bevill enthusiastically explained his recruiting and training schedules but remained guarded as to the strength of his force.

When it came time to leave the King thanked Bevill for his continuing loyalty. Bevill pledged his allegiance to the King and offered his support in any way he could. He was escorted back through the palace and collected his sword on the way. He was returned to his lodgings by the King’s staff. He drank a glass of wine and retired immediately to his bed, his plan was still to be on the road home by the time the sun was up the following morning.

A loud banging on the door woke Bevill with a start, it was still dark but the men were under instructions to wake him before dawn and be ready to travel. He dressed quickly in his travelling clothes and made his way to the stables. His manservant finished off the packing of his clothes and he and the driver loaded the final box from Bevill’s room onto the coach while Bevill oversaw the harnessing and preparation for the journey. His beloved black stallion had spent the last three months being exercised in the parks of London and was in good condition. Bevill had him saddled and hitched to the back of the carriage for the journey back to Cornwall.

The men were in good spirits and laughed and joked with their master. They completed their preparation with speed and efficiency and as the sun came up over the London rooftops the party set off at a steady walk towards the west.

As the streets gave way to more open country the horses were given their heads and cantered along for several miles, the two soldiers, the driver and footman as well as the horses were full of energy and glad to shake off the smells and sounds of the city. Bevill leaned out of the carriage window and ordered the driver to slow the horses, he was as excited as the rest to be on their way home but was well aware that the journey was long, and they would need to look after them, a steady pace was the better way to cover the miles. Bevill called a halt at midday at a roadside Inn. He had a regular route and stopping places where he could get food and loggings for himself and his men. The party ate and drank and watered the horses at the trough in front of the Inn. The afternoon run would be long and they would stop only briefly before they rested for the night. 

By mid-afternoon Bevill was weary of travelling in the carriage and called a halt, he ordered the men to fetch the stallion. He told the men to follow and that he would ride ahead of the party for an hour, he intended to enjoy the freedom of the open countryside. Bevill set off on his own and rode steadily along the trail, occasionally he would give the horse a nudge with his knees and gallop for a mile or more, he arrived on the outskirts of Andover as the sun went down. Bevill stopped at his regular carriage house near the centre of town. It was busy with travellers heading to and from London. His soldiers and staff arrived an hour later and unhitched the horses. They fed and watered all the animals before they went to the Inn for their evening meal after which they returned to the stable. The men would sleep with the horses in the stables while Bevill had his usual room at the back of the house. His manservant put his change of shirt on the bed and Bevill washed his face in a bowl of water already prepared for him, he changed his shirt and put on his jacket before he returned to the main room of the Inn. The landlord had prepared a table near the window where Bevill sat on his own, he ate a good meal of venison and vegetables along with several glasses of the best wine available. The landlord ensured that Bevill’s men enjoyed several tankards of ale and a hearty meal of beef stew in the bar before returning to the stables where they settled down for the night, they were all soon sleeping, everyone was exhausted but happy to have made such good progress.

The men were all up at dawn and ate bread and cheese washed down with ale and cider before hitching the horses for the days run. As the sun came up and warmed the air they were once again ready for a day on the road. They were fortunate that the sky was once again clear and bright but they knew it would be a long, hot and dusty day.

The party followed the same routine as the previous day, stopping for food and water and whenever he chose Bevill rode the stallion ahead. The party arrived at Taunton in the early evening, now they were very tired and spoke little as they stabled and fed the horses before joining Bevill in the staging house. This was a large Inn with several rooms on the ground floor. Bevill arranged for all his men to join him on this occasion for the evening meal. He knew men and how to look after them. They in turn knew that he was the lord of the manor and that obeying his orders was second nature. Added to that the knowledge that he was a hard but fair man, their loyalty to him was without question. He sat with them for a while drinking and eating before retiring to his room, he told them to have their fill of ale but be sure to be ready to travel by sun up.

They awoke at dawn on the third day of the journey home to find that the weather had changed and heavy cloud with light rain had blown in overnight. The horses were reluctant to head out from the comfort of the stable but the men still had the good feeling of heading home. It was another eighty miles to Stratton and the going would be hard if the rain persisted. Bevill had planned to make the rest of the way home in one day but would decide if they should spend another night on the road when they reached Crediton which was about half way. The countryside from Taunton to Crediton was heavily wooded and as the rain became heavier the hard packed clay which made up the road was soon churning up and dangerously slippery under the horse’s hooves. It took them several hours to reach the outskirts of Crediton, longer than Bevill had hoped. He could see that the men and horses were exhausted and decided to rest them after all.  He stopped at an Inn that he had frequented many times and set about making arrangements for them to stay the night. Fortunately the rain had stopped and the weather improved finally turning into a dry warm night. Bevill ate alone on this occasion, spending his time in thoughts of his wife and children and the pleasure he would feel at them all being reunited. He felt the desire to be on his own and told the men to rest well and went to his room. They would leave early in the morning and reach home the following day whatever the weather.

Bevill slept well as most travellers do after a hard day on the road. He woke as the sun came up and felt refreshed, he listened for a moment to the sound of the birds as they began their dawn chorus outside his window. He got up and dressed but he had been lying on his left side and he found that his leg was aching and the ankle throbbed, he decided that the best course of action was to take the stallion and ride off the pain, he told the men of his plan and ordered them to saddle his horse.  He said that he would ride ahead and wait for them after a couple of hours travel. The soldiers were concerned that he should not travel alone but the stern look on his face caused them to keep silent.

With two pistols in his saddle holsters and his fine sword at his side Bevill was confident in his own ability to look after himself and there was no reason to think that he could be in any danger, these were quiet times. He mounted the beautiful black horse and set off, the men to follow him at best speed and he would see them later. With that he mounted the black stallion and urged it into a trot, setting off along the lane for a short distance before he urged the horse into a gallop, the mud flying from the horse’s hooves as it raced along the slowly drying trail.

The weather was now fine and clear and the sun was warm on his back as he headed through the woodland and open fields of Devon. He could see the high rugged granite hills of Dartmoor away to the south and knew he was almost back to his beloved Cornwall. He slowed the horse and after two hours of steady riding he arrived at the market town of Hatherleigh. It was almost midday and the town was quiet. He dismounted and gave the stallion a drink at a roadside trough before walking him slowly through the town, this give the horse time to recover his breath and for Bevill to give his legs some exercise.

Bevill remounted once he had passed through the market square and kneed the horse into a trot; the stallion held its head high and Bevill could not help but marvel at the feeling of power from the great horse beneath him. He thought of his men following and considered whether he should wait for them as he had told them or not, the urge to be home was strong and once again he urged the horse into a gallop this time he gave it its head and the magnificent animal quickly picked up speed, they left the town at a full gallop, the adrenalin ran through Bevill’s body and seemed to be transmitted to the animal under him. He let the horse run for a good half mile before reining him in and allowing him to walk, the stallion was blowing heavily after his exertions.

It was a sunny summer’s day, Bevill was on a wonderful horse and he would soon be home. He could not have felt better. Before he realised it he had arrived at Holsworthy, the last town before Stratton and home. Bevill stopped once more, he was in need of refreshment for himself and water for his horse. He dismounted outside an old staging house and tied the horse to a hitching rail; a young lad came out of the building and offered to water the horse for him. Bevill told him to fetch water but not to take the horse to the well. He did not want the animal to drink so much that it could not travel easily. Bevill sat down on the bench at the wooden table outside the Inn and within moments the landlord came out to greet him.

This was another of Bevill’s regular stopping places on his travels to and from London. The landlord had served Bevill on many occasions and was pleased to see him once more. Bevill ordered his usual meal and sat enjoying the summer sunshine. A jug of wine arrived and before long, fresh bread and a bowl of soup. The landlord and Bevill exchanged pleasantries for a while and Bevill would have remained longer but the pull of home was very strong, he was barely ten miles from his beloved wife and children and his home at Stowe. After an hour he bade farewell to the landlord and mounting the stallion setting off along the road to Stratton. He rode the horse at a steady pace not wishing to wind him this time.

The trees grew close to the road and the foliage was thick enough to hide the sun. It was quiet and peaceful and Bevill relaxed enjoying the solitude. He was passing through a section of the trail where the great trees touched branches across the road; even with the sun high in the sky it was surprisingly dark under the canopy. Bevill knew this area so well and he would soon be at the crossroads where to turn left the road would lead to Launceston and to the right the narrow trail to Kilkhampton. From this crossroads he would soon in fact be on his own land.

A snap of a branch to his right brought him alert and he saw the dark shape of a man step from behind a tree at his side, almost at the same time another leapt into the trail ahead of him. Without hesitation Bevill yelled and kicked the horse’s flanks; it shot forward into a full gallop. The man in front tried to raise his pistol but Bevill was on him before it could be levelled. The stranger dived away to his left and the pistol blasting harmlessly into the trees as the man managed to avoid the horse’s flying hooves. Bevill did not see the rope strung across the trail between two trees until it was too late, it caught him in the chest. The rope tightened from his forward momentum and he came to a sudden stop, the horse shot out from under him. The force from the rope threw Bevill backwards causing him to fly through the air landing heavily on his back, the wind was knocked out of him and his head impacted onto the hard earth knocking him unconscious.

The great stallion galloped on, riderless its speed increased, and it was past two more men who jumped into the lane in an attempt to catch its rein, the stallion thundered down the long hill towards Stratton. It was winded by the time it reached the town and confused as to what to do, it slowed down by the crossroads and as it did so a huge man stepped into its path. Anthony Payne was walking towards his father’s Inn when he heard the sound of the running horse, he moved quickly for such a big man. Waving his outstretched arms he stood his ground in front of the horse. Anthony’s great bulk with his arms outstretched gave the horse little room to pass and it stopped directly in front of him its nostrils blasting hot air as it gasped in great gulps, its skin lathered and quivering it stood still in front of the Cornish giant.

Anthony caught its rein and ran his hand along the horse’s neck which had an almost immediate calming effect. He could not help but recognise the magnificent horse and knew at once that something must have happened to its master.

It was not by chance that he was at the crossroads, Lady Granville had known of her husband’s return for several days and had instructed Anthony to collect the latest mail delivery and at the same time he could wait for her husband and inform him that she would be waiting for him at the great house at Stowe.

Anthony did not expect Lord Grenville to reach Stratton until later in the day and was unaware that Bevill had set off on his own. It was a surprise to see the horse but Anthony had by now developed the sharp mind of a man used to dealing with unexpected situations and quickly considered his options as he led the horse to the Inn and tied it to the hitching rail. He shouted to his father and mother who, hearing the urgency in his voice came running from the building. Several men came out from the Inn in response to the commotion. “It’s Lord Granville’s horse” Anthony shouted as the crowd began to gather around him. He knew he would have to organise a search for Lord Grenville and sent men to all parts to call the workers to him. He remembered the troop of cavalry that were training near the coast to the south of Stratton; if he sent word to them they could be with him within the hour.

 “Henry” he addressed one of the villagers that he knew well, “run down to the Haven and fetch the cavalry, tell the officer that they were to catch up with me on the Holsworthy Road”

He addressed his father. “Get all the men you can father and meet me at the crossroads and get Silas. I will hitch up the wagon”.

It took Anthony a while to gather the two horses and hitch them to the wagon and get it ready for the road, eventually pulling his great bulk up onto the seat. He pulled the reins hard and his strength forced the two horse’s heads around in a sharp turn as he roared at them to move. He left the stable yard at a full gallop. He stopped at the crossroads as four young men came running in response to his father’s orders. Anthony ordered them to get in the wagon and turned back up through the town. “Silas” he called “where the devil are you”. He saw his father coming from around the church with an old man, an old injury meant that he was permanently bent at the waist and could not raise his head, he was also now almost too old to be getting involved in this type of work but he was the greatest tracker that anyone had ever known. “Get in the back Silas” He ordered and the old man was hauled unceremoniously into the back of the wagon by the other men, Anthony dragged the horses heads around again with brute force and set off at a fast pace out of the town scattering men and animals in all directions. He reined them in and made them walk as they reached the foot of the hill, the first two miles out of Stratton was up a long incline and he could not exhaust the horses too soon. When they reached the top of the steep climb he called at them to pick up the pace and the horses pulled hard into a fast trot. They were soon another mile up the road and passing the crossroads to Launceston and Kilkhampton. They kept a sharp lookout for signs of Lord Grenville.

Anthony kept up a steady pace and before they reached Holsworthy they met up with the main party of coach and guards that Bevill had left behind. He told them of the situation and ordered them to keep going on to Stratton. A cloud of dust and the thunder of hooves alerted him to the arrival of the cavalry. Forty horses and heavily armed men came into view and halted close to the wagon. The captain of the troop was Robert Waller, a young man and cousin of Lord Grenville. Although of higher rank than Anthony, Robert respected the giant’s position in the household and knew that he was the driving force behind the rank and file of his cousin’s growing army.

Anthony retold what he knew so far and asked him to form his men into two columns and work their way slowly back towards the Launceston road.

Robert nodded and the cavalry set off back down the trail. They took their time and slowly searched every foot of the way back along the road, it was more than an hour before one of the cavalry soldiers called out. He had found tracks leading off to the right into the heavily wooded forest. Anthony left the carriage at the roadside and several of the troops dismounted, they began searching either side of the tracks. Someone called out that they had found a rope. It had been discarded in a ditch but was still attached to a tree. Anthony had one of the men take it out across the trail. It was just long enough to cross the road and with careful examination of the trees they found marks where it had been tied, this was definitely the spot where the trap had been set. Another shout and a trooper came up with a pistol. The silver markings and carving were well known to Anthony it was one of the pair that Lord Granville had been carrying.

It did not take Anthony and Robert long to piece together the series of events that had taken place. Lord Grenville had been attacked and taken into the woods and they concluded that it was unlikely that they had killed him; they would certainly not carry off a dead man.

 Anthony called to Silas and the old man clambered from the wagon bed. He was sore and stiff from bouncing along in the back of the wagon but did not complain. He knew why he was there. Silas Trannanon was in his day the best hunter and tracker anyone had ever known and although he was now an old man no one was better at following a trail then he. He ordered everyone to remain where they were and paced slowly backwards and forwards while everyone else stood still and watched him at work, they all knew of his ability and did not want to destroy any sign.

After a few minutes he came back to Anthony. He stood in front of him, a bent old man of less than five feet tall, he looking sideways up at Anthony. The giant knelt down until they were eye to eye.

“Seven men, no horses, dragged a body through the trees, don’t think they could have gone too far, have to be quiet”. Silas spoke softly in a mixture of Cornish and English but Anthony understood what he had been told, he had spoken many times to Silas and had got used to the old man’s difficult dialect. He motioned for all the men to be silent. Anthony sorted them into pairs and left the horses with two guards. The soldiers stripped off all their heavy equipment and carried their muskets, pouches of powder along with their pistols and swords. They were all country bred and had spent much of their lives hunting. They set off like a pack of wolves silently spreading out behind the old hunter. Silas travelled slowly checking this way and that, his long grey hair hanging down as he studied every inch for signs. Each time he held up his hand the party stopped instantly, they made no sound. As Silas moved forward everyone in the party moved. They travelled slowly for almost an hour, Silas raised his hand once more and the soldiers froze. They heard voices from up ahead. Laughter and sounds of men talking. Silas waved his hand in the sign that told the soldiers to stay where they were. He went down on his hands and knees and edged forward. Anthony and the whole troop sat down where they were and waited in silence. Silas was gone for several minutes before he reappeared. He moved so silently that even Anthony was taken by surprise when the old man’s face appeared from a bush ahead of him. Speaking quietly and slowly Silas explained what he had seen. His master Lord Grenville was there, the gang had him tied to a tree; they had taken his clothes, boots and sword. The leader of the gang was wearing Bevill’s hat. The gang was too confident and obviously did not expect anyone to be following them. They had a horse and cart which was loaded with several barrels, one of gin along with kegs of beer. They had lit a fire and were preparing a meal and drinking heavily.

Anthony called Robert over and they sat with Silas to decide on what action would be best. It was decided to wait for full darkness. The troop took up their positions and sat down in silence their discipline was a compliment to their training and would see them through the difficult times ahead, although this was not in their thoughts at this time. As darkness fell they watched as the gang began to fall one by one into a drunken sleep around the dying embers of the fire.

The sun was gone behind the trees and as it became increasingly dark, there was no moon this night and Anthony whispered for the men to get ready.

The muskets were discarded and each soldier drew his sword and the sharp knifes that they carried for close combat. The forty plus men closed in silently on the sleeping kidnappers. Anthony was surprised that they had not bothered with a sentry. His main objective was to secure the rescue of Lord Grenville and whispered to Silas to find him. The old man shuffled on his belly around the fire to the far side. Anthony knelt silently alongside one of the sleeping men. In the firelight glow he could see Bevill’s boots and hat. He reached down and caught the sleeping man by the throat lifting him off the ground with one hand. His gurgling cry brought some of the others awake only to find themselves surrounded by the whole troop of soldiers. None of them tried to fight and were dragged roughly to their feet. Anthony ordered wood to be piled on the fire so that they could see more clearly. Silas had closed in immediately and cut Bevill free and tried to lift him to his feet but his master was unable to stand, the pain in his chest and back was intense although he was fully conscious. Robert went to him and with Anthony’s help gently lifted him to his feet. A half smile formed on Bevill’s face as he recognised his cousin and the huge frame of Anthony Payne. Even through his pain he could not help but wonder at his fortune at having this giant on his side.

They roped the seven men together by their necks and settled down by the fire to wait for daylight. They broke open the remaining barrel of ale on the wagon and drank their fill. Morning came early in the forest, the woodland birds calling as the dawn light crept through the trees. The soldiers took the remaining food supplies from the cart and ate a meagre breakfast; they drank the remaining beer before setting off back towards the main road where they had left their horses.

The seven were now a sorry looking bunch and had obviously been living rough in the woods for some time. Anthony questioned the leader and was surprised to discover that they were all deserters from the garrison at Plymouth. Travelling north from the city they had expecting easy pickings from the farmers and peasants of Devon, they had not realised that they had crossed into Cornwall. The cavalry gathered their horses and Bevill was helped onto the cart along with Silas who tried his best to hold his master as steady as he could as the cart bounced along the forest trail as they drove the cart and skilfully guided the horses back through the dense wood where they joined up with the cavalry who were waiting for them where they had been left.

Bevill’s carriage was waiting for him with his staff; they had been concerned about his safety and had not gone on to Stratton as Anthony had told them. They were more than a little pleased to see their master back, if not in good health at least he was alive. The troop of soldiers were in good spirits as they mounted their horses and waited for Bevill to give them instructions. Bevill told his cousin that the troop was to escort him as far as Stratton from there they could return to their training camp. The carriage with the cart and soldiers set off at a steady pace, Bevill was aching all over but made himself as comfortable as he could in the carriage for the hour journey it would take to reach Stratton.

As the horses clattered into the cobbled street of the town the residents came out to meet them. They were all aware of the commotion of the previous day and awaiting news of Lord Grenville.

Grace had travelled to Stratton on being told of her husband’s disappearance and came running from their house as sounds of the horses reached her. The carriage stopped at the Inn and Bevill climbed painfully from it. A cheer went up from the gathered crown as lady Grace flew into his arms. Bevill ordered Anthony and Robert to join him and walked slowly with Grace’s arm around him in through the front door. He ordered drinks and food for the soldiers and wine for himself and Grace. Grace told Anthony Payne to have a barrel made ready for the gathered crowd. This would be a party day.

Bevill sat in a chair with a large cushion at his back. He drank heavily from the large glass of wine and ordered more. The pain in his back was intense, landing from a galloping horse could have been fatal and the rope had caused his buckles to drag across his chest causing painful scratches.

Mrs. Payne brought water and cloths from the kitchen along with goose grease for his burns. She and Grace took off his tunic and shirt and made him lie down on the floor while they examined his injuries. They could see his skin was red and sore, but they found no broken bones. His back was a mass of bruises but the skin was intact. Grace was convinced that her husband had escaped without serious injury. The women helped him dress and get back into the chair and Mrs. Payne went to fetch him her special brew. A mixture of gin and herbs heated with a red-hot poker. The effects of the wine and gin caused Bevill to relax and masked the pain. He fell asleep with his head on Grace’s shoulder.

She decided that this was not the best situation for Bevill and arranged for several men to carry him back to their town house. He continued to sleep as the men manhandled him the few yards up the road and once in the house, she told them to take him to his bed where she and her servants made him comfortable. Once the Grenville’s were settled the rest of the town were able to relax and return to their houses where they would settle down for the night. The seven prisoners were strung up to the beams of the stable behind the Inn. Anthony arranged a heavy guard of six soldiers for the men; the townsfolk were in a mind to hang them in the marketplace but he could not allow this to happen.

The back injury was worse than Bevill had thought and it took almost two weeks before he was able to walk unaided. After a week they had moved him back to Stowe but Grace insisted that he remain in his room. The servants massaged his back and attended to his every need but he was frustrated and shouted at the staff more than usual. He received several letters from his friends in London and spent much of his time replying to them and planning various ventures. He sent out a series of instructions to his staff and the soldiers. Letters were dispatched to his friends in parliament, and he wrote to the governor of the garrison at Plymouth. He gave Captain Robert Waller the letter and ordered him to take an escort to Plymouth with the prisoners. He was well aware that as deserters they would be given the punishment they deserved and it was better that the governor should oversee their sentencing. 

There was much for him to do and he had little time to worry about their fate, he concentrated on the letters he had received from London. He was informed that the King continued to ignore parliament insisting that he had the divine right to govern, and parliament should comply with his demands.  This caused problems for Bevill, his loyalty to the King was without question but he was also a dedicated member of parliament.

It was now nearing the end of the year of 1637 and as winter came to North Cornwall the soldiers continued to train for war. Bevill insisted that they form into a regiment with equipment and skills to match any he had ever seen, he did not look forward to war but some instinct forced him on with his preparations. He continued to recruit and have the foot soldiers train in defence tactics with his troop of pike and musket soldiers.

They practised fighting each other with swords and in the art of hand to hand combat.  The cost was considerable but by deploying the soldiers and their families to work the land, growing crops and collecting wood, as well as hunting and gathering food, he was able to offset a large amount of the running costs. He was a good landlord and took care of his farmers who in turn gave him a good return on his investments in the form of food and supplies of all kinds.

 Flurries of snow and bad weather came early to North Cornwall and Bevill instructed everyone to work together to store the food and supplies necessary to sustain what had become by now a small town. Almost 400 people lived and worked on his estate and surrounding farms.

The town of Stratton was thriving because of the constant demands of the Grenville estate. Supplies were brought in from far and wide, the harvest had been a good one and it was a time of plenty for most.

Daniel had not heard from his sister Rachael for several months and neither he nor Will had been back to Redruth since they had left Rachael with her mother in the care of Will’s family. They decided to ask Bevill if they could have time to travel to Redruth before the winter set in.

They hung around the big house until he came out. Bevill listened to their request and said he would speak to Grace and let them know his decision.  He discussed their request with his wife over dinner and she thought it a fine idea. She suggested that they could take a letter to her mother in Bodmin on the way and bring a reply when they returned. She also thought that they should take a week and spend time with their families. Bevill agreed and he decided that so that the journey was not completely wasted they could take the opportunity to look for horses on the way. He never seemed to have enough good horses for his ever-expanding regiment.

He was now riding well and the pain in his back had gone although the leg that he had broken several years earlier still ached from time to time.

He decided to get Daniel and Will on their way as soon as possible and early the following morning he sent one of the servants to have his horse saddled and brought to the front of the house. As soon as it arrived he set off to find them. They were not at the barracks but one of the soldiers told him that they had gone fishing. Bevill was intrigued by the idea of these two big fighting men fishing and set off in search of them. There was only one place close to the house that it would be possible to catch fish from and that was in the lake in the valley where the little river flowed into the sea.

 He could see the coast from the house which was no more than a mile away. The hills fell away through a deep heavily wooded valley, and from the estate the coast was difficult to reach. He rode down the hill towards the stream and the valley. He could hear it before he could see it, and although it was little more than a couple of yards across the stream flowed quickly and noisily into a little natural lake where the water overflowed the natural dam before it trickled across the rocky beach to the sea.

 The horse pushed its way through the thick vegetation to emerge at this corner of the lake, a place Bevill had not visited for many years. The cliffs rose shear for more than two hundred feet on either side of the little valley before opening out at the sea onto a wide swathe of pebble and rocks which formed the beach.

 He stopped the horse and looked across the narrow valley, this was indeed a beautiful place and now the silence was intense. Not a rustle or bird call, just the gentle trickle of the water. He edged the horse forward and came into the clearing. Two horses on the far side of the lake lifted their heads as he approached, they took no notice of him and they were not tethered, they were free to wander around the clearing gorging themselves on the lush grass. Ahead of him the sea had pushed the pebbles into a huge pile which formed the dam behind which the lake of fresh water had formed from the flow of the stream. It was an ideal watering place for the wildlife that abounded on his estate. He would wager that not a dozen people alive knew of this place.

 A stone-built cottage, long deserted, had been built into the hillside but there were no other buildings in the valley.  No one had lived here for as long as he could remember. He caught sight of Daniel and Will who were absorbed in their attempts to catch fish from the rocky shore. Daniel had fished before on the banks of the river Fal where he had spent his boyhood but Will had never been fishing and did not have a clue. He watched intently at Daniel’s efforts. He had cut a wooden pole and attached a length of string on the end of which was a bent hook. Although they could see the fish close into the shore they had had no success in catching any, it would appear that the fish off this coast were not the same as the ones in the Fal estuary.

A snort from one of the horses caused them to look up and the two men saw a rider approaching, they recognized Lord Grenville as he came close to them, they were concerned that he would disapprove of their activities, and they looked sheepish as he dismounted. Bevill walked the horse around the lake to where they stood, he continuing to take in the beauty of the place. Even though it was late in the year the valley was protected on three sides from the weather in the afternoon sun it was pleasantly warm. He found it hard to imagine a more peaceful almost magical place. 

Bevill stopped at the shoreline close to where Daniel and Will were fishing and they quickly clambered up the pebbles to meet him. They explained that they had come across the valley by accident and came here to relax and enjoy their leisure time away from the barracks. They told him that had repaired the cottage roof to keep out the rain so that they could stay overnight. They explained that they had spent many hours sitting around a fire made from driftwood on summer evenings. Bevill listened to their ramblings, in a way he envied them their simple pleasures.

He told them of his decision to allow them to make the journey to Redruth and said that they should make haste. They were delighted and set off to gather and saddle their horses before heading back to the barracks. Bevill watched them go on ahead and remained sitting on his horse by the lakeside, he enjoying the solitude of the moment. A small herd of deer broke cover a few yards from him only to dash back into the cover of the trees on catching sight of him. It broke the magic of the moment and Bevill kneed the horse into a slow walk following his men back up the hill towards Stowe. 

Daniel and Will were up and ready before dawn and left at first light the following morning, they carried with them the letters for Bevill’s father and a pouch of silver coin to purchase horses. Bevill left the decision on what to buy and how much to pay to the two men he knew they would do well for him.

When they were gone he sat down in his study to reply to the letters that had arrived in the mail.

One letter was from Ralph Hopton in which he enquired as to how Bevill was progressing with his regiment, a matter they had discussed at their last meeting. He had also received a letter from Nicholas Slanning an old friend who had estates near the city of Plymouth. Nicholas was engaged in raising a regiment of foot soldiers. They had similar concerns both agreeing that the defence of Cornwall would be in their hands should matters between the King and Parliament disintegrate further.

He read through the letters again and spent most of the day writing replies. He sent a letter to Nicholas Slanning asking him if he would meet him at his father’s estate near Bodmin where they could spend time together. He suggested the following week before the weather made travel too difficult. He told Grace of his plan and she liked the idea as she would take the opportunity to accompany him and take the grandchildren to visit their grandparents.

Once the decision was made Bevill wrote another letter to his father telling him of his planned visit. Bevill had long since realized the importance of good communications and it had been agreed by the various Cornish noblemen to establish a secret post service whereby dispatch riders would travel across the county keeping the military leaders informed of all matters. The normal weekly post service was continued and used for everyday post so as not to bring attention to the secret service. For the past three years this secret delivery service had grown and was working well. The letter to his father would normally take the best part of three to five days, sending them with the dispatch riders would ensure it could be there within a day of dispatch.

By travelling light Daniel and Will made good time covering the forty miles from Stratton to Bodmin and delivered the letter to Bevill’s father. The old man was pleased to receive the letter and offered them food and ale.  They thanked him but did not delay longer than to water the horses and partake of a light meal in the kitchen of the great manor. Setting off again they covered the last ten miles to Wadebridge in little over an hour.

Night came early in winter but they arrived at the Inn on the outskirts of town that they had visited previously just as darkness fell and tethered their horses outside the stable. The landlord remembered them and made them welcome; he was pleased to have guests at this time of year. It was quite when they arrived; no one else was staying at the Inn that night. The landlord had a great log fire burning in the main room which allowed the heat to rise up through the house warming the whole building. They had chosen to stop at Wadebridge because it was a well know centre for horse trading and this was sure to be the place to pick up some good animals, the regiment still needed horses that could carry the weight of the heavily armed soldiers.

The landlord arranged for their horses to be fed and looked after in the stables by his son while his wife made the pair a good meal of thick mutton and vegetable soup, they rested and drank their fill of ale. The Inn remained empty apart from the two men and they sat and chatted into the evening before retiring to their room.

The crowing of a cockerel brought them both out of a deep sleep. They pulled on their boots and heavy coats before heading down to the main room. They greeted the landlord who was busy stoking the fire back into life. It was nearing Christmas and the days were at their shortest, the sky was heavy with the threat of snow in the air. Daniel and Will saw that the horses had been well looked after and they gave them a brisk rub with straw before saddling them. Daniel returned to the Inn and paid the landlord for the room and food and told him that they would return later. Will was waiting outside with the horses saddled; they hauled themselves on their mounts and rode slowly into town. It was early, barely light and a light frost covered the ground.

They spent the day wandering around the various stables and yards where dealers from the surrounding area came to sell their horses. Will had his eye on a number of heavy horses that one dealer had for sale. He was an old farmer and obviously enjoyed his days at the market. If he could sell the horses he would have money enough for a good day in the town’s Inns before heading home. They haggled over the price for a long while but as Will was prepared to buy five of them the old man came to an agreement on a fair price. Daniel paid in silver and they strung the horses together and led them back out of town to the Inn where they had stayed the night.

As the landlord had little income at this time of year he was happy to agree a price for looking  after the horses while Daniel and Will went on to Redruth. It was already getting dark so they decided to stay a further night rather than risk travelling twenty miles in the dark and cold.

The cockerel woke them again early the following morning, it was still dark when they got up and pulled on their boots, the faint glow in the sky gave a hint of sunshine and they both hoped that the weather would improve. It was still bitterly cold when they set off and they pulled the collars of their thick coats up around their faces, fortunately after an hour the sun began to burn off the cloud and the temperature rose considerably, at last they felt more comfortable and made better time.

The road to Redruth from Wadebridge wound its way through villages and woodland. They saw few people on road and made good time, it was midday when they eventually saw the little town in the valley that was Will’s home. They walked their horse into the main street and pulled up outside the Will’s family blacksmith shop. Will yelled at the blacksmith to attract his attention. The blacksmith who was hammering a piece of hot metal on his anvil and not best pleased to be interrupted. Will’s father was not expecting his son and when the rider called his name he came away from the furnace, his frown turned to a beaming smile when he realized who it was.

Will and Daniel dismounted and Will and his father wrapped their arms around each other in a strong embrace, Jake turned from his son and slapped Daniel on the back “it’s good to see you lads; we have had little news of late”.

Will’s mother came hurrying out of the house, attracted by the loud voices. She howled with delight and hugged her son and Daniel as if he were her own. “It is so good to see you both, you look so grown up” Will and Daniel laughed with her. They were no longer the wild young men who had left home now they were hard and tough men with their trimmed beards and long hair. A young woman came from the house and ran up to Daniel. Will did not recognize her at first but as she flung her arms around Daniel, Will realised who she was, it was Daniel’s sister Rachael, The young woman turned and came over to Will she smiled and put her arms around him giving him a tight hug. Will was stuck for anything to say, the girl they had left at his father’s house was thin and scrawny with scruffy clothes and the haggard look of an older woman.  This young woman was striking to behold, she had filled out with firm breasts and a healthy glow to her face. Living at Redruth had been good to her and she had become a fine looking woman. Will realized that he was staring and her and his face blushed red. His mother laughed again at his reaction.

Daniel asked how his mother was and his Rachael said nothing but took his arm and led him into the house. An old lady was sitting near the log fire in a large chair. She looked up as the pair entered the room and Daniel was amazed to see her. She had also benefited from living with Will’s family and had put on weight, she had recovered to such an extent that Daniel could barely recognise the woman as same person he had left at the house.

The old lady recognized him as he approached. “Oh Daniel, I never thought I would ever set eyes on you again” “come close” She got unsteadily to her feet, her legs had never recovered from her long illness but she could get around slowly with the aid of a stout stick. He put his arms around her and held her to him, it was so good that she had survived. He sat with her for a while holding her hand and answering her many questions. Rachael left them to it and went into the kitchen where Will was talking excitedly to his mother and at the same time eating meat from a huge leg of lamb.

He had forgotten what home cooking had been like this last two years. He smiled at Rachael and she found herself looking too closely at him. He was a ruggedly handsome man with long shaggy hair and a thin scar on his cheek where the hair did not grow. He had big shoulders like her brother and when he smiled at her there was still the boyish twinkle in his eyes. Her heart pounded in her chest and she had to look away from him.

He was more than aware of her gaze and he felt most uncomfortable. He made an excuse to go and help his father who was finishing his work at the forge before the darkness of the night set in.

Will’s mother looked at Rachael who in turn felt her face turning red. She spun on her heals and dashed out of the room. Will’s mother stood grinning to herself as she worked away on the evening meal she was thinking to herself how she had felt when she first met her husband, she remembered it well she had been much the same age as Rachael. 

Daniel and Will spent a pleasant couple of days relaxing with the family. Rachael and Will spent every spare moment together but eventually the two men had to return to Stowe and made arrangements to leave on the third day promising to return in the spring.

The westerly winds blew in from the coast everything was wet and cold. The weather was taking a turn for the worse and was getting steadily colder. There was snow in the air, it was close to the end of the year and this area could be buried in snow for weeks if the wind direction changed to the north.

On the morning Daniel and Will set off it was cold but dry and they thought they could make good time to Wadebridge and collect the horses. They said their farewell to Will’s mother and father but Rachael could not speak she was too upset to see her brother leave but everyone in the family knew it was not Daniel but Will she did not want to see leave.

Will was very quiet and thoughtful. Daniel did not tease him on this occasion; he could tell that Will was smitten with his sister and her with him. During the visit they had been almost inseparable and Daniel was pleased, he could wish for no one better to look after his sister. If that was the way it was to be.

They rode steadily without speaking and it did not take them long before they arrived at Wadebridge to collect the horses. They settled the bill with the landlord and left, they intended to get to Bodmin as quickly as possible it was not their wish to be out in the open when darkness came in. The horses were strung out in line behind them. It was an unpleasant journey and they spoke little, they made the minimum of stops and skirted the high ground of Bodmin moor as the weather changed once more, squalls of snow began to sweep across the hills and blew into their eyes blurring their vision. The ten miles took them half a day with the trail gradually disappearing under the snow. They were frozen by the time they got back to Lord Grenville’s estate at Bodmin and they know they could not make the forty miles back to Stowe in this weather before it became too dark to see.

They went up to the manor house and asked that the staff tell the Lord that they were back. Lord Grenville sent word that they could stay the night at the servant’s quarters and they were pleased to accept his offer, they were told to go to the kitchen and were given all the food they could eat and several tankards of ale.

They were given a room above the stable and they rubbed down the horses with dry hay and got the stable lads to feed and water them before they sat around the fire in the room where the servants lived, they chatting to the staff from the big house who were keen to hear all the news the men had to tell. It was late when they decided to go to bed and get some sleep.

The storm blew through the night and when they got up in the morning the landscape was totally different with the whole countryside covered in deep snow. Before they left they went to the house to collect the letters that they knew had to be taken back to Stowe. A servant gave Daniel a wallet of letters and the two men climbed into the saddle and leading the string of horses set off through the deep snow towards the north. They were glad that they knew many of the landmarks that would show them the way to Launceston and eventually to Stratton. This was not a good day for travelling but with all the spare horses that they had with them they knew they could change mounts at regular intervals and were sure they could make it back to Stowe in a day. They decided that they would head for the lower ground and hope that the snow was not as deep in the valleys, there was little sign of the road and every step was taken cautiously by their horses.

They made slow progress keeping as best they could to where they knew the trail should be but all sign of it often disappeared. Launceston castle stood out on the horizon and acted like a beacon standing as it did on the hill which was the highest point of the town. They arrived at Launceston around midday. They made a short stop but knowing it was still a long journey to Stratton they could not afford to rest for too long. The snow continued in flurries through the day hiding the road in places with ever deepening drifts. It turned out to be a long cold day and by the time they reached Stratton night was once again falling, the two men were frozen and exhausted, they decided that it would be impossible to go any further even though it was no more than four miles to Stowe. The town was mostly in darkness when they called at the Inn of David Payne.

They pushed their way into the Inn through the heavy wooden door, scattering snow from their clothes as they entered. David was in the main room serving drinks to two men who were the only customers. He looked up as they came in and onne he had recognised them he greeted them like old friends and seeing how frozen they were pushed the two customers out of the way and made them space in front of the fire, he organised his servants to stable all the horses for the night. The horses were caked in ice and it would take some time to make them comfortable. Daniel and Will knew that they would be well looked after.  Everyone was pleased to be inside and they stood for a long while close to the huge log fire that David kept burning night and day throughout the winter months.

They were given hot food and strong drink and were soon relaxing, they pulled up chairs and sat in front of the fire with David and his wife who was keen to hear of their journey. Eventually after a couple of hours drinking fatigue took over and they decided to go to bed. They slept soundly in the warm room, so much so that the pair were reluctant to get out of bed the following morning their backsides were sore and legs still stiff from the hard ride through the snow. They made the effort knowing it was only a few miles back to Stowe.

The sun came out and the sky was clear it was an altogether better day. Their spirits were lifted and they prepared the horses in the stable.

They said their farewell to David and his wife and set off out of Stratton and onto the trail to Stowe. The snow was a foot deep but with the improving visibility it took them no more than a couple of hours before they came in sight of the manor. They stopped at the top of the hill above the house and looked across the valley. They wondered at the beauty and tranquillity of the sight before them and neither could imagine a more glorious view. The heavily wooded valley with the great house of Stowe covered in snow and beyond it the grey heavy cloud which covered the sky as far as they could see out over the ocean where the water appeared flat calm in the still air. Curls of smoke came from the chimneys of the house drifting slowly up into the clear sky; it was an inviting sight for the travellers.

They made their way down to the stables and made sure the horses were looked after before reporting to Lord Grenville at the manor house.

Chapter 10 The year 1638

The year of 1637 ended with significant amounts of snow fall, the freezing weather continued through January and February of 1638. There was no movement out of the estate and the Grenvilles and workers that lived at Stowe as well as the single soldiers billeted near the big house had been virtually cut off from the outside world for weeks. It was a difficult time but they survived by using their stocks of food and supplies they had laid by in the autumn.

Feeding the farm animals and ensuring that the horses were kept in good condition, cutting and dragging an endless supply of firewood through the snow meant that the men were never idle. The surrounding forest supplied a plentiful amount of wood but once they had used the stockpile in the store and yard the logs had to be dragged in from the hillside using the horses and strong rope, once inside the compound it could cut into usable size logs. The men hitched the big horses and trudged with them through the snow day after day. Bevill ordered everyone to work together and send riders out to the farms and groups of houses that were spread across the countryside and made up the vast Grenville estates. He ensured that all the families were looked after as far as food and firewood were concerned.

Daniel and Will kept themselves busy but by mid-January they found that as they lived in the barracks and training had been suspended until the better weather they had time on their hands. Will suggested that they go down to the secret valley and check on their cottage by the sea. The two men saddled their horses and rode slowly through the knee deep snow which had blown across the valley and by now had levelled the landscape filling all the ditches so that there was no sign of the trail.

Once they reached the steep downward slope they dismounted and led the horses which stumbled and complained loudly as they found it difficult to keep on their feet. The men followed the little stream down the hill until they arrived at the clearing where the stream fed the small lake and trickled on across the pebble beach to the sea.

This time the lake was frozen and the snow had been blown by the winds until it formed high banks against the tree line causing it to look somehow different from what they remembered.

The pair mounted their horses and circled the lake to the cottage. They had not been here for more than six weeks from when they had begun work on restoring the cottage. They had spent their time between their duties repairing the roof and attempting to make it weatherproof but it had not sustained the onslaught of the wind and bad weather and the building was now full of the driven snow. They cleared the powdery snow from the door and pushed inside. The main room was deep in snow and they could see the sky through the roof. It was bitterly cold, but they set to work. While Will cleared the snow Daniel collected wood from the lean-too at the back of the cottage. They spent half a day clearing the room and attempting to repair the roof once again. The person or people that had built the cottage must have known what they were doing as the building was set back far enough into the hill to be sheltered from the worst of the westerly winds. It was constructed of solid rocks which were in plentiful supply in the area. The roof was made from solid wooden beams with heavy slates layered down either side forming the roof. The slates had been neatly cut to size and each fitted the one above so snugly that it formed a covering that was almost waterproof. Some form of mortar had been used to finish the work and create a seal that could withstand the strongest winds and the driving rain.

The entrance was on the south facing side and opened into one main room. There was one small window and against the far wall was an alcove with an iron stove that stood in the fireplace where a large stone chimney that went up through the building and through a gap in the tiles. A flight of wooden stairs led up through a square hole in the ceiling into a tiny bedroom under the roof a partition separated it from a second tiny room. The chimney had been cleverly constructed so that it came through the centre of the partition wall providing heat to both rooms.

Several of the heavy slates had fallen through into the bedroom which in turn had fallen through the floor and into the room below. The men knew that they would need help in replacing the tiles a task that would have to wait.     Try as he might Daniel could not get his flint to ignite the small strips of wood that he had managed to gather, they had not brought with them the fine dry twigs and bark shavings that they normally used to make a fire and the flints would not spark enough to get the damp wood burning. When they had done all that could be done they sat outside in the winter sun and enjoyed several minutes taking in the natural beauty that was all around them.

The gulls watched them from their nests high on the cliffs and launched themselves into long swooping flights over their heads. The sea on this day was calm but still the waves crashed and rolled the rocks over each other creating a rumble that echoed off the high cliffs. The sun had burnt the mist back out to the horizon, and they scanned the sea for the sight of sailing ships but on this occasion there were none. Daniel took in the view to the south where the snow covered the cliff tops and the woodland, the trees stood white and still under the weight of the snow he could see no movement as his eyes scanned back across the lake and the high hills that surrounded them on three sides.

They did not speak for a while until eventually Will said that he thought this was a good place to live and bring up a family. Daniel knew Will well enough to know that he was thinking of himself and Rachael.

Will had talked of little else but Daniel’s little sister since their return from Redruth. They discussed the possibilities of making the cottage habitable and bringing Daniel’s mother and sister to this place. Daniel knew that his sister would like this amazing, secluded place. She had grown up by the sea and he believed she would fall in love with it. There were problems however this valley was part of Lord Grenville’s estate and they would have to seek approval to live here as well as making it liveable and of course Will would have to go and ask Rachael to come back with him.

The watery sun began to set like a huge golden ball on the horizon, they knew it was time to go back to Stowe, without the fire they could not stay and soon it would be dark and too dangerous to make their way through the deep snow back up the hill. The following day the weather closed in and there was another fall of snow.

On the morning following yet another heavy snowfall Bevill Grenville was in a foul mood, he called for Will and Daniel and ordered them to go to Stratton and see if any mail had come through and to find out if the road to Holsworthy was passable. They got the horses saddled and wrapped their scarves around their faces, they pulled their hats down tightly on their heads before they set off into the swirling snow. Neither they nor the horses wanted to go but they knew better than to argue with Lord Grenville. It took them most of the morning to cover the four miles, the snow blanketed the trail and they had to use all their horsemanship to keep the horses going. The town was quiet and the streets were empty of people, the snow deep and crisp except for where people had shovelled it from their doorways to get out.

They did not stable the horses but left them outside the Inn, they had no plan to stay longer than necessary. David Payne was stoking the fire in the main room as they entered. The logs crackled and sparks flew into the chimney and up through the roof. He greeted them once again like the old friends they had become and called to his wife to get refreshments. They explained the reason for the visit and David confirmed what they suspected. No-one had managed to get through to Holsworthy or Launceston and there was no mail for Lord Grenville. They ate the hot broth that Mrs. Payne brought for them and thanked them for their hospitality before leaving for the return journey to Stowe. The days were short and the road difficult enough in the day. They did not want to be travelling after dark.

They followed their tracks back through the snow and arrived at Stowe as the hazy sun began to dip below the horizon. They reported to Bevill in the big house. He was waiting for them and ushered them into the entrance hall. He had been expecting to hear the news that they brought but it did nothing to improve his mood. He thanked them and sent them away. He had no choice now but to wait for the weather to improve.

It was another two weeks before the prevailing winds swung around to the west bringing warm wet air from the sea. A sudden thaw began and within a day the snow had turned to slush and as people began to move around the roads and tracks became churned into deep mud.

It was fortunate that there was no more snow or rain and after three days the roads began to dry out and as conditions improved the whole community was transformed and almost everyone along with all the animals were affected by the coming of spring.

The early flowers burst into life and all around the estate the effects of the end of the long freeze could be seen as the activities of men and animals so long held in suspension began. Carpenters, builders, farmers and blacksmiths could now get back to work. The soldiers were put to work on all manner of tasks; from now on no one would be idle. Bevill was a new man bursting with energy.  Riders were dispatched to all corners of the estates. Bevill wanted first-hand information on everyone, all the families would be contacted and he insisted on a report on the state of all his property. He dispatched riders with letters to his father and Lord Hopton and had men seek out the mail that he knew was on route to him.

Daniel and Will enquired at the house as to their lordships whereabouts and were told that he was out riding; they knew where he would be and galloped across the hill towards the coast. They caught up with him as he took his regular morning ride along the cliff trail. Bevill was surprised to see them but listened to what they had to say. Daniel asked for permission to bring his sick mother and sister from Redruth and for them to live in the cottage in the valley by the sea. Bevill could think of no reason why he should not let Daniel have the use of the cottage, it would be of little consequence to him. With the improved well-being of everyone on the estate he was in the best of moods and told Daniel that he had no objection to the idea.

Elated by Lord Grenville’s decision the two men set off down the hill towards the cottage, they decided on the equipment they would need to complete the repairs and returned to Stowe. They organised a cart and horse and loaded a variety of tools and building materials. They talked an elderly carpenter and one of the stonemasons to come and assist them. The trail was still muddy and treacherous under the trees and the cart slid and skidded down the hillside but eventually they made it to the lake which was thawing and overflowing with icy fresh water which poured off the hills. 

Spring was in the air here also and as they emerged from the trees the slight noise they made caused a herd of deer to stampede across the open field to the cover of the trees. They were amazed at the number of deer in the valley and the abundance of other wildlife that had somehow survived the winter. Rabbits, hares and a numerous variety of birds scattered as they approached. They spent the next few days at the cottage working to put the building into a liveable habitat. The old carpenter helped them replace the beams in the roof and showed them how to make the door fit, they returned several times to the big house bringing back with them old windows and frames which had been discarded following building work on the main house. The carpenter cut them down to size and made them fit, they would be ideal in keeping out the wind and rain. Between them they managed to manhandle the slates back up onto the roof and the stonemason managed to wedge them into place so that they were as solid as they were originally.

Daniel and Will did not know it but the old carpenter was also a good trapper and owned a ferocious little terrier which he brought with him. The animal took a dislike to Will and kept trying to bite his ankles at every opportunity. In the end Will lost his patience and gave it a boot, it flew through the air and landed in the stream, it got up and shook the water off. It might not have been the kindest thing for Will to do but it did the trick and the dog didn’t bother him again instead it headed off to its master with its tail between its legs. The carpenter and the dog were a good combination and between them they soon caught several rabbits. Daniel had no trouble getting the fire lit this time as he had brought a good supply of the kindling shavings.  Each evening the men enjoyed a fine meal of rabbit stew cooked on the stove that they had managed to repair and get working in the fireplace.

They slept the night on the straw that they had brought and worked all each day on the restoration. Will and Daniel dug out a space at the rear of the cottage and with the stonemason’s supervision constructed a stone wall. The carpenter built a simple roof and covered it with a canvas tarpaulin which he strapped down with strong pieces of rope. This would form a shelter for the horses and other animals during the bad weather.  They were surprised that it did not take as long as they thought it might and by midday of the third day they all agreed that the cottage was ready for occupation.

The men returned home to Stowe and reported to Lord Grenville that they had completed the work. During their absence Bevill had been talking to Grace and she had decided that once again she wanted to go and visit her mother and father. Bevill had agreed and when Daniel and Will reported back to him that the work was complete they were instructed to take his wife and family with them to Bodmin before proceeding to Redruth, they were then to return to Bodmin and collect supplies that he had stored there.

This time it took Grace a day to get herself organised for the trip. The children were running everywhere, her eldest daughter Elizabeth was twelve years old now and quickly becoming a young woman, at this moment she could not decide on what to wear or what to take and pestered her mother constantly. The youngest daughter named Grace after her mother was so excited it had been a long and boring winter and with spring arriving at last the prospect of a trip to Bodmin changed the mood of everyone.

It was agreed that they should leave early the following morning and the carriage with it four horses and a four-man guard were to travel along with Will and Daniel. The carriage with its drive and escort along were ready and waiting outside the big house as the sun came up over the hills.

Grace took her maid with her as well as the nanny to look after the three children. The children found their seats as the servants loaded half a dozen large trunks onto the rear of coach. Bevill hugged his wife and the children before waving them off.

The weather was fine and sunny and they set off in good spirits, the track to Stratton was still soft and the carriage cut deep ruts in the mud. Even with four horses the driver struggled to make any speed. The horses laboured along the trail into the town. They did not stop as they had more than thirty miles ahead of them and they suspected that the road would be difficult. It would be more uncomfortable for the people in the carriage as the riders could walk their horses alongside the track away from the mud whereas the carriage driver had no choice but to stay in the ruts already made by dozens of carts and horses that had previously passed this way. The long climb out of Stratton was exhausting for the horses and they were glad to be on the lever road at last. After twenty miles they reached Launceston where they rested for an hour at a roadside Inn before setting off again for Bodmin, eventually they arrived at the Grenville home, the great manor house at Withiel. The children were tired and sore from being bounced around in the carriage for so long but were soon in good spirits when they met their grandfather and grandmother. They were always made a fuss of whenever the Grand parents had the chance and the staff at the house spent much of their time pandering to the children’s wishes.

Will and Daniel were given a meal and spent the evening chatting to Sir Bernard, who was interested in all they had to tell him. The letter from his son Bevill was full of information on the state of Parliament and the poor relationship that was developing with the King.

The men slept well and were up at first light. They saddled their horses and left as soon as possible and without the carriage to worry about they made good time. On this occasion they did not stop at Wadebridge but continued as fast as they could for Redruth. They made good progress and they reached the town soon after noon. They passed through the town and in quick time got to Will’s home. The clatter of their horse’s hooves brought Will’s mother to the door and her cry of delight at seeing them brought Rachael running from the house. The two men dismounted. Rachael launched herself into Will’s arms and the big man lifted her into a tight hug.

His mother smiled in delight at Rachael and her son’s obvious affection for each other. Dan greeted her and she gave him a big hug before she took his arm and led him into the house, at the same time her husband appeared from the stables. Will broke off his embrace with Rachael and gave his father a big hug. Jake grabbed his son by the shoulders and shook him with true affection and enjoyment at seeing his son again. He told them to go into the house while he took care of the horses. Will and Rachael joined Dan and Will’s mother in the kitchen.

An old woman came into the room and Daniel was delighted as he recognised his mother, she smiled and he bent down and put his huge arms around the tiny frame, he could feel her frailness and was fearful of crushing her.

Will lost no time in explaining his plan to his family and Rachael’s face lit up with delight at the prospect of her own home and having her brother and of course, Will close by. His mother said she would be sad to see Rachael leave as she had become like a daughter to her but to see her and her son happy was compensation enough.

Dan told them that they had little time and they would have to leave within two days.

Everyone joined in fixing up the old cart that they had left in the yard from when they had brought Daniels family to stay. Jake said there was a wheel that needed fixing and set about the task. The cart would be plenty big enough to take the old lady and their few meagre possessions. Will’s father still had the old mare that they had left with him but she was getting old and he told them that she might not be up to the journey. Will checked over the old horse and decided that it would be up to the journey if they did not push her too hard.

The group spent much of the time they had together talking and laughing. Will’s father took the men to his local Inn which was close to the blacksmiths shop and they drank several jugs of ale and swapped stories of their adventures before staggering back up the road to the smithy in the late evening. 

It seemed no time at all before they had to say farewell. Rachael and Daniel helped lift their mother onto the seat and Rachael climbed up beside her and took the reins. She was not used to controlling the horse which was reluctant to set off but a slap from Will’s father got it moving. They waved goodbye to their family who stood in the road until the cart disappeared around the bend at the end of the village.  The two men rode behind the cart to avoid kicking up the dust into the women’s faces and they walked the old horse slowly towards Wadebridge.

The weather was fine with a fresh wind from the west. They made good time but made several stops to make sure that their mother was not too uncomfortable. The ruts in the track caused the cart to sway and bounce and it was tiring for Rachael as she attempted to guide the horse and avoid the worse of them.

As they approached Wadebridge it was clear that the old lady was suffering and although she did not complain Rachael could tell that she was exhausted and asked Will if they could rest for the night. Dan rode on ahead to find a suitable lodging and it was not long before he returned. He had found a quiet Inn close to the town and they were soon lifting the old lady from the cart, she could walk with help from Rachael who took her into the Inn while Dan and Will unhitched the mare and unsaddled their horses. The stable lad came from the Inn and said he would rub down their horses and water them, the men left him and went into the Inn. Rachael had taken her mother to her room and Will ordered ale and food from the Innkeepers wife, a short fat woman with a good nature who was happy to look after their needs. There were few travellers at this time of year and they were glad of the business.

Rachael asked for a warm drink of broth for her mother and the Inn keeper’s wife made up a plate of cheese and fresh baked bread although Rachael doubted that her mother would eat much of it.

They retired early to bed intending to make an early start in the morning. Will and Dan were up at dawn and soon had the horses ready for the journey. They decided to make the seat on the cart more comfortable for the women and filled two sacks with straw. They put them on the seat and covered them in spare saddle blankets. Rachael’s mother said she was stiff and her back was sore but they could tell she was in good spirits by the time they set of for the last leg of the journey.

The weather was getting better and the road was getting firmer from the effects of the sunshine and a drying wind. They made good time and reached Stratton in the afternoon. Dan wanted to stop off at the Paine’s Inn and give the women a chance to meet up with their friends, but Will insisted they press on the cottage or it would be a difficult journey down the valley with the cart in the dark. Mrs. Payne was outside the Inn as they came through and Rachael reined in the horse. Will explained what they were planning to do but Mrs. Payne took one look at the haggard look on the old lady’s face and insisted that they go no further. She ignored Will and helped Dan’s mother off the cart seat. She was unsteady on her feet but with Mrs. Payne’s strong arms around her she was soon in the family living room with large fire and comfortable furniture.

Dan introduced Rachael to Mrs. Payne who gave the girl a big hug and soon they were chatting away like old friends. Dan knew they would be well looked after but he knew that they had been away from Stowe longer than intended. The two men said they would have to leave them at the Inn but would return the next morning and set off at good speed to report back to Lord Grenville. Without the cart to slow them they were arrived at the big house within the hour and went directly to find him. They were informed that he was busy with guests so they left a message and went off to see to the horses and food for themselves.

After dinner the two men sat and talked with their friends in the barracks but eventually decided to get good night’s sleep and went to their beds early.

They got up with the first of the daylight and went to get breakfast. They got on well with the cook who was already busy preparing food. He was a noisy man who shouted at the servants and cursed them constantly. He was short with a large belly; his arms were unusually thick.   He cooked for the twenty or so men who lived in the barracks and they were always hungry, his work was never done which they concluded probably accounted for his almost constant bad temper. He was feared by the young lads he had working for him but the soldiers were used to his shouting and cussing and took no notice. His food was always welcome and he was happy to dish up hot soup and bread for Dan and Will even though the hour was early.

One of Bevill’s servants came with a message before they had finished eating. They were ordered to the house right away. 

Bevill Grenville was an early riser and they found him in the stables. His black stallion was saddled and ready to ride. They answered his questions and asked if they could take Dan’s mother and sister to the cottage. He told them they could have that day but he needed them back by the following day. He said that they would soon be heading north on a mission but did not elaborate. The two were not involved in the planning within the regiment but he knew their value as part of his elite cavalry.

Will and Dan saddled their horses and set off back to Stratton. Rachael was busy getting her mother ready as they arrived at the Inn. They ate a good breakfast prepared by Mrs. Payne and they were surprised to see the huge frame of Anthony who had arrived the evening before and  assisted them in getting the horse hitched and ready for the last few miles to the cottage.

They were all in high spirits and made good time, Will stopped the cart at the hill above the great house of Stowe and Rachael was impressed by the rugged beauty of the building as were all who came this way. They continued on down past the drive to the house without stopping again following the winding river down the narrow track to the hidden lake. Rachael had been told by Will how lovely the valley was but she was not prepared for scene that opened up before her as they exited the tree line. She stopped the horse and took in the view. The stream trickled into the little lake and the only other sound was that of the birds. This was early spring and the plants and trees were bursting into life. The rugged high cliffs on either side sloped down to the sea and a solitary cottage nestled into the hill off to the right. There were no other building to be seen and she could not imagine anywhere more lovely.

Edging the horse gently forward Rachael followed the narrow path around the lake to the cottage. Her mother was silent but she too was moved by the peace and solitude of the valley. Rachael stopped the cart outside the cottage and got down quickly from the seat, she walked across the rocks to the water’s edge. Nesting sea birds, not used to humans, flew squawking from their nests high on the cliffs. She stood for a moment looking out to sea. It was a calm day but even so the waves made great crashing noises as they pounded and rolled the rocks along the shore. This was so different from the low hills and sandy shore of the coast around Falmouth which was the only other coast she had ever seen. She had not heard Will walk up beside her and was startled when he took hold of her hand. “What do you think” He asked. Rachael did not reply but threw her arms around his neck. They held each other for a moment before Will turned and holding her hand walked slowly across the rocks to the cottage.

Scotland and the King chapter 11   1638- 1639

Letters arrived from his friends and colleagues in London, In Bevill’s view the news was conflicting and he had great concern as to how the problems could be resolved. Members of Parliament loyal to the King were under great pressure to come over to the side of the parliamentarians. There was a strong mood within Parliament to vote for action that would restrict the King’s activities. The King was committing the government to expenditure that they did not agree with and which many felt was unnecessary and contrary to the wishes of Parliament and of the people.

The King however believed it his divine right to rule and he would spend the country’s money how he felt fit. It was now the winter of 1638 and the King’s decision to introduce a new British style prayer book into the Scottish church during the previous year had proved to be so unpopular with the Scots that they banded together and produced a manifesto under the name of the Covenanters. They made it clear to the King that they would fight any attempt to force changes in their religion on to them.

King Charles’s demands were continuously rejected by the Scots and now he believed that the only way he could save face was to force them obey him, he would break their spirit but this could only be achieved by mounting an attack into Scotland and destroying whatever force they had mustered against him. This would be a declaration of war.

So it was with some surprise that while Bevill was at Stowe for his spring break he received a letter delivered by a rider of the King’s bodyguard. It was sealed with the royal seal and addressed to him personally and written in the Kings own hand.

The letter was a request from the King for Bevill to present himself and his regiment in the north to support his actions to subdue the Scottish rebels. It did not go into detail but asked Bevill to meet with him with his force at Berwick which was to the south of the border with Scotland not later than the end of May. Bevill was to send a message of his intention to comply with the King’s request without delay. Bevill was unaware that a similar letter had been delivered to many of the King’s supporters throughout the country as well as numerous noblemen in the Northern border counties.

Bevill spent that night tossing and turning in his bed unable to sleep. The prospect of taking his soldiers more than five hundred miles to the north of England was not to be considered lightly. The time factor made matters difficult as it was now the end of April and all his workers were busy on the land. All his troops were in training but only on a part time basis and he considered them not ready for a real battle. His cavalry, although well trained, were also spread across the estates working with their families.

Bevill talked the matter over with Grace at breakfast. Although she had little influence over his decisions she was intelligent and had a clear mind and Bevill always listened to what she had to say. She listened to the arguments he was having with himself while he stomped around the room and just made an occasional comment.

After much deliberation Bevill decided that it would not be possible to gather his regiment and march them to Scotland in the time scale allowed, he would take the troop of cavalry. It did not enter his head that he should not go to assist the King but even he could not do the impossible.

Once the decision was made his plan began to take shape. He sent for Daniel and Will and asked that they meet him in the main house. His nephew was visiting his father and in his absence the two young men were the most senior soldiers in the troop. Bevill had given them much of the responsibility for the training of the men and keeping discipline within the ranks.  They arrived within the hour and were shown into the great hall. Bevill met them and gave them a glass of claret before explaining what the King had requested and what he had decided to do. The men were somewhat puzzled and concerned at what Bevill had to say. Neither of them had been further than Devon and that was only on a rare occasion. A march or ride so far to the north was incomprehensible. 

Unperturbed by their reaction Bevill proceeded to unfold a large parchment which was his map of England. He spread the map on the huge mahogany table in the centre of the room. He had gathered information over the preceding months from his friends in London and had written details where appropriate. However there were few entries for any of the counties further north than the centre of the country. The largest towns were marked but the further north on the map the details became more sketchy.

The three men discussed the possibilities and problems that they could foresee for several hours. How many days the journey would take, what supplies could they carry, would they take wagons. The questions were endless and Bevill listened to his men’s arguments and comments. By the time the two young men left the house, Bevill had resolved most of the issues and a plan which he would never have considered began to take shape in his mind.

He spent the evening compiling a reply to the King. He explained that it would not be possible to march his regiment to the Scottish border by the end of May but that he would be there with his troop of cavalry at the appointed time. He sealed the letter and in the morning dispatched his courier to London with instructions to hand the letter to no-one but the King’s personal secretary.

The following week was spent in preparing the soldiers for the journey north; there was so little time before they had to be on their way.

Once the word of what was intended got to the ears of the soldiers and staff it seemed as if the whole of the Stowe household became involved in the preparations. A buzz of excitement and apprehension was apparent to everyone. Bevill’s nephew arrived back from his parents to find preparations well advanced. He met with Bevill and was given his orders; he was second in command of the troop and would be with them on their ride north.

The men selected forty of the best horses from the stock that had been in training and a further six were to be taken as pack horses and used if any of the riders had an unforeseen accident with their mount on the way. Bevill left nothing to chance. The men spent all their waking hours cleaning their weapons and preparing equipment, the swords were sharpened until everyone had a razor edge. Muskets and pistols were cleaned and oiled. They would carry the minimum of spare clothing Bevill considered that as they were now into May the worst of the cold weather was behind them, each man would carry a rough blanket to use at night. They would also carry their heavy gray coats and leather capes which would protect them from any unexpected bad weather in the north. 

Bevill and his nephew spent a long time studying the map and attempting to work out the distance they could expect to travel each day. From their experience they concluded that they could expect to make between fifty and sixty miles a day but this would depend on the terrain they came across and the weather conditions.

The distance to between Stowe and the border town of Berwick on the North East coast was close to 500 miles. They calculated that they could make the journey in ten days. Bevill gave the word that they would leave in on the 10^th May, in three days’ time. This would mean that they arrived well in advance of the King’s deadline which would allow them to recover from the journey.

The troop of soldiers got up with the rising sun on the morning of the 10^th May; it was a clear morning with a strong breeze from the west. They gathered in the park that was the front garden of the great house. Bevill kissed Grace with a long embrace. They did not speak; they had already spent the night saying all that had to be said. The troop formed up in a column of two abreast, Bevill took his position at the front with the Grenville regiment of foot in attendance, and the soldiers formed a guard of honour and lined the road ahead of the troop. Bevill ordered that the banner be unfurled as they led off from Stowe towards Stratton. The cavalry made an impressive sight in their bright blue tunics with the distinctive silver hoops.

They passed through Stratton within the hour where the streets were lined with well-wishers. No-one knew when or even if the soldiers would return. The well-wishers were the fathers and husbands, sons and friends of the men on horseback, nothing like this had ever happened to them and no one knew if their loved ones would ever return. 

They did not stop in the town and the soldiers were glad to be on their way. They were soon out of the town and after the long climb up the hill out of the valley they were eventually on to the trail that took them through the undulating countryside towards Holsworthy, from here the troop set into a steady ground covering trot.

The soldiers stopped every two hours to let the horses rest and to stretch their own legs, by the end of the first day they had reached the outskirts of Taunton the large market town in the centre of Somerset. They had made good progress and covered more than eighty miles. Bevill ordered a halt and the troop set about setting up a simple camp where they unsaddled and tended to the horses, the animals would require food and water at every stop.  The soldiers were all good horsemen but there was not one who did not suffer from the effects of being in the saddle for the whole day. Most had aching legs and many had sore behinds with painful blisters, apart from which the men were in good spirits. This was a great adventure and they would soon see parts of the country that not even Bevill Grenville had ever visited.

They were up and ready to set off soon after the sun came up the following morning. Stiff and sore it was difficult to get going but eventually their bedrolls were strapped to the horses and they were on the road. The horses were just as reluctant to set off but once they got going they were soon into the steady trot that covered the ground so quickly.

Each day they travelled northwards. Passing to the west of Bath and on into the Midlands, they travelled through towns with strange sounding names and past groups of people who watched them warily as they went by. On occasion Bevill would stop and ask passing traders the name of a particular town they were going through. When they rested he would check the names against his map and make an entry of the names where they were not recorded previously, details of every town and its size and strategic importance were entered in tiny print and every detail might be of vital importance in the future.

The journey was largely uneventful with the weather set in a warm dry spell. They crossed an extensive range of high hills and a vast forest in the centre of England which took them hours to reach its northern edge. Eventually after six days they reached the outskirts of a large town which was not marked on his map. It was here that Bevill called a halt and sent men into the town to collect the necessary supplies that they had run out of. He selected a sight close to the banks of the river which was clear and fast flowing. This was, he discovered later the river Ure, and he decided that this would be an excellent place to set up camp. His most skilled hunters were sent to seek out game from the extensive wooded area that they had passed through earlier. His nephew was sent with Daniel and Will into the town to seek out information from the inhabitants. Bevill calculated from his map that he was north of York but he needed more accurate information. If they were where he believed they were within three days of the border and his rendezvous with the King.

The men he had sent into town returned to inform him that they were on the outskirts of Ripon an important market town some forty miles north west of York. This confirmed Bevill’s calculations. They had plenty of time to rest and restock. This was a fertile land with plenty of game and water. His scouts had not found any large houses or other towns close by. They could rest here without being disturbed.

The hunters came back with several small deer and a wild boar that they had killed. The men lit fires and cut up the meat. They rested for two days; the horses gorged themselves on the lush grass along the banks of the river. The early summer sun was warm and the men were in great spirits. This northern land was not as different from their own country as they had expected, in fact they could see that the soil was fertile and the grass grew tall. Off to the west, keeping their distance the men had seen large herds of deer as well as an abundance of smaller wildlife.

After the second day of rest Bevill told his men to be ready at first light the following morning, they would head north once again and they were to prepare themselves for the battle ahead. They spent the evening ensuring once again that all their weapons were in good order, their powder was dry and their horses ready for the march.

During the night the weather changed and rain began to blow in from the distant hills. It was wet and misty when the column formed up in the morning and the troop set off for the last leg of their journey, the poor weather dampened their spirits and Bevill hoped that this was not a bad omen.

After another two days the troop arrived on a hillside to the west of Berwick close to the border with Scotland.  They looked down on the wide river Tweed which ran through the wooded valley towards the town. Far to the south they could see what they assumed was the King’s army. Dozens of camp fires could be seen in the distance and the smoke from them drifted lazily into the still early evening sky.

Bevill ordered the troop to rest while he set off with his nephew and Daniel to seek out the King. Will remained behind to organize the campsite.

Bevill rode along the riverbank and approached the lines of tents and soldiers, the first they encountered were a regiment of foot, from their clothing and equipment he deduced that they were pressed men rather than volunteers, their clothing was scruffy and they did not appear to have any equipment. They stood or sat by their lean to shelters and watched as the riders went past. As they got closer to the group of larger tents several soldiers blocked the trail and called for the riders to halt. Bevill told them who he was and said he was to meet the King. One of the men, who turned out to be the duty sergeant at arms, told Bevill that as far as he knew the King had not yet arrived. Bevill asked to see the commander of the regiment and was directed to a large tent further down the river bank. They rode on through the camp; solders were sitting around in groups. Daniel noticed several men lying among a group of trees away from the main camp and pointed it out to Bevill.

The main tent was guarded by musketeers who came to attention as the horses approached. The riders were once again ordered to halt and state their business. Bevill asked to see the commander, as he was talking to the soldiers the tent flap was pushed aside. The figure of a tall distinguished gentleman dressed in the smart casual wear of a Royalist Officer came out of the tent. He looked at the cavalry officer sitting on a beautiful black stallion in front of him and asked Bevill his business, Bevill introduced himself.

The Officer told him that he was Baron Byron, Commander in Chief of the Lancashire and Cheshire regiments of foot. Bevill dismounted and the two men shook hands firmly. Bevill had not met this man before but warmed to him from their first encounter.  Bevill introduced his nephew as his second in command and Daniel as his sergeant at arms and the men were invited into the tent. Daniel asked if he could be excused as he needed to take care of the horses, Bevill nodded before following Baron Byron into the tent. Daniel, even after meeting several distinguished people at Stowe, did not feel comfortable in the presence of people of great wealth and influence, preferring the company of the men who had a similar background to himself.

He dismounted and started to lead his horse towards the group of men he had seen earlier across the field away from the main camp in the clump of trees. As he did so a soldier hurried across the road and caught his arm. “Would not go there my friend” he spoke in a firm voice. Daniel asked what the problem was and he was told that they were very sick, the commander was fearful that it was the plague or some such infection and that they had been separated from the main force.

Daniel nodded but the hairs on the back of neck prickled at the words. He turned back and went in the opposite direction crossing the track to where another group of soldiers sat around a fire, one of the men was busy putting some sort of vegetables in a pot of boiling water.

Daniel tethered his horse and walked over to them. Some of the men gave him a nod and others ignored him, he introduced himself as a Cavalier from the West Country. Most of the group showed little interest in getting into conversation except for one very young man, not much more than a boy. Daniel thought the lad was too young to be in the army but said hello and when Daniel sat on a log close to the fire the lad came across and offered his hand. Daniel shook it firmly and told him his name was Daniel. The young man told him he was Adam and he was from the town of Chatburn in Lancashire. He went on to tell Daniel that his father was a worker of the Commander’s estate, He had been volunteered by his father to join the Baron’s regiment only two weeks previously and they had marched across the Yorkshire hills to get there in time to meet up with the King but when they arrived they discovered that the King had not and they had been sitting around for four days. The lad was a willing talker and Daniel a patient listener. His regiment had been hurriedly assembled and few of them knew how to use the muskets they had been given and received only the basic instruction in the use any of the weapons. Half the regiment carried pikes or swords and several had their own axes to use as weapons.

They had carried their food which had now run out and many were out of camp scavenging around the area to collect whatever they could. He also told Daniel that many had become sick on the march and many more were suffering a variety of ailments including lice which were rife throughout the regiment.

Daniel sat for an hour with the young man before bidding him goodbye. From what he had learnt he was beginning to felt sorry for the men of this regiment, he knew that they would not be much of an opponent for a well-trained enemy.

He walked his horse back towards the main tent area. Bevill Grenville was still inside with the Baron so Daniel busied himself with the horses, after another half hour Bevill emerged followed by his nephew and the Baron. The two men shook hands and Bevill said he would return on word of the King’s arrival.

They mounted their horses and trotted back up the trail to where their troop had made their camp.

Bevill and the troop kept themselves well away from the regiment of foot that were down the valley, they sent out groups of riders to reconnoitre the side of the river where they had set up the camp. The soldiers reported back that there were troop movements on the far bank and they thought that they were not in great numbers. The river was more than a hundred yards wide at this point and too fast flowing for any small boat to cross, they would no doubt be swept down to the river mouth. The men rode north for several miles but did not find another river crossing. Bevill was confident that they would not come under a surprise attack from across the river or from the north but Bevill continued to send scouts along the bank further up river just in case the Scottish tried to surprise them by crossing further north than they had explored.

Chapter 12  Subdue the Scots

The King had devised his plan at the beginning of the year 1639 and near the end of March he was ready to set his ideas into practice. He ignored the pleas from his advisors to reconsider his actions, they wanted him to defer his plans until a standing army could be recruited and trained. The King was having none of it, he was the King and he would command the country’s noblemen to recruit forces and join him.

He would lead his army against the Scottish rebels and restore his authority. Once defeated they would accept the new Presbyterian prayer book with all its changes and return to being his loyal subjects, by force if necessary.

He had instructed the Marques of Hamilton to raise an army of 5,000 men and to sail with them in a newly assembled fleet of ships from Yarmouth to the Firth of Forth. His instructions were for Hamilton to land the army in May and march on Edinburgh.

He sent instructions to the Earl of Antrim to sail his Irish army to Scotland’s west coast where he was to engage and destroy the forces of the Earl of Argyll, one of the most outspoken of the Scottish rebels. Messages were sent to the Scottish Royalists in the Northern Highlands who were loyal to the King to take up arms against the rebels.

The King set off with his entourage from London, he planned to make his northern headquarters at York before moving on to join his assembling army on the Scottish border.

The orders he had sent out to the lords and noblemen across the country were for them to join his army with their troops at either York or near the Scottish border at Berwick not later than the middle of May.

Sir Jacob Astley, was the commander of the infantry and accompanied the King in his carriage as they travelled to York, he was not good company for the King as he grumbled often about the poor state of the troops under his command; they were untrained and with little or no equipment. The King was in a buoyant mood and did not want to listen to the old soldier’s complaints; he told him that everything would work out as he had planned it.

The King’s personal guard consisted of a troop of dragoon, immaculately dressed in their red coats and highly polished armoured breastplates. Riding their heavy horses and carrying lances and banners they were an imposing sight as they trotted ahead of the King’s carriage.  The regiment of a thousand foot soldiers, including musketeers and pike men had been assembled from in and around London and they marched in a long column strung out behind the King’s carriages.

A convoy of carts which were accompanied by a troop of cavalry was dispatched ahead of the column at the start of each day. Dozens of women and several of their children followed the army north; they were the wives and families of soldiers. A dozen or more prostitutes had also joined the entourage for the long march; they made their living from giving pleasure to the soldiers who could afford to pay. The women also cooked and cleaned and did all manor of services for the men, they were a vital part of the army on the march. Women from the King’s household travelled with the convoy were also instrumental in preparing the King’s camp by the time the royal party arrived in the evening.

The journey north was extremely slow with the King insisting on regular rest breaks at which he would require a lavish meal to be prepared for himself and his fellow officers.

The convoy took three days to reach York. The King had decided to make his base at the King’s manor house which was once an abbey, long ago commandeered by the crown when the order of monks that lived there had been disbanded. The residence was a fine building and had been meticulously maintained by the government for the use of the Royal Family. It would suit his purpose well for the month he intended staying at York. By the time he arrived the manor was buzzing with activity the staff had brought in all manner of food and drink which was in the process of being prepared for the King and his large group of personal advisors and senior officers. Every comfort was attended too.

Across the fields in neat columns were gathered the regiments of soldiers that had already arrived, their tents spread in dozens of neat rows covering the whole plain. The King wasted no time in ordering the commanders of the assembled forces to report to him. They gathered in the main hall at mid-morning of the following day.

The King eventually arrived and took his place at the head of his table. He insisted on knowing the detail of the forces that had arrived and all the senior officers paraded in front of him to deliver their reports. The King’s staff had lists made of the troop numbers and the names of their commanders and took note of their previous combat experience.

When this was complete the King and his advisors had a good idea of the strength of the support that he had gained from across the land.

There were roughly 16,000 men assembled at York and he had already received reports that a further 2,000 troops could be expected from the border counties, the noblemen from the north promised that they and their men had would join him at Berwick.

Everything was falling into place as the King had planned and he gave word that they would travel to Berwick in good time to arrive by the end of the month. The commanders prepared their troops for the long march north, it was arranged that they would set off at regular intervals so they should travel in an orderly manner. They would begin to leave as soon as the King gave the word for them to go. They would need several days to make the journey and the officers of the marching men did not want to arrive at their destination after the King had arrived.

The King was in good spirits as he travelled with his army and continued to entertain his officers and enjoy the fine food and drink on every occasion. His superior forces would crush the Scottish army and they would return to London in a far stronger position for the continuing argument with Parliament. 

He would not have been so happy if he had known that the seaborne army from Yarmouth was made up of a rabble of men, many of whom had been bribed to join the army and came along for the money. They had no training and as it transpired almost all suffered from seasickness. Hamilton had difficulty getting even these men to join the force and there were far less than the 5,000 that the King had insisted on. The army under his command was nearer 3,500 in strength and they were untrained and poorly armed. He had even greater difficulty getting any regular soldiers to join him, few of the landowners and noblemen that had offered support to the King actually came forward with their trained soldiers.

He was short of money and credit for the King was hard to come by. Time was running out and he decided that his assembled fleet would have to sail north with their depleted numbers, all the while he worried about the outcome of this venture.    

Still camped by the river Bevill observed the activity as regiments of soldiers and cavalry continued to arrive by the day, Bevill estimated that by now there was more than 10,000 gathered on the south side of the river but it was a further three days before a rider came to tell Bevill that the King and his forces had arrived. By then Bevill estimated 16,000 to 18,000 troops were assembled across the low lands to the south of Berwick.

As it was late in the day Bevill decided to wait until the following morning before seeking an audience with his majesty.

Bevill waited until mid-morning before setting off to find the King’s encampment. Once again he took his nephew and Daniel. They had been told that the King was camped a couple of miles back from the river to the south, well away from the fortified town of Berwick which straddled the river with its imposing castle battlements clearly visible at the seaward side of the town on the far side of the river. The majority of the town’s people lived on the Scottish side of the river close to the castle and since the arrival of the English army most of the residents of the south side of the river had crossed over and the part of the town which was on the lower side of the tweed was now deserted.

They had no trouble finding the camp; Bevill could see the King’s banners alongside a row of huge tents as they approached. He could see tents erected over a wide area and estimated that there were probably three regiments of Foot soldiers and what looked like a full company of cavalry horses corralled to the north of the King’s camp.

The king was confident that with news in the next few days that the Irish army had landed on the west coast he would have sufficient forces to sweep away the Scottish.

Bevill and his nephew made their way through the rows of tents. Sitting on the ground in groups were the soldiers, as they passed they noticed the state the men were in. Many had their boots off and were attending to their feet. Bevill discovered later that this regiment had been force marched from Nottingham, they were exhausted and Bevill noticed the sunken eyed and sullen faces, these were not troops ready to fight.  He wondered how the King could hope to win a battle with such men.

No-one came to challenge them and they rode slowly on towards the main encampment where the King’s tents were positioned.

Brightly coloured with banners and a dozen or more guards, the King’s tents stood out starkly alongside the ragged shelters of the soldiers that they had passed. Around the tents were the King’s own bodyguard; they were immaculately dressed with their red tunics many had lances with foot long silver points. There armoured highly polished breast plates glistened in the bright morning sun.

As the trio approached the King’s quarters they came under close scrutiny. One of the solders approached them and ordered them to halt. He announced himself as the guard commander and stood directly in front of Bevill. Bevill told him that he was Bevill Grenville of Cornwall and asked if he could have an audience with the King.

The commander nodded and turned back towards the tents, he went quickly to the entrance of the main tent. It was only a moment before he returned and informed Bevill that he was to accompany him to the King.

Bevill dismounted and handed the reins to Daniel. Following the guard commander he entered the largest of the tents. Inside, at the rear of the tent, was the King. He sat in a high wooden chair behind a large wooden desk. He was dressed in fine robes and his long hair curled down his shoulders. On either side of him stood his advisers and aids, all of them senior officers from various parts of the army and navy. Bevill recognized two of the men but there were several that he had not met before. He was surprised to see so few of the King’s staff that he had met in London were present. He concluded that they were not in favour of the King’s actions and had been replaced.

The King looked up from his papers as Bevill approached, he smiled, and Bevill felt that it was a genuine smile of pleasure to see him. Bevill knelt and kissed the hand that was offered to him. The King told him to come and sit with him. The staff arranged a chair at the end of the table on the King’s left. He ordered more wine and refreshments to be brought. He questioned Bevill on his forces and was most interested in Bevill’s long journey north. He was intrigued to learn that Bevill had spent so much time detailing and updating the map of England that he had brought with him and insisted that the map be made available for his staff to copy.

They spent an hour together and the King outlined his master plan. He told Bevill that he would advance over the bridge into Berwick while his seaborne force led by the Marquess of Himilton would land to the north and advance on Edinburgh before heading south and joining up with the main force. The Earl of Antrim would lead his Irish army against the Earl of Argyll’s forces to the west and after crushing the Scottish rebels he would proceed eastwards and support the King’s advance. Eventually all the Scottish would be defeated and he would set up his headquarters In Edinburgh, once again establishing his rule in Scotland.

Bevill listened with interest and had to admit that the plan was basically sound, he kept his views on the soldiers he had observed to himself, he was eventually dismissed by the King and given leave and returned to his men.

 The Scottish forces were camped to the north of Berwick on the outskirts of the town. They were commanded by Alexander Leslie. He was a shrewd and competent soldier having gained experiences in several campaigns overseas.  He knew that there was little heart for a fight by his men; they were there to defend their country and no more than that. Several of the Scottish officers thought that they should mount a surprise attack on the English force across the river but to Alexander the idea that they should mount an attack into England was not feasible and would only cause the whole of the English population to take up arms against the invaders. He was well aware that he if they did attack they could not expect to hold any land gained for long. He decided instead to send an envoy with a letter for King.

Bevill’s patrols could tell that the Scots had not increased the strength of their forces close to the bridge across the river and he was sure that they did not seem to be an immediate threat.

Travelling back towards his camp Bevill took more notice of the men camped between where the King’s regiment had set up their headquarters and the river. They appeared to be in very poor health, he could see several of them with sores and scabs on their hands and faces. He had seen these signs before, they would not be able to put up any sort of fight if they were not better fed and given time to recover.

When Bevill arrived back at the encampment he ordered his men to break camp. From what he had seen he was not happy to be close to the other soldiers. The troop packed up their belongings and took their horses further up the river to a position where they could not come in contact with the rest of the army. They would await the King’s orders from a distance.

The Cornish cavalry rested and waited, four days and no word from the King. Bevill was bored but knew there was nothing else he could do but wait, he wrote several letters but there was no way he could get them sent so he put them all in his saddle bags.  He ordered small patrols to scout for food and check further north for another bridge across the river. This was partly his cautious nature but also to keep the men busy and alert and it might be useful if they should decide to surprise the Scots from the west.  Eventually on the fifth day of waiting a rider came and told him he was summoned by King to attend in one hour.

Once again he rode through the camp of the English army, or what there was of it. In his mind Bevill believed that it would not be difficult for his own regiment to ride through and wipe out this army in a day. The soldiers were bored and ill disciplined; they sat around with little to do. He knew that being so close to the sea that the effluent and rubbish from the town would be dumped into the river bringing with it all manner of disease. In addition, being a tidal waterway, the water would undoubtedly be partially salty and would not be good for drinking but that was all these men had, his own troop got their water from much further upstream where it was good and clean. He was sure that much of the health problems that these men suffered could be attributed to the water and he intended to make his observations clear to the other regimental commanders.  From what he read in the soldier’s faces he could see that there was a real possibility that many of these men would desert if they remained in such conditions for much longer.

Bevill went to the King’s camp and was told to wait to be called by the King. It would appear the King did not seem keen to see him and he was kept waiting for more than an hour. Several regimental commanders arrived while he waited and he shook hands with them and they made small talk while they waited their turn to be called to the King. One man was William Cavendish, 1^st Earl of Newcastle. Bevill knew him to be one of the country’s richest men. He had recruited and brought a full regiment of 500 men with him as well as a personal bodyguard of a dozen dragoons. Bevill had not seen his forces as they were camped well to the south, he hoped that they were in better shape than the soldiers he had encountered on his way to the Kings camp. Charles Lucas son of Sir Thomas Lucas of Colchester arrived he had brought his troop of cavalry which numbered around fifty on the long march from the south.  Baron Goring the son of the Earl of Norwich now walked with the aid of two canes having been badly wounded in the battle of Breda two years earlier arrived and made a point of speaking to Bevill who later discovered that it was his regiment that he had seen earlier; he chose not to voice his concerns at this time. Baron Astley was the last of the officers to arrive. He was in fact senior officer of the campaign and a Major General of the King’s army. His personal command was a regiment of musketeers, supported by a company of dragoons with their heavy horses.

None knew why they had been summoned but conjectured that the King may at last be ready to attack across the river. Eventually the King’s aide came out and told them to join the King. Bevill and the other officers entered the huge tent and the King waved them to stand at one side. He paced up and down the tent, his anger was intense. The tent was full of men but they pressed back against the canvas to allow the King room to move. He had a paper in his hand which he clenched tightly. Finally he got control of his emotions and stopped in front of the group He spoke softly and told them that he had gathered them together so that they would all know and understand his situation. He told them that he had just received a letter from Thomas Wentworth, his Lord Deputy in Ireland, He muttered a curse under his breath and he explained that he had been waiting the arrival of the army from Ireland to attack from the west. They were essential for him to have enough of an army to crush the Scottish. Wentworth had promised that they would arrive by sea by the end of May, which was now passed. The letter he had received confirmed that Wentworth had not been able to assemble an army. There was much opposition from the Irish lords and few would join the King’s cause. He had also been unable to secure enough ships to transport a large enough force.

The King paced up and down again his disgust for Wentworth clear for all to see. It was also becoming clear to the assembled officers that the King had not thought this campaign against the Scottish through properly although no-one would dare say it.

Bevill was surprised to learn that there were almost 18,000 troops available to the King but although the number was great, many of them were poorly trained and lacking in even the basic equipment. He had reports that some northern soldiers had arrived with bows and arrows as their only weapons.

The Earl of Bristol, one of the King’s close aids spoke to the King in his low firm voice and told him that he could not expect further assistance without recalling Parliament and succeeding in getting Parliamentary support. Several other noblemen who were also the King’s closed advisers took the Earl of Bristol’s outburst to be their chance to air their opinions and the King at last sat down at his desk.

He told the gathered soldiers that he had considered attacking across the river on news of the arrival of the Irish forces on the west coast but now it would be doomed to fail. He told them to return to their regiments and await his instructions. The men trooped out of the tent and made their way once again to their own camp.

The following day the King sent a reply to the letter he had received from Alexander Leslie telling him that his envoy would meet with the King on 11^th June, in two days’ time. 

Unknown to the King it was at this time that his seaborne force under Hamilton had arrived in the Firth of Forth where they had immediately come under fire from the cannons of the Scottish rebels in their fortified positions high on the cliffs. Along this stretch of the Scottish coast there were few places where the ships could come in close enough to disembark the troops.

Where the rugged shore gave way to sand the rebels had fortified the beaches with wooded poles driven into the sand, behind these defences were troops and canon well dug in and ready to fight, they had anticipated a seaborne attack. The ships were forced to stay well off the shore and ride out the rough weather. Hamilton sent two ships north to reconnoitre the coast but his premonition about the folly of this endeavour was proving to be reality. The weather began to deteriorate with squalls of strong cold wind from the north sending the sea against the tide which caused the waves to become mountainous. The ships were not designed to sit offshore and moved erratically to the north and south, their captains moved them out to sea and back again. Hamilton’s first mate told that there was no more fresh water and conditions for the soldiers below were becoming unbearable. He decided to see for himself and went below. He could not believe the stench and squalor, the smell of human bodies and the sick and excrement filled his lungs. The soldiers lay in rows bunks on filthy blankets; they had been at sea for almost a month when they had not expected to be on board for more than one week, their supplies were completely depleted.

He returned on deck and gave the order to sail south. There would be no attack on Scotland from the sea. His army was devastated by sea sickness and disease. He feared that the plague would be the next thing to break out. It took the fleet a further two days to reach England where he sailed the ships up to the shore and landed the troops on a sandy beach south of Spittal where the cliffs were high and provided a calmer anchorage for the fleet.

He ordered the immediate disembarkation of the soldiers and ordered that they would form up on the road above the beach and they were to march north, they would join up with the King’s army which he knew would still be camped to the south of Berwick. He intended to travel at all speed to where the King was camped and report his failure. He knew it would be the end of his career and probably his life but he had no other option. In his defence he could tell the King that his army was still ready to fight alongside the King’s own men.

What he did not anticipate was the disappearance of half his army. The men came off the ship having gone without food for days and a ration of filthy water.  Under cover of darkness they deserted in their droves and headed south, they had no wish to join the King’s army and their weeks at sea had been more than many of them could take.

As the sun came up Hamilton gave orders for the army to break camp and join him on the road to Berwick. His officers gathered around him and gave him the news of the desertion of their men.

The remnants of Hamilton’s army gathered on the road before being given the order to march north, they set off at a slow pace and before long came to the bank of a fast flowing river. The army was halted and everyone took their time to drink the sweet cold water and fill their water containers with the sweetest fresh water anyone could remember tasting. Soldiers waded into the stream to wash and drink their fill after their weeks at sea this was the most enjoyable experience.

They spent several hours by the river. They were refreshed by the water but none of the men had eaten for three days, they marched on northwards and eventually came across a village. It was deserted, the inhabitance not sure if this army of advancing soldiers were friend or enemy and had gone into hiding, none of them were prepared to take a chance.

Hamilton ordered the officers to get their men to gather what food they could from the village houses, he knew it was important to find food for the thousand or more men that he had left of his original three and a half thousand.  They were in need of meat and bread, he knew they were all malnourished and had not eaten proper food for at least two weeks. The foraging soldiers came back with all manner of food.  Several cows and sheep were driven into the camp from the surrounding fields and quickly slaughtered. The men build large fires on which they cooked the meat and distributing it around the force. The men slept by the river and spent another full day recovering their strength before they could continue the march. Eventually Hamilton called the officers together and ordered the army to form up on the road. It was time to go and face the King.

Hamilton and his officers eventually came within sight of the King’s encampment. They halted the army and the senior officers left there juniors to set up a camp and organise the collection of more provisions from the surrounding countryside. Hamilton and his small party of officers went on to make their report.

They arrived at the King’s camp in the late afternoon and announced their arrival to the duty officer. He in turn went to report to the King’s personal guard who went and reported to the King’s aide. News of their arrival was relayed to the King.

They sat in the open air without food or refreshment for several hours and it was late in the evening before a messenger came to tell Hamilton that the King wished to see him. It was with some surprise that Hamilton was not dragged off in chains. In fact the King was sitting at his desk looking relaxed and drinking from a large wine goblet. He called Hamilton to him and asked him to report on his venture to the north. Hamilton was taken aback by the King’s apparent good mood and stumbled over his words. As for the King, he had not had a good day and bad news was all consuming. In the afternoon he had decided to spend some time in quiet meditation which was a habit he had found to his advantage, after an hour on his own he was ready to meet Hamilton. His anger could have consumed him but he was not a fool and knew that he had to take control of his emotions. News that the Irish were not coming and that Hamilton had failed to take Edinburgh or secure the north and that most of Hamilton’s army had deserted was about all he could take for one day. He knew that his own forces were an ill disciplined rabble held together by threats and promises of riches drove him to despair. He knew in his heart that this was not the time to wage war on the Scots.

To blame Hamilton would be foolish, he had always enjoyed the man’s company and although he found it difficult to hide his disappointment he would contrive to get the best result from his situation.

He listened to Hamilton for more than an hour before dismissing him. He called together his top advisers and although it was now after midnight insisted that they held a council of war.

It was dawn before he allowed the group to disperse, by then he had settled on a plan of action. His envoy would go to meet the Scots again on the next day.

There would not be a war if the enemy pulled their troops back from the city and he would negotiate a peace treaty where he could save face and avoid a disastrous war.

The envoy and advisers were dispatched early in the morning towards Berwick while the King called together his top officers. He would hold a great parade of strength. All the regiments of the army would gather in the fields before the town with all their arms and canon at his disposal and he would inspect the troops. This was met with amazement by the soldiers but they were in no position to argue. Bevill received word for him and his cavalry to present themselves at the parade on the following day at noon. He was instructed that the solders should be turned out in their best uniforms with their banners unfurled. Somewhat surprised the troop spent several hours cleaning their equipment and attending to the horses so that when they formed up on the following morning they were a magnificent sight. Their blue and silver jackets and their fine heavy horses along with their highly polished equipment ensured that they stood out in sharp contrast to the scruffy foot soldiers that they passed on their way to meet the King of England.

The army was formed up in regiments, row upon row of foot soldiers, musketeers and cavalry. Bevill Grenville was surprised to be directed to the centre of the parade and led his troop in front of the lines of solders. The troop formed a line behind Bevill and the standard bearers. They sat on the horses in silence, the whole army stood silently in the warm summer sunshine awaiting the arrival of the King.

King Charles had dispatched his team of negotiations to meet the Scottish leaders with their instructions. He planned to meet up with them at the end of the week when the arrangement for both sides to make a strategic withdrawal of their armies. Forming his entire army was a show of strength which would no doubt strengthen his position, or so he believed. The sight of so many forces arranged against them would encourage the rebels to meet his demands. In his heart the King knew that his plans were no longer feasible, but he would show the enemy that his forces were indeed enough to take Scotland if he should decide to do so.

The King rode a white horse towards the gathered army; He was dressed in his finest clothing with a shining silver breast plate, his wide brimmed hat adorned with feathers set off the uniform, he was indeed an imposing figure. A dozen of his personal guard accompanied him; even Bevill Grenville was impressed by the way the King’s made his entrance.

King Charles walked his horse along the lines of troops who were called to attention and the officers saluted him as he passed. He arrived in front of Bevill Grenville and the troop of Cornish cavalry whereupon he called his guards to halt. The King turned his horse to face Bevill and spoke in a loud and clear voice. “My Lord Grenville” “you have travelled here from your far distant land to stand and fight for your King. You did not question my request that you join me and you have displayed a loyalty as strong as any man I have ever known. “Dismount and come hither.” With that the King dismounted and strode forward towards Bevill.  Bevill did the same and came face to face once again with the King. “Kneel before me” the King ordered and Bevill went down on one knee in front of him. The King drew his sword and tapped Bevill on each shoulder. “Arise Sir Bevill Grenville of Cornwall” his voice carried loud and clear around the gathered forces. Bevill stood up and the King held out his hand. Bevill took hold and kissed the King’s signet ring. The Cornish cavalry cheered loudly and the cheer was taken up by the army and resounded around the plain. The King remounted and Bevill went back to his horse. It was a proud moment for the newly knighted Sir Bevill and his troop revelled in the honour bestowed on their leader. Eventually the King concluded his inspection and rode off back to his camp after which the armies were dismissed. Sir Bevill led his men back to their camp site and the troops were given a ration of beer while his nephew sat with Bevill in the evening sunshine where they opened the last of their supply of wine.

The following day Sir Bevill was called once more to attend the King and had his horse saddled immediately. He arrived at the King’s camp and without delay was ushered into the King’s quarters. The King told Bevill of his intentions to return to York and that there would be no war. He said that Bevill was to take his men and return to his home, he thanked him for his unquestioning loyalty. The King told him he would meet with him again when they were in London. This time the King offered Bevill his hand and the Cornishman and the King of England shook hands in an act of genuine affection. No more was said and Bevill left the King to return to his men.

There were mixed emotions when he called them together to tell them the news. Many had been ready for a battle but the time spent waiting had dulled their desire to fight. Once they had been told that there was not to be a battle, all they could think of was leaving this place and returning to their homes. None of them could believe that they would all be going home. The following day they wasted no time in breaking camp. They set off in the early morning and Bevill as careful as ever sent scouts ahead as the troop followed behind, He decided that they would follow the route that they had taken to get to the north and gather food and water as they went.

They made good time riding all day in the fine summer weather and sleeping under the stars at night. They were all in good spirits and settled into a routine where they covered the miles without meeting any problems. In little more than a week they were once again crossing the border into their homeland. They marched into Stratton in the late afternoon after a long day in the saddle, they were surprised by the reception as dozens of people lined the streets of the town, news of their return had spread quickly among the close knit community and everyone was grateful for the return of their men folk.

Sir Bevill called a halt in the town square. He gave instructions that the men should return to their homes and rest. They were to return to Stowe after the next Sabbath day in effect giving them all a weeks holiday. There had been no time to alert Grace and his family that he was returning home and there was great excitement when the cavalry clattered into the yard of the great house. The family was told of how the King had knighted Bevill. Grace decided that it was proper that a great party would be held to mark the occasion and set about making the arrangements.

Daniel and Will wasted no time in heading off to the cottage in the valley. Daniel wanted to know how his mother was progressing in her new home and Will could barely contain his desire to see Rachael. He had thought of little else since leaving Berwick.

They rode down into the valley in the late afternoon. Rachael and her mother were not expecting the men to come back so soon and were busy collecting driftwood from the beach. Recent storms had deposited tons of wood on the shore line but collecting it was back breaking work for Rachael and the old lady. They were finishing stacking the wood at the side of the cottage and by now had set in a good supply of fuel which would last them through the winter months that were approaching. The sound of horse’s hooves on the pebbles caused Rachael to look up from her work. Just a few yards away two men were slowly approaching the cottage. She realised who they were immediately and gave a cry of joy. She shouted to her mother. “It’s Daniel and Will they are back”, her eyes filled with tears as she ran towards them. The men dismounted and Rachael threw herself into Will’s open arms. He swung her around and she would not let him go. Daniel stood and smiled at his little sister. His mother came at last from the side of the cottage and Daniel held her to him as they watched Will and Rachael. Eventually the pair broke their embrace and Rachael came to Daniel kissing him on the cheek. The four could not have been happier and they walked arm in arm into the cottage as the sun sank beyond the horizon.

CHAPTER 13 The quiet years

The summer following the cavalry’s return from the north was a pleasant time for the Grenville family and the soldiers alike, life got back to normal quickly. Bevill relaxed the training programme so that the men could return to their homes and work the land. The summer turned to autumn and the weather had been good for the crops with equal amounts of rain and sunshine resulting in a bumper harvest for many of the farmers. The workers on Bevill’s estates were kept busy from dawn to dusk and by the time the days began to grow shorter and the air colder the barns and store rooms were stacked to capacity with every manor of food for themselves and the animals. All of the cattle and livestock had eaten well from the lush grass and had put on comfortable reserves of fat which would see them through the winter. The workers had put in store all the gathered food and supplies, salted beef, pork, mutton and fish. Great slabs of cheese and kegs of wine and ale, as well as great wooden barrels of cider which would ferment over the winter. All had its place in the great storage buildings around the manor house. Oats and beans were dried and bagged up. Wheat had been harvested and ground at the mill. All was prepared for whatever the winter could throw at them.

Will and Daniel did not have land to work or stock to look after so with Bevill’s blessing they spent their time clearing and area close to the cottage where they could plant and grow their own vegetables, they tried their hand at hunting in the surrounding forest. This was new to all of them Rachael knew nothing of growing food or looking after animals but by watching the gardeners and farmers and asking their advice they decided that they could make a start. The three of them toiled to clear the area to plant seedlings and herbs.

Hunting was another art that they had to master and although there were many deer in the valley, try as they might they could not get close enough to them to get off a shot. The muskets were not very accurate at long range in any event, so they sought the advice of the older men who were known to be good hunters. They were instructed in the art of hunting and went with a party of hunters to observe them at work. It would be another three months at the onset of winter when the trees had lost their leaves and the herd was easier to spot before the two men caught their first deer.

Rachael and Will took the cart to Stratton and Daniel rode behind on his horse. They left their mother sitting in her chair by the doorway of the cottage. The morning sun was warm and she had taken a liking for this seat as it gave her a view out to sea and was a comfortable place to sit and enjoy the sunshine. She did not object to being left on her own and sat for hours lost in her own thoughts.

It was the day of the weekly market in Stratton and Rachael was excited, she did not get away from the cottage very often. The market was busy and business was brisk, Stratton was not a main market town but there was every manner of items that she wanted to purchase. One stall had metal ware for sale, a large frying pan and a big brass pot with a handle. Daniel and Will had saved enough money for her to indulge herself within reason. She found another stall with a variety of cloth in different colours and decided that she could make some clothing for herself and her mother. She chuckled when Will decided to buy a dozen young chickens that clucked noisily in a large wicker basket, he made the purchase and loaded the noisy birds onto the cart.

As it was already late summer and many of the crops that they would have liked to plant were already in full growth, they were told that it was too late to plant them and they would have to wait until the next spring. They asked around the stalls for what plants they could put in the ground at this time and eventually decided they would have to settle on winter greens and herbs that could be planted at any time. Growing their own food was more complicated than they had realised.

Daniel was beginning to feel more and more out of place with Will and Rachael and he knew that although it was not their intention he was not included in their relationship. He decided that it was time to give them more space and made an excuse not to return with them to the cottage. He went instead in search of the company of David Payne whom he knew would be at the Inn. He found the landlord unloading barrels from a cart and David was pleased to see him Daniel who offered to give him a helping hand, the two men rolled the heavy barrels into the cellar. Once the barrels were in place David decided that as it had been hot work it was time for an afternoon drink. The Inn was quite busy with traders from the market and David drew off two large tankards of beer before ushering Daniel into the relative quiet of the back room which he allowed customers to use when the Inn was extremely busy, most of the time it was his own room where he could rest in relative quiet.  David was a shrewd man and could tell that Daniel had something on his mind. He decided to let the young man unwind and tell him what was troubling him. Eventually Daniel told him how he was beginning to feel uncomfortable in the company of his sister and Will and David smiled when he realised that although it was important to Daniel it was not a serious problem. 

David sat with Daniel and the two men consumed several tankards of ale. Mrs Payne came in to see where her husband had got to and was pleased to see Daniel. David told his wife of Daniel’s problem. Mrs Payne was a woman with a wide knowledge of family problems, everyone in the town seemed to seek her advice and she told Daniel that when two people were in love anyone else was just in the way. The best thing all round would be for Will and Rachael to get married and smiling at Daniel she told him that it was time for him to find a wife of his own. The wisdom of her words was not lost on the two men although by now they were becoming quite drunk and getting to the point where they did not care any more. As it got dark David took Daniel into the main bar of the Inn which was by now busy with the evening trade, the room was lit by several large candles.

The two men carried on drinking while Mrs Payne and two of her serving girls brought drinks and food for the customers. It was late in the evening by the time the Inn emptied and Daniel said he had to make his way home. Mrs Payne said she would not hear of it, in the state he was in it was unlikely that he could saddle his horse. She told him he could sleep in one of the Inn’s empty rooms and David showed Daniel the way up the stairs, Daniel fell face down on the bed and David left him where he lay, he too went to his room and collapsed on his bed.

Mrs Payne left Daniel to sleep late and eventually he awoke and went down the stairs to the family living room. David was already in the yard loading empty barrels and organising his stores.

Daniel had a severe thick head but he ate the breakfast that Mrs Payne had prepared for him and thanked her for looking after him. She told him not to worry about Will and Rachael as these matters had a way of working out by themselves.

Daniel saddled his horse and said goodbye to David before heading back to Stowe. He rode slowly his head still aching from the effects of the night of ale drinking.

Daniel remained at the barracks and spent much of his time with the dozen or more soldiers who were still living there. They practiced with pistols and had mock sword fights. He did not go down to the cottage for two weeks by which time he felt he ought to visit his mother and see how life was progressing with his sister and Will.

Autumn was coming to North Cornwall and the leaves were beginning to turn and fall, gold and brown replaced the dense greens. Setting off early Daniel rode slowly down the steep path into the valley enjoying as always the variety of sights and sounds of the wildlife that he disturbed as he went along.

As he circled the little lake Daniel called out so as not to startle Will and his sister, but there was no reply. Daniel dismounted at the cottage and went inside. His mother was sitting in her chair by the fire, she did not move when he approached, Daniel thought she was dead but when he came close he realised she was sleeping. He took her hand and held it gently, it looked so small in his, her eyes opened as she sensed his presence and she smiled at her son. “Daniel it is good to see you, I was resting” she spoke in her soft voice. Daniel drew up a wooden stool and sat next to her. They chatted and he enjoyed his mother’s company feeling a little guilty that he had seen so little of her these past years.

She told him that Rachael and Will were down by the sea where they had been there for hours.

After an hour Daniel with his mother he told her that he wanted to speak to Rachael and that he would return soon. He left her in the cottage and walked across the pebbles to the water edge; the sea was flat calm which was unusual for this coast and the tide was on its inward cycle. He was immediately aware that there was something in the water in front of him. The sea was calm but there was movement in the water, he walked closes and saw an amazing sight, there were fish, thousands of flashing silver fish, the sea was boiling up as they broke the surface, he had never seen the like of it before. He was distracted by movement up the shore where he could see two figures some way along the water line to the north, he realised it had to be his sister and Will and made his way in their direction.

They did not see him or hear his approach as the sea made a thundering noise as it rumbled onto the pebble beach. He stood and watched them for a while intrigued by their activities. Will cast a large circular net into the sea and the weights around its edge caused it to sink, the two of them hauled it in immediately. He was amazed to see that the net was bulging with fish as they dragged it up onto the pebbles.

He walked closer and called out to them, this time they heard him and realising who it was waved wildly at him.

He gave Rachael a big hug and Will put his arm around Daniel’s shoulder they were genuinely pleased to see him and were excited to tell him about their new venture. Rachael lifted the lid off a large wicker basket and Daniel could see it was almost full of small silver skinned fish still alive and flapping wildly.

Will emptied the fish from the net into the basket and rolled the net into a ball. Rachael and Daniel lifted the heavy basket between them and Will struggled with the water-logged net. The three of them set off back along the pebbles towards the cottage.

Will dumped the net outside by the low wall and they carried the basket of fish into the living room. Rachael was excited and could hardly wait to tell her brother of the events since they last saw him.

Will had a keg of beer which he kept at the back of the house in the shade where it remained quite cool. He went to get them a drink and returned with a tankard of the dark brown home-made ale. They carried their drinks outside and sat down on the pile of rocks which surrounding the cottage.  The warm sunshine and the slight breeze made the occasion all the more enjoyable.

Rachael explained that the previous week they had set off along the beach in the early morning just as the tide was falling. They had walked for several miles when eventually they reaching the little fishing village at a place called the Haven of Bude. There were less than a dozen cottages and the fishermen and women who lived there eked out a living catching fish and collection shell fish from the rocks at low water. This was difficult work as this was one of Cornwall’s most dangerous coasts. They had met up with fishermen on the shore and introduced themselves, the villagers were friendly and they chatted for a long while. The fishermen explained the problems of fishing this coast and that if they set out to sea in their little boats none of them knew if the weather would change sending up huge waves and along with the strong currents which over the years had claimed many lives.

Will was interested in the round net that one of the men was busy casting into the water. It was around twenty feet in diameter and with a swing of his arm he was able to launch it quite a distance from the shore. He held onto the net with an attached rope and when he drew it in and there were several fish caught in the net. The fisherman explained that there were days when the fish would come in close to the beach and it was then that these nets could be cast with great effect. This was such a time of year and the fish were herring which were abundant in great shoals. Mackerel were in abundance as well a slightly larger fish which sold well at the market. These fish could be eaten fresh or salted and stored for the winter.

Will explained where they lived and asked if they could catch fish from their beach. The fisherman told them that the fish were so plentiful anyone with a net could do it. Will realised that the tide was now coming in and they would not be able to walk back along the beach. He asked the fisherman if he had a net that Will could buy but he was told that there were none to be had they were made by an elderly fisherman who was the only net maker, a man who took his time to sew the mesh, no one else had mastered the art and he was never in a hurry.

Will and Rachael thanked the men for their time and were about to leave when one of the fishermen said he might be able to help. He said he had a net that was damaged and in need of repair and he did not use it any more. They could have it and if they could find a way to repair it they were welcome to it. Will thanked him and they went to his cottage where the old disused net was discarded in a heap in a corner behind the building. Will realised it was too heavy and bulky for them to carry all the way back to the cottage and said he would come back on the following day with the cart to collect it.

As arranged Will set off in the morning with the horse and cart, for Stratton, he did not stop in the town but went on down the hill to the Haven where the fisherman was waiting at his cottage. They loaded the old net onto the cart and the fisherman gave Will a few tips on casting the net into the sea. Will thanked him and set off back to the hidden valley. Rachael was waiting for his return and between them they spread the net out on the pebble beach in front of the cottage. It was in poor condition with several holes almost a foot across. Rachael studied the way the net was made and came to the conclusion that it was constructed in a continuous pattern which was little different from darning, something that she was well able to do. She cut off a piece of twine from the torn net and told Will that they would have to go to market to get the type of twine that she would need to repair the net. The next market day way not for two more days and they spent the next day fixing the broken weights and watching the sea, they could not understand why  the sea was so still but no sign of fish could be seen. They could only hope that conditions would change and it would not be long before the great shoals of fish returned.

Market day arrived and Will hitched the cart to the mare so that they could set off early so that they could be there at the start of the morning market, Stratton would be a busy place and Rachael enjoyed the hustle and bustle.

Wandering around the stalls Will soon lost interest and went off to see if Anthony Payne was at the Inn. He was met by Mrs Payne who told him that Anthony had gone with his father to Holsworthy and would not be back until the afternoon. Will said that he would sit for a while and enjoy a jug of ale. Mrs Payne came and unusually sat down with him in the main room of the Inn. Will took a long drink from the tankard and realised that Mrs Payne was watching him. He felt uncomfortable and asked her if there was something wrong.

“When are you going to get married” she asked. Will choked on his drink. “I don’t know” he replied “We haven’t discussed it”.

“Well time you did” “people around here are not taken with young people living together without being married” “The lord don’t look kindly on it and nor do we folk”.

She got up and left him to think on what she had said. Will finished his drink and went off to find Rachael.

He walked along the row of stalls and saw her with her arms full of twine and cloth. He came close behind her and kissed her neck. She was startled until she realised who it was. She turned and showed Will what she had purchased, it was a huge needle made of bone which she insisted was essential for repairing the net. 

Will helped her onto the cart and once they were on the way he told her what Mrs Payne had said. They both rode on in silence for a while before Rachael reached over and held Will’s face in her hands she kissed him gently and said that she though it was a wonderful idea.

Back at the cottage she set about repairing the net, she followed the way the knots were constructed and after some practice she managed to tie the knots in much the same way as they were on the original net. She worked away, concentrating on the job at hand, eventually she was able to tie the twine in lines and it was not long before she had repaired a complete section of the net.  It was not perfect but it was strong and she knew that now she could repair the rest, she was well pleased with her efforts and lost no time in showing Will the results of her work.

Rachael spent the next day working on the net and eventually it was complete. Will had walked along the shore looking for the shoals of fish and by now the sea had started to get choppy with a rise in the westerly wind but there were no signs of the shoals of fish coming close inshore.

It was a further three days before the wind dropped and the sea settled once again. Will walked along the pebble beach once more and this time he noticed a few fish jumping close inshore. He ran back along the beach as fast as he could and called for Rachael to get the net. She picked up the net and struggled along the shore as quickly as she could she was just as anxious as Will to test the net.

They spread it out on the pebbles and Will took hold of the edge as he had been shown. With a heave he cast the net out onto the water and Rachael held on to the rope, it did not go far but spread out on the surface before slowly sinking out of sight, they waited a couple of minutes before they began to pull on the rope as the net came onto the shore they could see much to their amazement that there were more than a dozen small fish stranded in the mesh.

They shouted and hugged each other in their excitement, these were the first fish they had ever caught and they knew it would not be the last.

Daniel listened to their story with interest but managed to change the subject back to what Mrs Payne had said about getting married. Rachael told him that they had agreed with Mrs Payne that they should but there was no hurry. Daniel told them that there was no time like the present and that they should go and see the minister at Stratton without delay. They reluctantly agreed and said they would do so as soon as they had time. Daniel left them at the cottage and rode back to Stratton; he had a plan forming in his head. Mrs Payne was in the kitchen when he arrived at the Inn. She was pleased to see him once again and Daniel told her of his talk with Will and Rachael. Mrs Payne agreed that between them they should get matters moving and for Daniel to leave the arrangements to her.

Mrs Payne was a force to be reckoned with; her husband David and their giant son Anthony would not have the nerve to talk back to his mother. When she told them of her plan to arrange the wedding of Will and Rachael they groaned but said nothing. Nor did the minister when she went to see him. Reverend Thorn was a young minister and newly promoted to the parish of Stratton. He listened with interest to Mrs. Payne and agreed that Will and Rachael should marry; he was unhappy that Mrs Payne was making all the arrangements but thought better than to argue. He told her that she should get a message to Will and Rachael and have them visit him at the vicarage.

Mrs Payne told Daniel to get down to the cottage and get Will and Rachael up to the vicarage without delay.

Daniel went the next morning and arrived at the cottage as Will was about to go fishing once again. Will was pleased to see him and was quite excited by the results of their new enterprise, he and Rachael had been fishing each day and the fish were so plentiful they were able to sell dozens at the markets in Stratton and Kilkhampton. They had been so successful that they were planning to visit Holsworthy the following week where the market was much bigger and they could sell the fish and get items for themselves that were not available at the small markets.

Eventually Daniel managed to say what he had come to see them about and was himself surprised when Rachael told him that they had already been planning to get married although they had not been to see the minister. They agreed to go to Stratton the next day. Daniel went with Will to watch him at work at his fishing. Will was becoming a natural at casting the net and seemed to have a knack of knowing where to cast.

Daniel helped Will back to the cottage with the heavy basket where Rachael and their mother were busy packing the fish caught earlier into boxes with a thick layer of salt. Rachael had been told how to preserve the fish and the fisherman’s wife had explained how to collect sea salt from the dried out pools that were above the high water line. With the warm sunshine the sea water quickly evaporated leaving a thick coating of clean white salt across the rocks. Rachael scrapped the salt into a leather bag and before long had gathered a good supply.

Daniel left them in the early evening and went back to Stowe after arranging to meet up with them in Stratton on the following day.

Rachael’s mother said she was feeling well and would enjoy a day in Stratton where she could visit Mrs. Payne while she and Will went to the vicarage. They rode the cart up to the big house on their way. Will delivered a basket of fresh fish to the kitchen. Bevill had not asked them for rent on the cottage but it was an unwritten agreement with all the tenants that they would give some of their produce to the estate and the arrangement worked well as Bevill had assisted many of the when the need had arisen. Will asked after Daniel at the barracks and was told that he had already left for Stratton.  The party continued on their way arriving at the town before midday.

Daniel was talking to David Payne outside the Inn and Daniel helped his mother from the cart as they arrived and she took his arm as he escorted her into the building. Will and Rachael arranged to see them later and turned the cart up the hill towards the vicarage. Mrs. Payne was working in the kitchen and was pleased to see how well Daniel’s mother was looking, life at the cottage by the sea was obviously agreeing with her.

Will and Rachael were gone for an hour and were all smiles when they arrived back at the Inn. Daniel was sitting with his mother in the bar room and Mrs Payne was as busy as ever cooking and organising her servant girls. David joined them as Will and Rachael arrived and the pair lost no time in telling them that the arrangements were made they were to be married on the last Sabbath day of September this coincided with the harvest festival service and this would be a calibration day for everyone.

Mrs. Payne was pleased because it would give her and Rachael a month to get everything ready. They ate and drank with the Payne family and the sun was going down by the time Will, Rachael and her mother said their goodbyes and headed back to the valley, they arrived at the cottage as dusk settled over the sea. Rachael’s mother was very tired but she had enjoyed her day. She went to her bed early and Will sat outside, the moon was almost full and low in the sky it cast its shadow across the sea. Rachael joined him and they held hands in the moonlight, neither felt it necessary to speak. When it was completely dark they watched as the stars became more visible in the cloudless sky. They could not have been happier.

During the next month Mrs. Payne was like a second mother to Rachael, arranging the wedding service with the minister and organising a great party at the Inn to which most of the town’s folk were invited.

Will asked Daniel if he would accompany Rachael to the church and he said he would be delighted, their father was dead and there were no other men in the family, Daniel was the only one he could think of to perform the honour.

It was inevitable that word would get to Bevill regarding the impending wedding of one of his favourite men. He mentioned the fact to Grace and also reminded her that the chosen Sunday would be the harvest service at the church. The Grenville’s would normally attend the service at Kilkhampton church, where many members of their family were interned in the family crypt below the building but on this occasion with the wedding and the estates around the town having had such a good harvest that Bevill felt they should go to the Stratton festival, after all most of his tenants were from that area.  They had been told that there was to be a great party for the whole town.

The Grenville family did not normally involve themselves in the happenings of the common people but Grace insisted that this was special and they would attend the wedding, in fact she had an idea of her own. She told Bevill of her intentions and said she would see Rachael and ask her if she would accept her carriage to take her to the church.

Grace pestered Bevill to take her to see Rachael in the hidden valley; she was intrigued from what Bevill had told her of the place and insisted on seeing it for herself. Grace got her own way in the end and chose a fine sunny morning to ride out along the cliff top with Bevill, it was only a mile to the sea and once she and Bevill had reached the high cliffs they turned north. They rode slowly along the path close to the cliff edge ever aware of the terrible accident that had befallen Bevill at this same spot. Grace was wary of the cliff edge but nevertheless enjoyed the fresh breeze that blew in from the Atlantic and the solitude of this part of their estate. It was not long before they came to the point where the path ended and the cliff slopped down steeply into the little valley. They sat on their horses and looked down on the view in front of them. Grace had never been here and was amazed at what she saw.

The cliffs fell away with coarse grassland dropping more than two hundred feet to the valley floor here in the centre of the flat plain was a small lake, from the lake the water trickling over boulders and pebbles into the sea. Just a few yards further across the valley the grass covered cliff rose sharply again rising to the same height at which they sat. In the floor of the valley a solitary cottage stood tucked into the lea of the cliff, a curl of smoke rose from the chimney to be swept away on the breeze. Through the gap between the cliffs the vastness of the sea spread out to the horizon, here the great rollers could be observed as they swept slowly onto the shore. Looking back towards the lake Grace caught sight of a small number of deer standing still and silent, ears pricked listening for the slightest sound. The tree line began just beyond the lake and the huge oaks grew thick and high, an unbroken wall of woodland covering the hillside, to the couple on the cliff-top they were like an impenetrable barrier between the valley and the top of the hill, they could just make the rooftops of the great manor of Stowe in the distance.

Grace took in all the view of the valley and was greatly impressed with what she saw. This was indeed a special place. Eventually she tapped her horse with her heals and it began a slow decent into the valley, Bevill followed at a steady pace ensuring that the horses kept their footing on the steep slope.

Will and Rachael were repairing their net once again in anticipation of another day of fishing which they intended to begin on the high tide. The sound of horses across the pebbles caught their attention. Bevill and grace rode in and dismounted in front of the cottage. Will was lost for words, he never expected Bevill to bring his wife to this place, and Rachael stood behind him unsure of what to do or say. Will nodded to the pair as they came towards them. Grace said hello and offered her hand to Rachael who took it tentatively, she felt awkward and bent her knee in a show of respect. Grace smiled at them and immediately they felt more comfortable. Rachael asked them if they would like to come into the cottage but Grace said they were happy to sit out in the open and took a seat on one of the small wooden stools that were near the door. Bevill stood beside her and left his wife to make the conversation. She wanted to know all about their life in the valley, she was a good listener. Will offered them a tankard of ale which Bevill accepted. Grace did not like the strong smelling beer and said she was not thirsty. Will had nothing else to offer her and went off to get the drink for Bevill and himself. Grace and Rachael chatted for a while and Grace being an astute and intelligent woman soon realised that Rachael was feeling uncomfortable; the difference between the Lord and Lady of the manor and herself was too much for her to overcome. Grace decided to ease her discomfort and cut the visit short almost forgetting the reason for their visit.  She told Will and Rachael that the Grenville family would like to come to the wedding if that was acceptable to them.  She told them that she would be pleased if they would accept her offer of her carriage to take them to the church. Rachael’s face was a delight to see and she said how honoured she would be to travel in style to the church. Grace told them to be at Stowe an hour before the wedding and the carriage would be waiting for them.

During the remaining two weeks Rachael travelled back and forth to Stratton Mrs. Payne arranged for the dress that Rachael would wear to be made by the town’s best dressmaker and they got together on several occasions with the woman until it was eventually finished and they were satisfied. They also had a dress made for her mother and for the several young girls who wanted to walk behind Rachael into the church. The town’s harvest festival party was to be held on the same Sunday following the service, during the day before the wedding many of the townsfolk went to the church to decorate and clean the building so that on Sunday the little church at Stratton would look it’s finest, flowers of all description and all manner of fruit and vegetables were placed around the church in the established tradition.  They would not disgrace themselves in front of the lord of the manor. 

On the morning of the wedding Will was ready early in fact he could not sleep and was moving around before the early morning sunlight came over the hills. Rachael helped her mother to get ready and Will had dressed himself in a fine outfit that he with Daniel’s help had purchased at the Holsworthy market. Rachael put on the fine dress that had been made for her and she and her mother joined Will at the cart as he harnessed the old mare. He looked up as Rachael approached and his heart leapt he could not believe that he would have this beautiful woman for his wife. She in turn saw before her the most handsome of men, tall, with broad shoulders, his hair and beard trimmed and tidy, she could never be happier than she was at this moment. Will helped the women onto the wagon and mounted his horse, once they reached the manor he was to ride ahead and wait for them at the church.

They rode steadily up the hill to Stowe and at the gateway to the drove Will gave them a wave and trotted off towards Stratton. Rachael took the cart up the drive and into the stable area where Daniel and the stable staff were waiting. The grand coach of Lady Grenville was waiting. Its four black horses were standing placidly, already harnessed and awaiting their orders.

Daniel assisted Rachael and his mother into the carriage as Bevill and Grace came from the big house. They and the children would follow in Bevill’s carriage, Grace was aware that there arrival at the church might cause a stir and she did not want to become the centre of attention on this special occasion.

The carriage driver was in his full livery as was fitting for the Grenville family on this special occasion. He set off urging the horses into a steady trot with several of Will’s friends in their best blue and silver uniforms of the Grenville regiment riding escort. The weather was fine with a few small clouds in the sky; a light breeze brought fresh air from the sea. It did not take them long to travel the four miles to Stratton. The carriage and soldiers were a fine sight as they arrived in the town. The carriage taking Rachael and her mother turned and went up the hill to the church entrance. The driver stopped at the church and Rachael was helped down by Daniel while the driver looked after her mother, they were escorted along the path with the not inconsiderable crowd of well-wishers cheering them as they passed by.

The church was full with family and friends and Will stood at the front near the alter awaiting the arrival of his bride to be. He looked over his shoulder at the gathering crowd and his eyes fixed on the family off to his left. It was his mother and father, his face lit up at the sight of them; they had not let him know that they would be there. The big man waving at him from behind his father he recognised as his elder brother. How did they get here? He was not to know that Rachael had written to them and told them of their plans. Will’s mother had insisted that they make the journey to see their youngest son married and had arrived the previous night. Will walked quickly across the isle and lifted his mother up in his arms. He shook his father’s shoulders and was embraced by his brother. It was so good to see them. His mother insisted that he return to his place and said she would see him later.

Once again back at the alter; Will awaited the arrival of his bride. The church was buzzing with the voices of the crowd until the bell began its long and loud ringing that announced the arrival of the bride. He could not resist looking back to see the minister with Rachael and Daniel entering the arched doorway.

It was a simple service with the exchanging of rings and the swearing of eternal loyalty and fidelity. Will spoke the words that were asked of him as if he were in a dream, he was surprised how quickly the service was over. They exited the church to great applause and walked with their family the few yards to the inn where the party was to begin.

Anthony Payne stood in the doorway, the giant Cornish-man was a great friend of both Will and Daniel. He could not resist scooping Rachael into his great arms. Her feet swung freely off the ground as he gave her a brotherly hug before realising her discomfort and returning her to the floor. They all laughed at his embarrassment. The party began and the Grenville family arrived to join the celebrations, for once they were not the centre of attention and Grace insisted that she and Bevill kept a low profile. Bevill did insist on making a toast to the bride and groom and the significance was not lost on Will when Bevill said that it was a pleasure to be at the wedding of his close friend.

The party continued late into the night, Will and Rachael eventually went to bed in the best room that Mrs. Payne had in the Inn.

The following morning the celebrations over everyone returned to their homes. The Grenville family with the soldiers and Daniel returned to Stowe and Will took Rachael along with her mother back to the cottage in the valley.

The weeks went by with everyone at the manor and the estates toiling to bring in the harvest and winter supplies of wood and all manner of supplies for the winter.

On one evening close to Christmas the wind picked up from the west, at first Will was not concerned but as darkness fell the storm was upon them, he was not to know it but it would prove to be the worst storm in living memory. He walked towards the sea only to be blown back by the sheer force of the wind, he had never known the like of it before the wind blew the rain horizontally into his face and even the stone walls of the cottage shuddered under its force. Lightening filled the air, Rachael and her mother cowered in the corner near the fire. The sound of the sea was thunderous and the massive waves were blown into the sky as they crashed over the rocks. Will was grateful for the walls of cottage which were more than a yard thick. The waves actually broke over the dam into the fresh water lake.

The sound was deafening, Will stood in the doorway watching the sea where the lightning flashes gave an instant sight of the huge plumes of water that rose more that a hundred feet into the air to crash half way up the cliff wall. Above the sound of the sea he heard another sound, it was different, a crashing thundering noise that was not made by the waves. He pulled his leather cape over his head and forced his way around the corner of the rocks to the base of the cliff. Here in a flash of lightening he could see something a few yards along the shore, another flash of lightening and he realised what it was he had seen, it was a ship. It looked like a two masted vessel but he could not tell as it was being driven onto the shore.

The tide was high and the ship could not escape the strength of the westerly wind which drove it unmercifully onto the rocks. Will forced his way towards the stricken vessel and was thrown to his knees by the force of the water; he dragged himself further up the shore so that he could no longer be reached by the waves. He could hear the screams of the crew above the roar of the sea. Suddenly he was hit by a huge wave and lost his footing again, he forced himself back up through the rolling pebbles as the retreating, water sucked at his legs almost dragging him back into deeper water.

Eventually he made it safely far enough up the shore to be out of the water but the shock of the strength of the sea made him realise there was nothing he could do for any of the crew on the ship. In the pitch darkness and Will for the first time ever was in fear for his life. He knew that he was at the base of the cliff and by placing his hands on the cliff he began to retrace his steps to the relative shelter where the cliff sloped inland towards the valley. Another flash of lightening lit up the sky and he was able to make out the shape of the cottage ahead. He made it back inside and slamming the door behind him collapsed onto his knees in exhaustion. Rachael came to assist him and get him out of his wet clothes while he told her of the tragedy that he had witnessed. They stoked the fire and added more wood, they would keep a good blaze going this night.  They were unable to sleep knowing what was going on outside, the noise of the wind and rain roared through the roof tiles and every gap in the window frames. Fortunately the structure was sound and the windows held against the battering. The storm raged on all the following day, so strong was the wind that despite several attempts by Will they were unable to leave the cottage. On the following morning as dawn broke there was a change in the weather, at last they could feel the wind begin to subside.

At last Rachael and Will thought it safe to venture out into the murky early morning light, the wind was still strong but the tide was now at its lowest point and the sea no longer pounded up the shore. They were amazed at the sight before them. The ship was broken in two halves the bow section was high and dry on the high water mark with the stern further down the beach close to the sea. One of the masts lay over side of ship with the canvas sails in tatters on the rocks,  while the second mast lay on the shore still attached by the ropes and rigging. The contents from its hold and wooden sections of the ship were strewn along the shore for as far as they could see. They walked around the wreck and Will found the dead body of a sailor half buried in the pebbles. There was no other sign of any other members of the crew.

Will told Rachael that he would have to go to get help there was nothing they could do on their own He told her to wait at the cottage and raced to get his horse. He rode as fast as he could but the trail was strewn with broken tree branches and the stream was a torrent from all the water running off the hillside. He bullied and cajoled the horse to go faster and when they came out of the forest he galloped out of the valley and on to the great house. It was still early in the morning and few people were about, he galloped through the yard and right up to the main door, leaping from his horse will rang hard on the bell rope causing a noise that roused the whole household. One of the house servants came to see who was causing the commotion, Will insisted that he went and got his master out of bed right away.

Bevill was always quickly alert and when he received the call from the servant he was immediately wide awake, he dressed quickly and came hurriedly to the main entrance where Will waited. Shipwrecks were nothing new along the coast but none had ever happened on Bevill’s land. He was well aware of the importance of such an event and sent out orders for all the servants to hitch up all the carts and horses that they could find and take them down to the valley. If this was indeed a cargo ship there could be great rewards for all. Bevill sent riders to Kilkhampton and Stratton to tell all those who had transport to make their way up the coast. A wreck was an occasion for all to share the spoils and he would need all the help he could get.  He was in no doubt that the cargo would have been spread far along the coast by the storm and another tide could sweep much of it away for ever, time was of the essence.  

As word spread through the population a stream of people began to make their way the mile downhill from Stratton to the Haven at Bude, once they reached the sea they walked north along the sands in the direction of the wreck which was almost five miles up the beach from the Haven. People came from Kilkhampton and made their way to the coast, they heading south along the cliff top in the direction of the wreck. The coast here was too rocky and dangerous to attempt walking along the shore. It would take them at least two hours trek along the cliffs but they were determined to help themselves to whatever they could salvage from the shipwreck. Those that could and had the transport travelled on their carts along the road to the Hamlet of Stibb. Here they knew they could find a track with access to the shore. Eventually they came to a halt, their route was blocked by fallen trees and they could take the carts no further, they unhitched the horses and walked them along the beach in search of the shipwreck, they would at least be of use as pack animals for anything they could find.

Bevill had his horse saddled and joined Will outside the big house, Daniel had heard of the wreck and had quickly dressed and saddled his horse to join the crowd that had gathered in the grounds. Bevill gave instructions for everyone to make their way to the sea shore and set off making his way as quickly as he could to the hidden valley. Many of the servants followed on foot as Will showed them the way down the trail towards the sea where he led the convoy around the lake towards the cottage. Once they had arrived the men dismounted and left their horses a distance away in the field. They walked the rest of the way along the beach to the shipwreck which was just a hundred yards away along the shore. They could see someone close to the ship. It was Rachael, she had been sorting through the piles of equipment and supplies that were strewn along the shore and was now standing close to the wreck, she stopped working and waved to the group of men approaching along the shore. The wind had dropped significantly and the tide was at its lowest point, now it was at least a hundred yards below the bow of the ship.  The cargo was strewn in all directions and the current had spread barrels and equipment far down the coast along the miles of sand.

Daniel and Bevill stood close to the bow section and Daniel said that he had seen this type of vessel before in Falmouth, it was a common enough cargo ship known as a Dutch Flute. From what he could remember it had a crew of about fifteen men. Bevill estimated its size at some eighty feet long, it was now in two halves, the bow section was still upright and wedged into the rocks. The stern was on its side several yards down the beach and much of it had been smashed to pieces by the sea. He walked around the wreck and could clearly see that much of its cargo was still aboard the bow section. By now his servants began to arrive and he sent them to forage and discover what the ship had been carrying. Daniel and Will clambered up the rope ladder that hung from the side near the bow onto the decking.

The bow of the ship and the front section had survived surprisingly well considering the ferocity of the storm and from the condition of the timbers Bevill could tell that this was not an old ship it could not be more than a couple of years since it had been built. 

As the morning wore on more and more people arrived and began gathering the contents of the ship. By midday there was a small army of men, women and children involved in searching the shore line.  They dragged much of what they could to a safe place above the high water line. Daniel spotted the great bulk of Anthony Payne who was busy harnessing ropes to an enormous barrel, its contents unknown at this time. He went over to him and they shook hands warmly. They had not met for a while being busy about their duties. The horse, assisted by the two men half rolled and dragged the barrel across the pebbles trying to avoid the sharpest of the rocks. Eventually Anthony was satisfied that they were far enough above the water line to stop and discover what the contents were. He had with him a mallet and wooden plug. He hammered the bung out of the barrel and a thick green liquid began to gush out, he quickly and expertly inserted the bung and hammered it back into place sealing off the flow. He put his hand into the liquid and held it to his nose, he rolled it between his fingers. It was oil, olive oil to be precise, he knew at once that this was a significant find, this oil was greatly prized and most costly to buy if it could be found at all. It came from a far off country and Anthony told Daniel that they would have to go and find Sir Bevill.

They found Bevill in what was left of the ship’s hold, he was directing his workers to collect everything that could be moved. He looked anxiously at the incoming tide and only hoped that the sea would not come in as far up the shore as it had during the storm.    It became apparent that the ship had been heavily loaded and the holds must have been completely full. Anthony told him of the oil and Bevill pointed out a dozen or more of the huge barrels that were still in the hold. They could not be shifted from where they were and it would require a great deal of work to drain the oil and transfer it all to other containers. There were markings burnt into the lids of the barrels and Bevill spent a long time trying to make out what the words meant, they were not in English and he was unsure of the language. Eventually he had success, the word ‘Lisbon’ was clear on one of the barrels and he deduced that the ship was from Portugal.  He sent word back to the manor for ropes and pulleys and for all manner of equipment to be brought down to the wreck. He turned to Daniel and questioned him at length regarding what he knew of this type of ship.

Daniel remembered that they carried at least four large cannon for defence. Bevill sent for Will he was to search the area around the ship and see if he could find any of the cannon, if they had been on the deck they were not there now. It did not take Will long to detect the first of the guns. It was wedged between two rocks a few yards from the stern section its barrel buried deep in the soft sand and close to the sea line. He examined it and came to the conclusion that it was as good as new. He returned to tell Bevill of his find and Bevill accompanied him back to where the cannon lay. He examined the barrel carefully it did not appear to be damaged in fact it looked almost new. It was an exciting find, it could be taken back to the manor and with a base built around it could bring into service with his regiment it would be a great asset to his armament. He remembered that Daniel had told him that the ships carried up to four such cannon and called several of his workers to him, he instructed them to leave what they were doing and to search up and down the shore, they were to look for other guns like the one that Will had found. He could not afford to leave the cannon where it was as the sea would soon bury it again and gave orders for it to be taken back to the cottage.

The items from the ship were impressive. Apart from the oil there were dozens of smaller barrels which they discovered contained various wines and a darker wine that Bevill decided was a good quality port. Other items like bails of cloth were soaked by the sea but he ordered that they be carried further up the beach, the men and women hurried to drag them back far enough to be safe from the advancing tide. Eventually the aft section of the ship was once again under water but the bow was still high and dry when the tide once again reached its highest point. By the time it was dark most of the ship’s contents had been salvaged. Three of the ship’s cannon had been found part buried in the sand and had been dug out, they were already being dragged up the beach. Bevill told the crowd that gathered around him that they could take much of what they had collected. He would take the larger items and the cannon. He told them that they could return on the following day and continue to salvage what they could find.

It had been a long day and Bevill ordered his workers to head back to Stowe with what they could carry, they would all return on the following day to continue carting the cargo to the manor. They left Daniel and Will at the cottage as the sun began to set and apart from the sound of the sea the valley became peaceful once again.

The following morning Will and Rachael were out and on the beach by the time the sun climbed over the hills. They were there long before the townsfolk began to arrive. They combed the beach as the tide was once again at its lowest point. They had done well from their salvage endeavours and they had acquired an array of objects that they could never have hoped to purchase. Several brass lamps and huge pieces of canvas from the sails. Various tools some of which Will could not think of a use for he put to one side, they were in search of other items that could be of use to them or sold on at the markets.

There was little left of the stern of the wooden ship after the second high tide but the bow section was still high and dry above the water line. Will decided that much of the wood could be salvaged and used to construct another building at the rear of their cottage. The rest he felt could be cut into sections and sold at the market.  As he foraged in the hold of the bow he discovered a long box with a sturdy lock. He went back to the cottage and collected a long iron bar. He returned to the box and forced the metal bar into the lock after a lot of effort the lock broke and opening the box discovered it contained a dozen muskets. They were of a design that he did not recognise and as they were packed in wax cloth he surmised that they were new and of the latest model. He made several journeys to the cottage with the weapons before people from the town began to arrive and began to dismantle everything that could be dismantled and moved from the wreck. Will and Rachael walked slowly down the coast for several hundred yards before Rachael spotted the top of a barrel sticking out from the wet sand, they set about digging the sand from around it until it was possible to lift it out. Rachael helped Will lift it onto his shoulder and they walked back to the cottage.

Will lay the barrel down so that the contents would not run out when he forced out the bung. Once it had been removed he gently raised the barrel so that Rachael could catch the contents in a large jug. It was deep red and Will wasted no time in taking a sip of the liquid. It was strong tasting and had a rich flavour. Will did not recognise the taste but knew that it was a type of wine. He poured some into a flask and resealed the barrel.

Anthony Payne arrived before midday with instructions from Bevill to arrange the transport of the remaining goods to the manor. Will spotted him as he arrived and called him over to the cottage. He offered Anthony a drink from the flask which he accepted readily. Taking a sip at first before gulping down a huge mouthful.

“That” he stated “was good” he took another drink. He told Will that it was without a doubt the finest claret that he had ever tasted and he would be happy to buy it from him. Will was not in a hurry to part with the barrel and told him that he would think about it. Later that evening he and Rachael drank heavily from the barrel it was indeed a most enjoyable taste. Unfortunately the following morning neither of them could get up from their bed the pain in their heads was intense, Will decided to sell the rest to Anthony, claret, they decided was not the drink for them. 

During the week that followed the wreck was gradually stripped of everything of the slightest potential value. Much of the wooden timbers were sawn up and taken away to be used in buildings and whatever was left would be stored for winter fuel. The cottage home of Will and Rachael was greatly improved by the contents of the ship, they collected bedding which they washed to remove the salt water. They had two large brass lamps and all manor new canvas from the sail locker. They managed to stack enough wood to provide them for the worst of the winter weather. For several weeks a number of men and women still came to search the shore, north and south of the wreck and the sea continued to uncovered more items which were taken away. Of the crew only three bodies were ever found and there were no survivors. Bevill arranged for them to be buried in the churchyard at Poughill which was the nearest village to the wreck site.

Christmas came and went and as the seasons changed they continued to work at their fishing, although now there were few fish to be had. The herring had long since gone and they managed to catch a few mackerel and whiting. They continued their attempts at gardening although eventually they had to concede that living so close to the sea was not conducive to producing a healthy crop, no sooner than their seedlings came up but the cold wind off the sea would turn them brown. Those that did survive were eaten by the rabbits or chickens and deer that were so abundant in the valley ate the rest. They decided that they would better spend their time fishing and hunting which was far more productive. 

Winter passed without heavy snow and the spring quickly turned into summer. The fish began to return and when they had enough Will and Rachael loaded the cart and went to the Stratton market. They had several baskets of salted fish and a half dozen rabbits to sell. Will dropped Rachael off at the Inn and continued down the hill to the market. It was early morning but already the market was becoming busy with traders setting up their stalls. The Inn was not yet open but Mrs. Payne came to open the door on hearing Rachael’s knocking. Rachael told Mrs. Payne that she did not feel well and she had put on a lot of weight. One look at Rachael’s swollen belly was enough for her to realise that her young friend was going to have a baby. Rachael was surprised at what Mrs. Payne had to say but agreed reluctantly when Mrs. Payne told her she would have to be examined by one of the women that delivered the babies in the town. She took Rachael to a cottage further down the street and knocked on the door. An elderly lady answered and Mrs. Payne explained why they had called on her. The old lady was short and very plump, she stood aside to allow the women into her room. Rachael could barely squeeze past her. Once in the dimly lit room the old woman asked Rachael to open her coat and stand in front of her. She ran her hands gently over Rachael’s middle. It did not take her long before she told them that the baby was well developed and would arrive in a couple of month or so.

Mrs. Payne thanked her and the two went back to the Inn. Mrs. Payne told Rachael that she should arrange to come and stay with her at the Inn, insisting that having a child was difficult enough without the problems that might occur with Will and her mother helping to deliver it at the cottage. Rachael agreed with her and they arranged for her to come back to the Inn during the following month. Rachael went to find Will and tell him her news. He was busy selling the fish which were in great demand. She took him to one side and whispered in his ear, he was shocked and speechless at what she had to say, having children was something that he had always considered but never expected that it to be about to happen.

They finished selling the fish and hitched up the cart for the ride back to the cottage stopping of at the big house of Stowe to tell Daniel the news. They found him in the stable with the horses, he had not expected  to see them there. They told him their news and he was surprised but also delighted for his sister and best friend, he would be an uncle. They decided that when Will took Rachael to stay at the Inn the two men would meet up and celebrate the event.

Rachael was in a hurry to tell her mother who was also delighted but had to tell her daughter that she had suspected as much but was also pleased at the prospect of becoming a grandmother.

On the morning of the second market day in June Rachael helped her mother get ready and all three of them set off early for Stratton. Will had loaded the cart, he had more fish to sell but he planned to finish early and meet up with David and Anthony Payne as well as Daniel at the Inn.

David and Daniel were already sitting in the main bar when Will arrived. David made him welcome and poured a large tankard of ale from which Will drank deeply. They sat and chatted into the evening when Mrs. Payne brought in a large jug of thick soup and a loaf of fresh bread.

Anthony arrived as they ate and shook Will warmly by the shoulders. He had heard the news from his mother. His great frame seemed to fill the room and he brought up a sturdy stool to sit on and joined the others at their table. His mother had heard his voice and brought him a large jug of soup and a loaf of bread, she knew his appetite and he would consume it all on his own.

Eventually Will told them he would have to take his leave of them and get Daniel’s mother back to the cottage. David would not hear of it and went to tell his wife that Will, Daniel and Anthony would be staying the night as well as the old lady. It was just as well that the Inn was not busy and Mrs Payne had a spare room for the two men, Anthony continued to keep his own room at the Inn even though he spent most of his time at Stowe. 

They drank and talked far into the night until the strong ale took its effect and they all staggered up the stairs to bed.

The following morning Anthony and Daniel escorted Will and his mother back as far as Stowe where Daniel left them and Will drove on down the valley to cottage.

Every couple of days he saddled his horse and rode to Stratton to check on Rachael’s progress but it was more than another three weeks before a rider came from Stratton and told him that the baby was coming. He quickly hitched up the cart and told Rachael’s mother to get ready, they made good time up the trial to Stratton and arrived at the Inn before the light began to fail. He sat Rachael’s mother in the big arm chair by the fire place and went into the bar where he waited with David while the women attended to Rachael in the front room upstairs.

David decided that it was time for them to have a drink and poured a large measure of brandy for them all, he had been keeping this special bottle for just such an occasion. The strong liquor settled their nerves as they continued to wait.

It was several hours and several drinks later when they heard screaming from the room above and Will feared for his wife. Eventually Mrs. Payne came down the stairs.  It was over, the baby was born, she told Will that it was a boy and Rachael was well. Will and Daniel hugged each other, David Payne was just as excited as Will. Will asked if he could see his son and he was shown up to the front room. Rachael was lying so still and white on the bed that he feared she was dead. Her eyes flickered and she smiled at him as he approached and her hand eased back the cover. On the pillow beside her was his baby, it was so tiny, he had no experience with infants and could not say anything, he stood there and put his hand out, gently stroking the little face. He leaned over and kissed Rachael on the cheek. Her eyes were once again closed. “You should let them rest now” Mrs. Payne suggested, Will nodded and went back down to the bar. David asked how they were and Will told them that they were fine. He was still in shock, he had a son.

It was a few days before Will was able to take Rachael and the baby home and by the time she was ready Will had built a small cot which fitted alongside their bed in the tiny bedroom at the cottage. He helped Rachael onto the cart and she held the baby to her chest. Her mother squeezed between her and Will and they made their way slowly back to the valley. It was strange for them to be on their own with the baby but Rachael’s mother felt rejuvenated at having a grandson and fussed around him constantly. Will sat with Rachael and held her hand and they spent many hours just looking at their son. They could not have been happier.

The seasons past quickly and everyone was busy working on the land. Bevill spent more and more of his time in London and he was exasperated at the antics of the senior members of the house and their relationship with the King. The King would not recognise Parliament’s decisions and since the Scottish campaign the work of government had been at a standstill.

Bevill had a strong feeling that the problem would not go away and his instincts were to continue the build-up of his regiment which was now a full five hundred men strong, consisting of pike men, musketeers and infantry. The foot soldiers were backed up by a formidable force of almost one hundred trained cavalry each man had a good heavy horse and was equipped with the short musket that was so effective at close range. The upkeep of this force was putting an ever greater strain on his finances and although he was a wealthy man he was now borrowing more than he was comfortable with. His lands were becoming heavily mortgaged. 

CHAPTER 14 The War 1642/1643

Bevill returned from London. He was depressed at the failure of the King and Parliament to come to an agreement and felt that he would be better off looking after his estates and stepping back from events in London.

The leader and most vociferous of the Parliamentarians was a man called Oliver Cromwell. Bevill had met him on a number of occasions and had the opinion that this was a dangerous person to have as an opponent. A devout and religious man had extended his influence thought the members and was by now extremely powerful.

The letter arrived from Hopton and the news was bad. Parliament soldiers had been sent to arrest the King. The King’s soldiers had fought back and the King had retreated out of London. There was no escaping the reality of the situation. What Bevill had predicted had come to pass.  There would be war, there was no longer any chance of avoiding armed conflict. Parliamentarian forces were being mobilized in the major cities and those siding with the King were called enemies of the state. Civil war was upon them. Reading the words of the letter caused the hair on Bevill’s neck to prickle. The event that he had feared for so long was now happening.

As soon as Hopton had received word of the coming hostilities and he had taken the precaution of moving his regiment from their base in Cornwall to the bank of the river Tamar on the outskirts of Plymouth from where he had written to Bevill.  It was close to Christmas 1642, the weather was cold and rain was being blown in on the strong westerly wind. Hopton’s scouts reported that dozens of government reinforcements had begun to arrive in the city. To avoid a surprise attack he decided to leave his position on the Plymouth side of the river and to cross to the Cornish side where he intended to set up his command post still within sight of the city. His officers took control of a large rowing boat and without the knowledge of the Plymouth garrison were soon across the river. The remainder of the army were forced to march inland along the river bank for several miles before they could find a bridge where they could cross into Cornwall. They set off at dawn and once across the river turned south and arrived at Saltash where the advance party had already set up their camp in the late evening.

The Parliamentarian scouts had watched the Royalist march away, thinking they were leaving they were unaware that they had arrived on the other side of the river until they observed the many camp fires that were now burning in the distance. The forces gathered in Plymouth were led by Colonel Ruthin. Already Governor of Plymouth he was a highly accomplished and ambitious soldier. He had already devised a plan where he intended to surround the Cornish and take them by surprise. He would quickly defeat them with his greatly superior numbers, he was absolutely beside himself with furry when he was informed that Hopton had crossed the river and was now out of his reach.  Even though they thought they were safe on the other side of the river he knew that with his army of heavily armed soldiers, and his ships in the harbour, he would still be able to clear the Cornish rabble out once and for all. He studied the map of the Saltash area and decided that it would not be possible to march around to the other side as the Cornish had done with any chance of surprising them but devised a plan to attack across the river in a fleet of small boats.

Once he had routed the Cornish he would make the town of Saltash his base in Cornwall. Ruthin ordered his warships into the Tamar and the battery of cannon on the Plymouth fortress to fire across the river. The ships sailed out of Plymouth and up the river anchoring mid-stream within easy range of the Cornish river bank. Once the ships opened fire the cannons on the fortress wall began their bombardment, firing a continuous barrage onto the area where Hopton’s forces had made their base. The bank of the river where the Royalists were camped was heavily wooded and as a necessity the soldiers has spread themselves thinly among the trees, Hopton had also warned them of a possible assault, not knowing from which direction it might come.  Even so the roar of the cannons from the fortress and the amount of fire from the ships took them by surprise. Once they had realised that the cannon balls and shot were having little effect the soldiers remained hidden behind the trees, they were waiting for the cannons to stop firing and stood ready for the attack that they knew was sure to follow.

During the canon bombardment Ruthin sent his soldiers across the river in small boats. The cannons eventually fell silent and the Royalist soldiers waited for the rowing boats to get closer, they were ordered to hold their fire until the enemy began to come ashore. At the soldiers began to beach the boats the Cornish were given the order to open fire and poured their musket fire onto the helpless enemy. They charged at the boats and killed many of the soldiers before they could wade out of the water and onto the riverbank.  Those that could, rowed their boats back across the river; the attack was repelled with heavy losses among the Parliamentarian soldiers. Ruthin realised his mistake and was forced to reappraise his thoughts on the enemy. Not such a rabble as he had expected and he had to admit a grudging respect for Hopton’s tactics as a leader.  He regrouped his force on the Plymouth side of the river. He had no intention in making the same mistake again and this time he sent for further reinforcements from the army that he knew were already massing in Devon and Dorset. Two regiments made up of Cavalry and musketeers arrived in Plymouth within days of his request which almost doubled the troops available to him.

With his now greatly increased numbers he once again ordered an attack across the river by four warships and several heavy cannon that had been brought forward to the water’s edge on the Plymouth shore.

Hopton watched the build-up on the far shore and ordered his soldiers to begin their retreat. They left in small groups keeping away from the shore and hidden from the far bank by the thickness of the trees. After several hours of pounding by the cannon the soldiers felt confident that they could make their attack. When Colonel Ruthen’s forces arrived across the river the Royalists were nowhere to be seen.

Ruthin was beside himself with anger once again as he realised that he had allowing the Royalists to escape. He sent soldiers into the towns and surrounding villages ordering them to recruit all the men for his infantry. Any that refused were to be hanged. The soldiers found that most men had gone into hiding and there were few left in the area of fighting age which only added to Ruthen’s anger.

Back in Plymouth he received a letter from Cromwell’s office informing him that he was to be replaced in the spring by the Earl of Stamford. To ensure his advancement he knew he had to add to his list of successful campaigns before Stamford arrived. He wasted no time in ordering his forces to march into Cornwall. The weather remained wet and cold as they advanced and although they met a few royalist patrols they were not engaged by a serious force.

Hopton nor his soldiers had any desire to meet the Parliamentarian army in such conditions so it was that Ruthin rode his horse into Liskeard at the front of his army unopposed and set about making it a fortress for his occupation of the county.  Their every movement was closely watched by the Royalists scouts who reported back to Hopton at regular intervals.

The Christmas of 1642 passed without serious incident and Hopton had his patrols of riders covering the whole county gathering information on the enemy’s movements.

 As the reports came into Hopton’s headquarters of the build-up of forces under Lord Stamford in Devon it became clear that it would be possible for their position to come under attack on two fronts. If Lord Stamford continued marching his army through Devon towards the North of Cornwall and Ruthen’s army advanced on them from the centre of the county they could trap the Cornish forces between them.

It was then in mid-January 1643 that Hopton had an amazing stroke of luck. A ferocious storm blew up from the south west and three heavily laden ships heading for Plymouth were forced to shelter in Falmouth harbour. The ship’s captains were unaware that the town was a Royalist stronghold and sailed their ships into port where they moored alongside the quay and were captured without a fight.

On board the Royalists discovered weapons and supplies as well as cabin trunks full of gold and silver coins. With this unexpected cash Hopton paid the soldiers what was owing to them and gave then an advance on their wages. He had enough stores and weapons to re-equip much of his force before the coming battles. The moral of the Royalists was at its highest and they readied themselves for the coming fight. Hopton sent word to his officers to join him with their forces at the estate of Lord Mohun at Bocannoc to the east of Loswithiel in the heart of Cornwall.

Bevill Grenville sent word to all his men, many of whom were scattered across the countryside living and working on the land. They were soon gathered at Stowe where Bevill addressed them and told them that there was to be war. It came as a shock to most because none of them had been kept informed of events in London. His regiment of almost one hundred strong cavalry and five hundred musketeers and pike men were well trained and eager to set off and get into the action.

They left stow in the early morning through Stratton and onto the road to Bodmin. They made good time despite the weather conditions and marched on through wind and rain arriving at Bocannoc on the 18^th January. The soldiers came from all parts of Cornwall to form the five regiments of the Cornish army. Sir Nicholas Slaning had raised a regiment of foot soldiers from his estates and the towns in the south of the county. Colonel Trevanion came from his estate to the east of Wadebridge with another 700 foot soldiers and musketeers.  Sir John Berkeley from the south arrived ahead of Bevill with his cavalry, more than a hundred dragoons on their heavy horses. Banners were carried at the head of the regiments. It was an amazing sight. Never before had so many Cornish-men gathered as one army.

The commanders held their council of war and were all in agreement that they could not afford to allow Lord Stamford and Ruthin to join forces against them or to split their forces to engage them on two fronts. They decided that their best course of action was to attack Ruthin at Liskeard which was less than 20 miles to the east of their current position.

Ruthin had word that the Cornish were gathering at Loswithiel and decided that the glory of beating the Royalists would be his. His orders were to hold Liskeard until Stamford arrived but he gathered his army of cavalry and infantry and marched out to take the battle to the enemy.

The two forces came to face each other on the open country near Braddock Down; they took up positions on hilly ground on either side of a narrow valley. Each side had a similar number of forces, around 4,000 strong. They began exchanging musket fire and skirmishing without either side wanting to lose the advantage of the high ground. Ruthen’s forces were not aware that Hopton had brought two cannon with him and they were taken by surprise when the guns began firing from a small copse of trees on the hilltop.

The first volley from the cannon was the signal to Bevill who rode his horse down the hill at the head of his regiment of infantry. The infantry were in turn led by Anthony Payne, for all his great size Anthony was quick on his feet, he charged at a run behind the horse of his master, his bellow was like that of a charging bull and it put fear into the solders that stood in front of him. Bevill crashed his horse into the line of stunned soldiers, swinging his sword in a wide arc it cut a soldier through the shoulder, in seconds the horse was through the line.

Anthony followed Bevill cutting with his sword in one hand and his huge axe in the other. The enemy fell back from the onslaught, they watched in disbelief as they realised that they were under attack from the front and at the same time the Royalist cavalry attacked from both sides. Taken completely by surprise and the ferocity of the attack the Parliamentary forces fell back in total disarray. Some of the musketeers fired their muskets but most turned and ran back up the hill scattering in all directions. Ruthin realised that he had unwittingly entered a clever trap and set his horse into a headlong run away from the battlefield.

When the foot soldiers saw their leaders riding away those that had intended to fight turned and in a state of fear and confusion fled after them. The royalists followed them, harassing them all the way back to the outskirts of Liskeard.

Anthony was breathing heavily when he stopped to watch the running soldiers, his job was done he had killed more than a dozen solders single handed and put the fear of god into the rest, the legend of the Cornish giant was born.

The Cornish population of Liskeard were soon aware of the demise of the hated Parliamentarian forces and came out of their houses to attack the fleeing soldiers as they entered the town. They showed no mercy and shortly after, Hopton’s advance cavalry rode into Liskeard unopposed. They gathered the remaining Parliamentarians soldiers into groups and counted over a thousand prisoners. Ruthin and his cavalry had charged through the town and kept going, eventually reaching Saltash on the banks of the Tamar River by late evening.

Delighted by way his forces had beaten the Parliamentarians Hopton ordered them to regroup and follow Ruthen’s forces to Saltash at the same time he sent a regiment to face the Earl of Stamford who had arrived at Launceston to the north. When Stamford got news of the defeat of Ruthin and the advancing force or Cornish soldiers he turned his army back and hurriedly retreated into Devon here he established his headquarters on the high ground at Tavistock on the edge of Dartmoor.

Hopton arrived at Saltash on the following morning and ordered his forces to attack what was left of Ruthen’s army, after a brief but bloody battle Ruthen’s cavalry abandoned their horses and took to the boats that had arrived to take them over to Plymouth and the safety of the fortified city.

Again the Royalists were successful in driving the Parliamentarians out of Cornwall. They were now full of confidence having barely lost a man in the encounters, they regrouped and marched inland to where they could cross the river and attack the soldiers that were garrisoned in the towns around Plymouth. This proved to be much more difficult in practice as the enemy put up solid resistance. Grenville and his regiment were in the thick of the fighting and there were many casualties on each side. He received daily reports from the many dispatch riders who were travelled between the forces. The mortality of himself and his men was brought home to him with the news that his great friend Sidney Godolphin was killed when his patrol was attacked by a force of dragoons near the moorland town of Oakhampton.

Hopton soon realised that he could not keep his force in Devon where they were spread out too far to maintain control. They were coming under more organised and increasing attacks from the garrison in Plymouth as the Parliamentarians increased in confidence. Reluctantly he ordered the soldiers to retreat back into Cornwall.

Both armies were exhausted and running short of supplies and messages were exchanged between the leaders who agreed a truce for a month.  At the end of the period of truce the Parliamentarian army of more than 3,500 infantry and horse soldiers made a surprise attack on the Cornish army. This time they were led by Major General James Chudleigh who force marched his men to Launceston where they came face to face with Hopton’s infantry and musketeers. The Royalists had fortified the hill and Hopton sent riders out to all parts of the county asking for assistance, while the battle raged around the steep slopes of the hill and Hopton began to fear that his position might be overrun and was greatly relieved as the reinforcements began to arrive, among them Bevill Grenville’s cavalry. It was late in the day but with the presence of fresh troops Hopton ordered a counter attack and Bevill’s cavalry charged the exhausted Parliamentary soldiers from their flank, they fell back, unable to continue the fight and once again found themselves making a disorderly retreat into Devon.

The battered Royalists were themselves too exhausted to pursue the enemy, the officers were well aware that their own losses were considerable. 

There respite was short lived however as Hopton decided to follow the fleeing army and at first light on the following morning, he sent an advance guard of his personal mounted dragoons followed by several hundred of the slower moving foot soldiers after the Parliamentarians.

For once Hopton had made a strategic mistake, General Chudleigh had already regrouped much of his force and was ready for the Royalists. His cavalry attacked the Dragoons charging down on them from the hills at Oakhampton. The surprise attack caused the Royalists to turn their horses and escape the way that had come. Unfortunately their headlong flight took them into their own advancing foot soldiers causing chaos. Hopton ordered the army to hurriedly take up positions in the rocks and scrubland on the edge of Dartmoor. It was a wild and unpleasant place to have a battle but now he had little choice. The Parliamentarians were bent on revenge and charged the Royalist positions again and again.  The battle raged all day and into the night when to make matters worse the weather deteriorated, heavy rain and winds came in from the north battering the soldiers. They were unable to use their muskets and in the dark as they could not tell friend from foe.

The wagons were bogged down and the cavalry found it impossible to manoeuvrer among the rocks and ditches. It was the turn of the Cornish to feel the bitter taste of defeat. They withdrew from the moors in a disorderly retreat leaving behind several of their wagons with much of their stores as well as most of the powder and shot for the cannons.

Bevill ordered his cavalry to reform and make another attack on the advancing Parliamentarian soldiers in an attempt to give the Royalists time to escape. His men engaged the foot soldiers but they had the advantage of the rocky ground and Bevill was forced to retreat yet again but the action of the cavalry gave the artillery riders time to withdraw dragging their cannons behind their heavy horses. Bevill’s action had given the running soldiers time to get out of range of the Parliamentarians who did not press on their attack, Bevill soon realised that his troop of cavalry had suffered several killed and more than a dozen badly wounded in the encounter.

It was not until sometime later that Hopton was informed that the wagon carrying his personal effects along with his official letters had been left behind and he had to assume that they were now in enemy hands. The knowledge that the letter from the King had been with his papers was most distressing. It carried orders for him and his army to meet up with the Earl of Hereford and Prince Rupert in Somerset and this information was also in enemy hands, it was a bitter blow.

Sir Bevill Grenville and his regiment left the battlefield returning slowly to North Cornwall and the big house, it was not long before the barracks and outhouses at Stowe had become a hospital for the many wounded. Some of the wounded soldiers had lost limbs and a five more died in the following days.

Lady Grace was astonished at the number of soldiers, many of whom she knew personally had been killed and there was no sign that the war was over. She went each day into the hospital and did what she could to comfort the men. On one occasion she witnessed the surgeon cutting off the leg of one her servants. This was a man who had been with her for years and she had become very fond. She was physically sick in the yard. She forced herself back into the room and held the hand of the man as she watched him die in front of her. The smell of the room was too much and she had to leave, that smell would remain in her memory for ever.

She ordered all the staff to assist in caring for the men. Many of the wives came from their homes and assisted where they could, preparing food and giving comfort to those widowed. It was a sad time for all but Bevill and his officers had little time to morn.

A rider arrived with a letter from Hopton informing Bevill that the Earl of Stamford was mustering an army at Torrington only thirty miles to the west of the great house of Stowe. He could be on them within days.

The regiment was put on full alert with all the fit men re-equipped with powder and ammunition. The house was fortified and strategic defences put in place. If it came to it this would be a fight to the death and men women and children would be called on to defend their homes.

The Earl of Stamford had indeed received the captured papers from the King to Sir Ralph Hopton and now he knew that he had to stop the Cornish army from making the rendezvous in Somerset where together with Prince Rupert they would contribute to a powerful army.

His confidence in his own ability was such that he ignored the advice of his officers. He could imagine a great victory; he would go down in history as the general that defeated the Cornish army of the King.  He sent the majority of his cavalry under the command of Sir George Chudleigh to seize Bodmin in the knowledge that from there they could control the Cornish heartland and Hopton would be forced to remain in Cornwall and fight him on Cornish soil. He firmly believed that he would defeat the remnants of the Cornish army in the north of the county. He force marched his army of foot soldiers into North of Cornwall crossing the border near Holsworthy, it was the second week of May 1643.

The weather was fine with clear skies and they made good time. The march was long and hard on the soldiers and the heat of the midday sun burned down on the marching men. They still wore the heavy clothing and equipment that was their issue and the weight of it along with all their equipment sapped their energy to such an extent that by the time they arrived and made camp north of Stratton they were totally exhausted.

Hopton was himself in a difficult situation, the force available to him was limited as he had sent soldiers to garrison the towns under his command further south but in doing so he had very few soldiers in the area that he could muster before Stamford arrived in North Cornwall. What could the Cornish army do now? Scouts reported on the strength of the force heading towards them and that they had to confront Stamford’s army of some 4,500 foot soldiers and 200 cavalry marching into Cornwall.

Hopton sent a rider to Bevill Grenville advising him of the situation and requesting his presence at Efford Manor, the building was little more than a large house but it was also the home of the Arundel family, old friends and staunch supporters of the Royalist cause. The manor was close to the sea and would be difficult to attack from any direction, an ideal place to set up his headquarters. The manor house stood beside the river Neet and close to the sea at Budehaven, the village was little more that a group of fishermen cottages on the shore of the Atlantic and was just over a mile south of Stratton. The fishermen living in this remote community were surprised by the arrival of so many soldiers and came out to greet them.

They knew little of the war but were true Cornish men and would support their countrymen. The army made camp on the open ground alongside the beach and in and around a long expanse of sand dunes. With their backs to the sea the Cornish would make their last stand. The officers met at the manor and Hopton told them of their situation. He ordered riders to go as fast as they could and summon the troops that were spread across the county to come to him without delay, he had already managed to recall some of his men and soon he had gathered almost half his total force. Around 2,500 foot soldiers with pikes and muskets along with almost 500 cavalry which included Bevill Grenville’s elite force who had arrived hurriedly from Stowe which was no more than six miles to the north.

Hopton’s scouts had reported back that Stamford had set up his position at the top of a hill a mile to the north of Stratton. Here they reported that they had counted several regiments of foot soldiers no less than 4,000 strong. A number of cannon had been positioned along the ridge but they noticed that they had not seen the full force of cavalry and they estimated the horses to be less than 200. This confirmed the report received earlier that the main cavalry force of Stamford’s army had been seen heading to the south two days earlier.

Hopton and the senior officers considered the options and came to the conclusion that they had to confront the Parliamentarians here and prevent them marching further into Cornwall. If they could not defeat them here then the war in Cornwall would be lost.

The army would attack at dawn of the following morning which was May 16^th. To leave it later was to invite Stamford to take the initiative and attack with his forces down the hill where they would catch the Cornish army in open ground.

The decision was made to advance up the hill taking advantage of the heavily wooded terrain and charge the lines of foot soldiers from four directions. Bevill allocated scouts to each group. This was their home and over the years they had explored and hunted every inch, they knew every path and trail that existed up to the hill where the enemy waited.

The foot soldiers were divided into four parties each of around five hundred men. Several small groups of cavalry were deployed to harass the enemy wherever they found them while the main group of horsemen would remain on the plain until they were ordered into action.

Although it was mid-May the night air was cold and the soldiers found little sleep. They knew that being outnumbered two to one the battle would be fierce. There would be no quarter asked or given. This was Cornwall and they would defend it to the death and the fear of death was with them all, it would not leave them until they began the assault.

The horses were spread out in groups across the sand dunes. They were saddled and ready for action. The riders could not consider saddling the horses in the dark should they come under attack. Some riders rested and wrapped their heavy coats around them in an attempt to keep warm against the cold wind from the sea. Others checked their weapons and sharpened their swords for the hundredth time.

Bevill paced up and down in his room at the manor his brain busy with thoughts of the coming action. He lay on the bed and his thoughts turned to wife and family, it was too much. He got up and put on his tunic; he strapped his sword to his side and left his room. The house was mostly silent and he took the side stairs to the inner court yard. He headed across the yard where a voice called out “Who is it”??

“It is Sir Bevill Grenville” he replied

“Pass sir” the voice came out of the dark, he never saw the person behind the voice.

Bevill was taken by surprise as the voice came from the shadows. He was aware that the sentries and pickets were everywhere. Hopton had insisted that the pickets were to be a hundred yards ahead of the army and 50 yards apart as well as in the manor grounds.  He had determined that with this arrangement the army would be alerted should any of the enemy soldiers attempt a sneak attack at night.

From here on Bevill was more careful, he intended to seek out his regiment but there was no moon and the darkness was intense and he had no desire to be shot by his own men.

 He could not see his hand in front of his face and he went down on one knee outside the manor wall, he remained still until his eyes become accustomed to the dark. Eventually he could make out shadows of the hill off to the north. He walked slowly and silently through the sand of the dunes which softened his footsteps. He knew his men were in the dunes close to the sea and a slight shimmer off the waves indicated the direction of the ocean. He made no sound as he traversed the groups of foot soldiers sitting and lying in the dunes.  A sudden click just in front of his face brought him to an abrupt stop. He knew the cock of a pistol. A shadowy figure stood in his path. The picket whispered “word” and Bevill froze, he knew a wrong answer would be his death. He had barely listened when the planning for the deployment of the sentries when the pass words were discussed, now he realised that his life could depend on his next word, what it was?  “Cornwall” he hissed the sweat breaking on his brow, his brain had somehow recalled the word.

 The gun at his head was un-cocked and with that Bevill decided to return to the manor; there was no way he could find his men in the total blackness. He also concluded that wandering around with the sentries on such high alert he was more likely to be shot by his own side, a fate he would not relish.

He spent the rest of the night in a fitful sleep and was awake as the first rays of daylight gradually crept across the valley. He looked out across the sand dunes, there was little to see as a low mist hung across the plain, he knew it would burn off as the warmth of the sun increased but by then the army would be on the move.

He gathered his belonging and went to the main hall to join the other officers. Ralph Hopton and Nicholas Slanning were already there and greeted him solemnly as he came into the room. It was close to five a.m. the room was lit by candles in a row of candlesticks at the centre of the large oak table. The curtains remained closed.

The plan had been made during the previous day and there was little more to be said. The men had little stomach for the food that had been laid out for them on the table.

They heard footsteps from the hall and the three were joined by Colonel Digby, Trevanion and Lord Mohun. They were soon joined by the last two senior officers, Sir Thomas Bassett and Sir John Berkeley. The men gathered around Lord Hopton. At this time the talking was done. They shook his hand in turn and he spoke for the first time “With god’s help we will take the day. Now let us do it” The group of officers left the manor through the front entrance. Their mounts were ready saddled and waiting made ready by the stable workers. It was now just light enough to see and the officers rode out to join their regiments.

Chapter 15 The Battle of Stamford Hill

The sand dunes were part of a great expanse of open space that spread along the coast line, to the west the angry sea brought in by the strong westerly winds caused the waves to crash onto the rocks and roared up the beach while the breeze carried the salt spray well inland. The sand dunes were held together by a thick covering of course grass which was hardly enough to grow along the shoreline, despite the salt in the soil, the grass had spread inland for a distance of several hundred yards colonizing the shore. Little else would grow here because of the steady build-up of salt deposits and wind driven sand which had continued for many years.

Half a mile inland the terrain changed dramatically and as the gradient increased there was less salt build up in the soil and as a result other plants grew in abundance. Different species of trees were well established. Within a few yards further inland the hill was covered in a thick almost impenetrable forest of oak and cedar trees that covered the hill rising gradually upwards for more than a mile, the woodland continued until the trees came to an abrupt end near the summit of the hill.  Here the land opened onto an almost level area that made up the top of the hill. This was the point that the Earl of Stamford had decided to make camp and amass his army. He had chosen his ground carefully as behind him the hill fell away sharply to the north of his position into a heavily wooded valley with steep sides and strewn with large rocks. Through the centre of the valley the ground was a flat marshy expanse of grass land with a narrow stream at its centre. He concluded that it would be virtually impossible for horses to cross this area; the Royalists would not be able to attack him from this direction. He arranged his forces into regiments along a half mile front facing south a hundred yards away from the tree line, this would be the killing ground.

His scouts had told him of the numbers that he would encounter and with the knowledge that he outnumbered the enemy by more than two to one he dismissed all thoughts of planning an exit route for a retreat. His forces were facing down the hill and that was the direction he would take. His strategy was simple, he would wait until the royalists had committed themselves to the open ground in front of him at which point he would decimate them with musket fire before ordering his soldiers to charge down the hill and overwhelm his enemies.

Lord Hopton had decided to lead his regiment towards the enemy through the centre of the plain. His local scouts had mapped out a route through the dense woods following a tiny stream which flowed from the high ground. With Lord Mohan at his side he raised his hand and the regiment set off slowly travelling in column through the narrow gap in the trees.

The soldiers of Sir Bevill Grenville were ready. Anthony Payne moved among the men encouraging and goading them into action. Thoughts of the cold and their stiff joints were miraculously gone, replaced by the nervous energy brought on by the prospect of the battle ahead.

Grenville and Berkeley set off at the head of their regiments of foot and a platoon of heavy dragoons, they followed a well-known route to the west and planned to come upon the enemy from the Stratton town direction, Trevanion and Slanning took a trail within sight of Grenville’s soldiers and would attack close to Hopton’s force while Godolphin and Bassett would take the lane to the north east through the lands of Broomfield manor, this meant that they would be on Stamford’s right as they reached the crown of the hill.

The reserve cavalry were to remain patiently awaiting their orders to advance or to engage the enemy should they launch a surprise attack.

As Hopton expected it would be impossible to reach the enemy before they were sighted.  More than two thousand soldiers moving through the trees would be detected at some time. He was surprised that the enemy scouts did not however detect them until the advance party had reached the end of their tree cover. A cry rang out as at last they were spotted. From just a few hundred yards away Hopton could hear the shouts from the Parliamentarian camp. As soon as enough of his forces had formed a line in the open ground he ordered them to charge, his army advanced with a mighty roar from the men. The Parliamentarians roared in reply and opened fire with their muskets before their pike men charged forward. The company of Royalist pike-men stood firm while lines of musketeers took up their positions in front of them and opened fire at the advancing soldiers, falling back behind the pike men once their muskets were discharged, to give themselves a chance to reload.

The Parliamentarians were quick to respond, they had also been ready and slept little through the night fearful of a surprise attack. The Royalist pike men were given the order to charge and the mass of foot soldiers from both armies met in the centre of the field and the noise of fighting men filled the air. The muskets were not accurate but in volley fire they were devastating. Lines of royalists opened fire and the first ranks of the advancing enemy crashed to the ground as the shot pounded into them. The Parliamentarian musketeers opened fire once again and dozens of Royalist soldiers suffered the same fate.

 Hopton directed his forces with runners who dodged their way through the fighting men to deliver instructions. Stamford ordered his cannon to fire over his forces at the lines of soldiers who were still advancing from the trees.

Soon after the first attack Hopton’s advance force began to fall back, the sheer weight of numbers of Parliamentarians advancing in line were akin to a great wave sweeping down the hill. It was fortunate that this was the time that the regiments of Royalists from the west and east arrived at the battle scene. On seeing the enemy the Royalist let out their mighty battle cry which was heard above the noise of the fighting. The foot soldiers broke into a run and attacked Stamford’s force from both flanks.

Stamford was forced to hurriedly divide his forces from the frontal attack to beat off this new threat from the flanks giving Hopton time to regroup his main force.

The battle was ferocious, the smoke from a thousand muskets drifted across the battlefield, the infantry were engaged in a bloody hand to hand battle, eventually the Parliamentarian cannon fell silent, the gunners were unable to fire as they were could no longer separate friend from foe.

As the day wore on both sides were exhausted and in the afternoon Stamford ordered his small force of cavalry into the fight. At this point he was mindful of the mistake he had made in splitting his army and sending so many of his cavalry to take Bodmin.

Although the heavy horses could not easily penetrate the sharp wooden spears of the pike-men they caused havoc where they caught soldiers in the open. The Royalists were gradually forced to retreat until their backs were to the trees. Bevill dismounted from his horse and joined Anthony Paine as the regiment fought to keep the enemy from overrunning their position.

By late afternoon Hopton was informed that there was little ammunition and powder left. He could see Bevill Grenville and his regiment slowly retreating in front of his position. During a brief spell where both sides fell back to recover and regroup Hopton sent a runner to fetch Bevill to him. He ordered Bevill to go and bring in the reserve cavalry. Bevill collected his horse and rode at a gallop back down through the woods to the sand dunes by the sea and the waiting cavalry. He told Colonel Digby of his orders and Digby in turn ordered the advance. The five hundred mounted soldiers responded with their battle cry, and urging their horses into a steady gallop as  they formed a column which followed Bevill and Colonel Digby up the trail through Broomhill manor. This route would allow the horses to reach the battle field within minutes and would bring them out onto the open ground on Stamford’s right flank.

The royalist cavalry broke from the woods and quickly formed into a formidable line more than a hundred yards long.  Bevill ordered the charge and the cavaliers kicked the horses which flew forward at a full gallop. The sight of hundreds of heavy horse bearing down on them, banners flying and the screams from the cavaliers send cold shivers of fear into the Parliamentarian troops, they were now in disarray, and they had no answer to fast moving horses that charged towards them. Bevill led the charge and galloped through the ranks of soldiers as they attempted to get out of the way. Cutting and thrusting as he went, he could see before him a soldier holding the standard of the Parliamentarian army; the soldier threw down the standard and turned to run. He did not get far  as there was no way he could outrun the horses.

The enemy scattered in all directions, The Earl of Stamford could not believe the sight. Grenville and the charging mass of cavalry were quickly within yards of him. His own soldiers were scattering in all directions. He knew the battle was lost and turned his horse’s head. He kicked it into a gallop and set off to the south with his entourage of officers, who seeing his actions followed in close pursuit. Many of the exhausted Parliamentarian soldiers threw down their weapons and awaited their fate. A huge roar went up from the Royalist forces and Hopton knew that it was over. The fight to save Cornwall was won. Bevill dismounted from his horse and retrieved the standard from the ground where the fleeing soldier had thrown it.

The Parliamentarian soldiers could see their officers riding off to the south and knew it was over. They began to lay down their arms. The Cornish rounded them up into groups and ordered them to sit on the grass with their hands on their head. They set soldiers to guard them but the Parliamentarians were well beaten and too exhausted to argue. The Cornish were also exhausted but the euphoria of victory kept them going.

Bevill carried the Parliamentary standard across the field to where Hopton and several officers had dismounted to rest. He handed the banner to Hopton. Hopton threw his arm around Bevill’s shoulders a show of affection and relief that he had never know before. The two men stood in solemn silence, there was no need for words, this was a moment to savour.

The noise of battle quickly subsided and the thick cloud of burnt powder smoke was blown away on the breeze. Bevill sent riders into Stratton to tell the people of the victory and bring as many back with them as they could find out to the battle site. The bodies of both armies were strewn across the length and breadth of the hill. Dozens of wounded men still lay unattended on the ground their cries ringing out across the field.

It was not long before the women from the town began to arrive and set about attending to their own wounded soldiers as well as the enemy, now they were just men with dreadful injuries. They collecting weapons, armour and clothing from the dead and stacked the equipment into piles. By now it was almost dusk, there was little more they could do in the dark. They returned to their homes but the soldiers would remain on the site that night. The surgeon and several men and woman continued to attend to the wounded, by the light of lanterns, others were carried to the camp fires where their comrades did their best for them, many died during the night.

The exhausted Cornish soldiers managed to gather wood and made fires; they heated water and cooked the remains of their rations. Several of them banded together to make soup of whatever they had in large iron pots hung over the fires. Everything they could find from the stores left behind by the fleeing army was now there for them to use. They found several large slabs of salted beef which they cooked and ate with thick dried bread. When they had eaten their fill they allowed the prisoners to eat what was left and gave them water from buckets brought up by the women in the town. As darkness enveloped the field the men sat in groups around their fires wrapped in blankets and heavy coats, many slept a deep sleep born of total exhaustion.

Bevill rode the short distance to Stowe along with Hopton and the senior officers; here they would be entertained in the great hall.   The house staff set about cooking a lavish feast. The ale and wine flowed from Bevill’s ample cellar and the officers ate and drank until they were all too drunk and tired to continue. They were shown to the lavish guest quarters where each had a separate room with attending servant. They enjoyed a night of rest that they had not experienced for a very long time.

Hopton was up and dressed soon after dawn. He had never required a great deal of sleep and he surprised the night staff who, upon his arrival in the dining room roused the kitchen servants to prepare his breakfast. He was joined by Bevill shortly after, upon which Bevill sent servants to wake the other officers and ask for them to join him.

The officers were soon dressed and come down to the breakfast room where they enjoyed a hearty meal before they left Stowe, it was still early when their horses were made ready for them at the front of the house where they mounted and rode steadily along the four miles to the hill above Stratton where the battle had taken place.

The soldiers were stirring from their sleep when Hopton and the officers arrived at the battle site. They observed the poor condition of their forces and set about organising the troops into parties with their orders for the day. The Cornish soldiers made the prisoners dig three long trenches, a yard deep and almost a hundred yards long in which to bury the dead. The wounded were still being treated by the surgeon and several woman helpers, although many had passed away during the night. Hopton ordered a count of the prisoners and an inventory of the captured supplies which proved to be more than he could have imagined.

By the afternoon he had a report on the aftermath of the battle. 1900 captured soldiers along with Colonel Chudley. Hopton considered him a bonus as he was the most senior member of the Parliamentarian army he had captured so far.

The enemy had abandoned their cannon, thirteen in all, as well as all the shot and powder to go with them. The large number of captured weapons would have been enough to re-equip his entire army. The food and grain that they recovered from the fleeing army would be enough to feed his men and animals through the weeks ahead.

The officers met in the late afternoon, when most of the battlefield had been cleared of men and equipment, at the Inn in Stratton. They realised that they had an unexpected headache. What to do with nearly two thousand prisoners?. They could not feed them all or guard them indefinitely, eventually it was reluctantly agreed that they had no alternative than to release them and send them back to their homes. Hopton insisted that each one made a solemn oath not to take up arms again. This he knew some would ignore but he had little alternative and the men were released in groups and sent on their way during the next day. The captured officers were to remain prisoners of war.

Hopton remained at Stowe with Bevill Grenville for a further two days ensuring that the regiments were re-organised and all the dead were buried. The surviving wounded who could not be of further use to the cause were loaded onto a convoy of carts and carriages and slowly dispersed back to their homes across Cornwall.

Bevill assessed his own losses and was surprised that on this occasion his regiment had come through the battle with relatively few casualties. The dead were returned to their families at their homes to be buried in their own parishes. The wounded were taken to Stowe to be attended to by the surgeon and his staff that had set up their hospital in the outhouses. On the following day Bevill received a message from Anthony Payne which informed him that Will had been among the injured during the cavalry charge. His horse had been shot in the chest with a musket ball and as it fell it rolled on him and crushing his leg, he was told that Will had been taken to the surgeon at Stowe. As it happened by the time Bevill arrived at the makeshift hospital the surgeon was busy attending to his Will’s leg and Bevill went and stood by the table alongside the surgeon who informed him of Will’s condition, the prognosis was not good. Will was unconscious his trousers had been cut away. The bone on his lower leg was broken in many places, splinters sticking through the flesh. The surgeon was a middle aged man called James Hawkwell, although small in stature, he was in his own way a giant of a man, no-one could deal with these terrible injuries but him, he had trained as a doctor in London but had always wanted to live in his home in Cornwall. He would never have guessed that he would spend so much of his time attending to such terrible injuries that came from the battlefield. With his wealth of medical knowledge he was a major asset to Bevill’s army. He had been with Bevill’s regiment for many years and he and Bevill had become good friends, Bevill had great respect for the man’s skill in dealing with the many wounds he had dealt with.

“I cannot repair this” the doctor spoke in a low voice. “What can be done” Bevill asked. “I will take the leg off at the knee and I will hope that I can stop him from bleeding to death” the doctor replied.

Daniel had already been told of Will’s injury and rode to the cottage in the valley to tell his sister. She insisted on riding to Stowe to be with Will. Daniel remained at the cottage to look after his mother. He was devastated by the injury to Will, they had been like brothers and fought side by side on so many occasions and each felt that the other was invincible.

Rachael left the horse at the stable by the big house and went to Will’s side. His face was ashen and he did not move, she thought he was dead. The doctor told her what he intended to do and her heart sank. She held back her tears and told the doctor that she would assist. He looked into her eyes and decided that to argue would be pointless.

They set to work putting a tight tourniquet around Will’s leg above his knee. Rachael was glad that Will was not conscious at this time. The doctor worked quickly and efficiently and Rachael had to look away as the saw cut through the bone just below the knee. The leg was removed and the doctor drew the skin back over the knee bone and stitched the flesh back across the gaping wound. He explained to Rachael that when Will awoke he would be in great pain and would need weeks of care. He added that she would have to ensure that the wound should be kept clean and make sure that it did not become infected. If that happened he would not be there to help and Will would surely die.

She sat by Will’s side through the night and held his hand as he woke in the early hours. He cried out from the pain but there was nothing she could do but nurse his head in her arms. He drifted off again into an unconscious sleep. Bevill visited them on the following afternoon. Rachael asked if she could take Will home. Bevill agreed and arranged for a flat cart to be brought around and servants to assist her. Anthony Payne was at the house when the arrangements were made to take Will to the cottage and he insisted on going with them. The servants loaded Will onto a pile of blankets on the flat bed of the carriage which was pulled by two cart horses they set off along the rough trail leading down the valley. The hill was slippery from recent rain and difficult to traverse with the horses and cart, the servants tied ropes to the rear of the cart to stop it running away down the hill and Anthony wrapped one of the ropes around his shoulder and with Anthony’s great strength they managed to hold the cart back so that they could negotiate the steep trail down through the woods without spilling Will from the back

 When they arrived Anthony picked Will up like a child in his huge arms and carried him into the cottage. Rachael made up a bed on the floor in front of the fireplace where they made sure Will was comfortable. Anthony noticed that his eyes were open and Will was watching him. “My friend” was all Anthony could say as he knelt by his bed and held Will’s hand.

Eventually it was time for them to leave and the men left Will and Rachael to return to Stowe, there was nothing more they could do for him and they knew that Bevill would have fresh orders for them.

CHAPTER 16 (On to Bristol)

The regiments marched away from the battle field at Stratton and dispersed with orders to return to their homes. They took with them their wounded of which there were many. The soldiers were given several days rest but this did not apply to Hopton or his officers.  He was already planning to move into Devon. He remembered his orders from the King which were for him to meet up with Prince Maurice in Somerset as soon as possible. 

Under the Prince’s command their joint forces would to be the most formidable army in the West. The force would be strong enough to take on the Parliamentarians at Bristol and eventually destroy the King’s enemies.

Hopton soon realised that he had a problem with his army, the Cornish soldiers forcefully expressed their opinion and that they joined the army to defend Cornwall, they were not keen to travel beyond the borders of Cornwall. The feeling expressed by many was that now they had set their homeland free and their job was completed.

Some refused to return to their regiments but many others were persuaded by promises of glory and cash rewards.

In addition their great success at Stratton encouraged many of the Cornish soldiers to reconsider their position and they decided that they would follow Hopton into Devon. Bevill Grenville made a passionate speech to his assembled men and persuaded them to follow him into what most considered a foreign country.

Within days the word was sent out across the land for all the members of the regiments to reassemble and meet up with Hopton they were to be at the assembly point at the Devon and Cornwall border, on the last day of May.  On the appointed day Hopton was delighted that more than 4,000 men were gathered on the open plane which was at the outskirts of Holsworthy on the border with Devon.

The regiment of Bevill Grenville marched from Stowe with all their equipment. The convoy of horse drawn carts loaded with supplies and ammunition and powder, enough for a prolonged campaign brought up the rear of the column. They were accompanied by many of the wives of the soldiers, they were not happy that their men folk where heading into another country and many insisted on travelling along with the army with the intention of looking after them.

Ahead of the convoy were the 400 foot soldiers that had survived the battle at Stratton and were still able to march and fight, one hundred less than at the start of the war. At the front of the regiment were the cavalry led by Sir Bevill Grenville resplendent in his regimental tunic of silver and blue hoops and his wide brimmed leather hat with the long feathers attached to its side added to the picture of an officer of the King. He could not have been mistaken for anything but a Royalist and a leader of men.

The cavalry rode wearing their tunics but this was to impress his own side as when the action began they would don their fighting apparel. Strapped to the horses were the heavy ox hide overcoats, all in the pale blue colour designated by Bevill Grenville, they were designed to protect the wearer from sword and knife strokes and would keep them dry and warm no matter what the weather would bring. Each man carried two flintlock pistols which were holstered on either side of their saddles. Each rider had a short barrelled musket in a leather sheath that was attached to the saddle close to the horses head. Every rider had a sword carried in its scabbard and a dagger strapped inside the top coat. They carried pouches of powder and lead shot in bandoleers that were slung over the shoulder. The one factor that could not be overlooked was that of the one hundred that had formed the cavalry unit a month before only 72 remained. The rest were either dead or too badly wounded to travel.

On the lead wagon, following the foot soldiers sat the massive figure of Anthony Payne, on this occasion he was not alone. The boy sitting alongside the giant looking so small in comparison was in fact John Grenville the sixteen year old son of Sir Bevill Grenville. After long deliberation and hostility from his wife Bevill had decided that his son should travel with the army, he decided that his son was old enough to follow him and learn, even though he would not be expected to fight.

 The magnificent spectical of the troop of cavalry with banners blowing in the breeze was a sight that lifted Ralph Hopton’s mood. They rode along the trail towards him ahead of Sir Bevill Grenville’s regiment of foot resplendent in their silver and blue jackets. Bevill halted his soldiers and greeted Hopton and the officers of the regiments that had already gathered at their rendezvous.

The advance scouts had brought information that there were no enemy soldiers to be found anywhere on the road between Holsworthy and Hatherly.  Hopton ordered the march into Devon to begin.

The army of foot soldiers and cavalry marched across the county without opposition and once they had arrived at Crediton, some 15 miles north of Exeter, Hopton claimed Devon for the King, he sent messengers to Exeter and Plymouth and although the cities remained in the hands of the Parliamentarians their garrisons were well aware that they no longer controlled the county. Hopton intended to spread the word and sent riders to all the towns and villages which achieved the purpose of adding to the misery of the soldiers within the cities and kept them from causing Hopton any problems.

The garrisons of Exeter and Plymouth could defend themselves but were no threat to an army on the march and Hopton had no time or intention of mounting an attack on such heavily fortified places, in any event his orders were to continue to meet up with the prince without delay.

 The soldiers marched for three days without meeting resistance and continued their march on into Somerset. They camped by night and marched all day settling into a ground covering routine, eventually arriving on the high ground above the town of Chard on the 12^th day of June. Hopton was pleased that the Prince’s army had arrived before them and the scouts reported back as to where they were camped. The Cornish army remained some way off from the forces of the Marquess of Hertford and Prince Maurice. Hopton ordered his men to make camp and went with his officers to meet up with the Prince. The leaders greeted each other with enthusiasm. Word of the battle and great victory at Stratton had gone ahead of them and the Prince was in high spirits. He shook Hopton’s hand warmly and the two men along with their fellow officers sat down to enjoy a simple meal and several bottles of wine in the open air. They spend the evening discussing their orders from the King and plan the campaign ahead of them. The Cornish army made camp on the high ground within sight of the town and were allowed to rest during the following day and night.

Trumpets sounded to wake the army at dawn on the following day, the armies broke camp and it was but a short time before the combined force of almost 7,000 men were on the move. They travelled North West following the high ground passing through the heavily wooded countryside until at the end of the day they reached the northern edge of the Blackdown Hills. From here they could look down on the county town of Taunton which stood in the centre of a huge flat expanse of grassland some six miles further on from their position.

 The prince sent scouts and small patrols of cavalry to test the strength of the Taunton defences and ordered the remainder of the army to rest. The scouts returned and informed the Prince that they had discovered that the town was held in the name of Parliament but the garrison was small and the town was made up of a farming community with few defences.

Once again at dawn the trumpets sounded for the army to break camp and the Prince ordered the army to advance towards Taunton. They stopped within sight of the southern wall of the town. Hopton observed that it was constructed of soft reddish coloured sandstone and not built high enough to stop his forces in a sustained attack. In any case he noted that the gates were not substantial and had not been built to withstand a siege. He ordered two of the cannon to the front of the column and had the gunners fire a volley of shot over the wall into the town.

The army waited for an hour but there was no response from the town. Hopton ordered a troop of cavalry to enter the town and they galloped through the gates without a shot being fired at them. The soldiers soon returned to report that the Parliamentarian garrison had fled to the north. The army marched into the town without a fight and Taunton, at a stroke, became a Royalist stronghold in the heart of Somerset. The Prince was pleased to see Hopton in action, he had heard that he was a competent commander and he was happy to let him take the lead, he arranged for a garrison to remain in the town under the command one of his officers and the Royalists continued their march north towards Bristol.

Near the town of Bridgwater, just 10 miles north of Taunton two riders arrived with messages from the King for the Prince. The news that the Parliamentarian army was heading from their positions near London towards Bath caused the Prince to call another council of war. The Royalists were forced to alter their plan which had been to advance on Bristol.

The town of Bridgewater had been alerted by the retreating soldiers from Taunton as to the imminent arrival of the Royalists and all the soldiers in and around the town had fled once again. The Prince marched the army into the centre of town without meeting any resistance. There was no reason to delay, the royalist leaders could see that this was a town of no strategic importance and ordered the army to continue its march towards the east and on towards the busy market town of Wells. Once again the word had gone before them with the result that the town was unguarded, all the garrison had fled to the relative safety in hills to the north.

 Hopton and the Prince had no time to delay. The Prince decided that this was another town of no significant military importance and once they were sure it was secure he ordered the army to continue on their march and prepare to meet the Parliamentarian army which was reported to be getting ever closer from the east.

The army marched on skirting the town of Frome; they were in a hurry and could not take the chance of becoming involved in a battle in this, another town of no military significance. They made good time and after a further day of marching arrived at Bradford on Avon, the Royalists decided that this small country town set on the banks of a slowly flowing river would make an ideal headquarters. They set up their camp on the west side of the river where the only crossing was a single stone bridge which could be easily defended. At the same time the Parliamentarian army had set its base at the city of Bath less than ten miles to the north west of the Royalists. Their army was led by a formidable soldier Sir William Waller, an inspirational leader who had been in charge of the army for two years. His force was of a similar size to Hopton’s with almost 6,000 soldiers under his command. He knew that the Royalists were approaching from the south west and had his soldiers set up their defences on and around Lansdown Hill to the west of the city; from this vantage point Waller was confident that his forces would defeat the advancing army and they were ready. He positioned his cannon along the hill so that they had the best view of advancing foot soldiers. The pike soldiers were dug in and ready to repel cavalry, his own cavalry were camped a few hundred yards off to his left ready and waiting to charge the Royalists on his command.

It was now the beginning of July and the weather was dry and warm. The Royalist soldiers left their base and marched towards Bath, they eventually arrived within sight of the waiting enemy army but by now it was late evening and the officers decided that the army should settle down to rest through the night as best they could. All of Hopton’s men were hardened from their days of marching and they were used to sleeping in their clothes and snatching a few hours whenever they had the chance. They recovered quickly from their exertions and at first light the soldiers rose up silently and prepared themselves for the battle ahead. They discarded equipment that they would not need, heavy coats and blankets and food. They carried flasks of water, there would be no time for resting once the battle began. The musketeers made sure that their weapons were clean and the firing mechanism was in good working order. Their pouches of powder and lead balls were full and dry. Swords and pistols were made ready. The pike men prepared defensive positions in case of attack and sentries were positioned all around the camp area.

At first light Hopton rode to a slight rise in the ground and surveyed the enemy position. It was well prepared with ditches and row upon row of wooden spikes on three sides. He knew that the Parliamentarian reserves and cavalry would be somewhere at the rear. He concluded that a frontal attack by his army would be costly and not guaranteed to succeed. He rode back to his waiting officers and reported to the Prince informing him of the need for a change in tactics. Hopton and the Prince worked well together, their strategy and planning was similar and they came to an agreement without difficulty. They ordered the officers to take their regiments a mile back down the road from where they had come. Here there was a good area or woodland and hilly ground that could be better defended. Hopton and the Prince had decided that it would be better to take their time and rethink the Royalists strategy before committing the army to the battle.

The regiments began to form up ready to fall back when a shout rang out. Hopton’s shielded his eyes from the sun and looked in the direction of the pointing arm of one of cavalry officers he observed a cloud of dust forming and rising into the sky from the rear of the hill fortress. It did not take them long to realise that it must be the Parliamentarian cavalry. They could hear the thunder of hooves in the distance and soon they could make out the source of the dust cloud and the noise. It was the Parliamentarian cavalry. The sight of 500 heavy horses and their riders in their conspicuous red uniforms with their bright silver breastplates was enough to make a man’s blood run cold. With a bold move Waller had ordered his entire force of horse soldiers led by Sir Arthur Haserigg to charge the retreating army with the intention of taking them by surprise.

Hopton wasted no time in calling up his own cavalry. The horses were gathered to the west of the Royalist foot soldiers and from their position they could see the line of enemy cavalry half a mile away, the red coated soldiers were travelling fast and would soon be upon the retreating Royalists. It took no time at all for Hopton and the Prince to realise that if they could not stop the advancing horses their entire army of foot soldiers would be cut to pieces on the open plain.

With a great roar the Royalist horsemen turned as one and on the order charged to meet the enemy head on, drawing their swords, muskets and pistols as they rode at full gallop.

 The two forces of more than a thousand men and horses met in the centre of the plain and with a thunderous crashing of animals and gunfire a ferocious battle ensued. Each side fired their pistols and muskets and when they came together the fighting was hand to hand, swords and knives slashing and cutting from their plunging horses. The Royalists were slowly forced to give ground by the well organised and disciplined Parliamentarians cavalry and eventually broke off their attack, their officers ordered the retreat and the cavalry fell back towards their own ranks. Their attack on the Parliamentarians had had the desired effect and given the foot soldiers of the Cornish army time to get organised, now they were in position and ready to repel the horses, they were well practiced at the art and the pike men formed their hedgehog formation, their wooden pikes quickly wedged into the ground, they knelt and stood ready for the advancing horses. Behind the pike men stood the musketeers, ready formed up in line and waiting for the order to fire. Behind them the rest of the army of foot soldiers were held in reserve.

 As the Royalist cavalry wheeled away to the west the muskets opened up on the advancing Parliamentarian cavalry with devastating effect. Seeing the hopelessness of pressing on the attack they hesitated, they could see the Royalist cavalry were reforming and preparing to charge once again. Haserigg gave the order to retreat and the soldiers turned and galloped their horses back towards Lansdown hill leaving behind dozens of men and horses from both sides dead and wounded.

The unexpected attack by Weller’s forces had the effect of bringing the Royalist army to battle readiness quicker than the Prince had expected and he knew this was not the time to retreat. The army was ordered to advance on the hill in line. The pike men and musketeers marched together in good spirits after their success against the Cavalry. They were ready to take on the foot soldiers on the hill.

It was now mid-day and the sun was high in the sky. It was hot and the air was still. The army marched slowly forward until the silence was shattered by the roar of the canon from the hill. At first the shot and ball fell short of the advancing force but the gunners soon got the distance and a dozen or more canon opened up a steady bombardment of the Royalist foot soldiers. The Royalist cannon opened fire over the heads of their own soldiers and were soon pounding the hill defences. As the Royalists reached the hill the canon on both sides fell silent, the gunners of neither side being able to distinguish between friend and foe.

The Cornish army charged the hill from the frontal position which Hopton had earlier said would be suicide, they were met with a hail of shot from the hundreds of muskets behind the line of pikes and wooden barricades.  Sir Bevill had left his horse and marched with his men, there was no way a horse could get through the defenses. With Anthony Payne at his side he urged his men forward breaking through the wooden defenses and chopping and slashing their way through the lines of enemy soldiers, they slowly advanced up the side of the hill. The fighting was ferocious, the Parliamentarian soldiers found it difficult to retreat up the hill because of their own defenses and were forced to stand and fight to the death. By early evening the Cornish army had almost reached the top of the hill where Bevill ordered his men to follow him on the final assault. He ran forward but in doing so got too far ahead of his men where he became surrounded by the enemy foot soldiers, seeing their chance to kill a Royalist officer, they attacked him with great ferocity. Anthony Payne saw the danger to his beloved master and charged forward with his axe in one hand and great heavy sword in the other. He hacked and slashed at the men in front of him, he saw Bevill struck a blow on the head by a pole axe whereupon he disappear from sight under the weight of the men surrounding him. Anthony’s charged roared his loudest and the ferocity of Sir Bevill’s soldiers behind him was too much for the Parliamentarians that were left, they turned and fled down the far side of the hill. Anthony Payne reached Sir Bevill who was now face down on the ground. He turned the body over and looked into the ruggedly handsome face. He knew at that moment that his beloved master and friend was dead, his head hung to one side with a great gash in his neck, his hat had fallen off and blood oozed dark red through his hair. His eyes were open but they were lifeless, his tunic was covered in his red blood which still pumped from the neck wound. John Grenville arrived from the rear of the gathering Cornishmen and kneeling by his father took his head in his arms; he could not hold back his tears. He smoothed back the long curly hair and kissed his father on the forehead. The soldiers stood silent in disbelief. Their indestructible leader was dead or near death. The eyes of these battle hardened men were damp with emotion. The giant Anthony Payne stood with his shoulders bent.

Chapter 17 The Return Home

The battle was over and the hill was taken. The Cornish soldiers stood and looked around them; trying hard to take in the scene of the horror that they were part of.

Bodies were everywhere and moans came from the wounded all around. As they stood, still unable to understand fully that their leader and mentor was dead, a party of six Royalist cavalry officers, easily identified by their wide brimmed hats with long feathers and fine uniforms, trotted up the hill towards them. The leader of the riders was William Baffore a captain of Prince Maurice’s staff. They drew up their horses in front of the Cornish soldiers who were still standing in silence around their leader.

William Baffore looked down and saw John Grenville still cradling the head of Sir Bevill in his lap. Baffore had no feeling for these men whom he could see were now leaderless, they were no more than a group of soldiers, and as far as he was concerned the dead were dead. He ordered the men to gather up their arms and follow him, they would join up with his forces and they would be used to replace the soldiers that the Prince had lost.

Anthony Payne lifted the body of his master into his arms and stood facing the young officer. The giant’s face was at the same level as the man on the horse and he looked into his eyes and spoke slowly. “We have won the battle, Sir Bevill is dead, and our war is over. We will fight no more, we will return to Cornwall”

The officer’s face turned a bright red and his anger was apparent. “You dare to disobey an officer of the king? I will have you shot” he spit the words at Anthony. The Cornish soldiers, as a man, drew their swords. The musketeers raised their rifles; they were in no mood to be pushed. William Baffore was no coward but backed up his horse in surprise at the response of the soldiers. Anthony grabbed his horse by the bit and held it still; the horse could not move there was no escape. The horsemen behind William were quickly surrounded.

A voice from the rear of the group spoke out. “Hold” It was a powerful voice. No one had noticed the arrival of Lord Hopton and his dragoons. By coincidence he had returned to the battle sight at that precise moment, intent on calculating his casualties and availability of fighting men. He sat tall on his horse and slowly edged his way through the crown. “Put up your weapons men” he ordered. He came to Anthony Payne and looked at the still form in his arms. He reached forward and smoothed back the lock of hair that had fallen across the face of his old friend. He sat silently looking down at the body in front of him. Eventually he lifted his face and looked into the eyes of Anthony Payne. He turned his head and sat silently for several more moments, he took in the sight that was before him, down the hillside a dozen or more roundheads lay dead among the defences but out on the lower slopes and across the open fields lay the bodies of the Cornish regiment of Bevill Grenville, it was hard to comprehend, too many bodies to count. Lord Hopton turned again towards William. He spoke loudly.

“These men are the finest soldiers I have ever met. It has been a privilege to have served with them. The regiment of Sir Bevill Grenville will be honoured forever for their bravery” “Go now, return to Prince Maurice, these men will not be joining you”.

The young man turned his horse and, without speaking, trotted away down the far side of the hill, closely followed by his men.

Lord Hopton surveyed the hill again for what seemed an age; even with his bitter experiences he had not seen such loss of life in one battle. He watched as groups of soldiers sorted their dead from that of the enemy piling bodies in groups of ten. He silently counted the bodies as best he could, at least two hundred, many distinctive by the blue and silver rings on the sleeves of their jackets. Two hundred of the four hundred from Bevill’s men that started out would not return home. The wounded would account for another hundred or more, and he grimly concluded that many of them would die before the night was over.

All the while the Cornish soldiers stood in silently watching the face of their commander. Eventually Hopton turned his eyes once more toward Anthony Payne. At last he spoke “Take Sir Bevill’s body home with you Mr Payne, take your soldiers home, the king will hear of this day, whatever the outcome of this cursed war the valour of your regiment will become part of folklore.” Goodbye Mr Payne I doubt that we will meet again”. With that Lord Hopton turned his horse and with his company of dragoons headed slowly towards the distant sound of battle.

With that the war was over for Bevill Grenville’s regiment. Anthony Payne and young John Grenville placed Sir Bevill’s body on a cart. It was now dark and there was little more they could do until morning.  They made a camp for the night and from the equipment left by the fleeing soldiers they lit fires and prepared a meal; eventually they slept a fitful sleep until the dawn began to lighten the sky.

Anthony was up at first light, the hill was silent, slowly the soldiers awake and gathered around him. They waited for Anthony to tell them what to do. They surveyed the battlefield, now only the sound of the men who had begun carting the dead bodies down the hill to the ditches that were the burial site was all that could be heard. The moans of the wounded had all but stopped. The armies of Parliamentarians and the Royalists had moved away to the north. Only the occasional rumble of canon fire in the distance indicated that the battle continued.

 It slowly dawned on each of the soldiers that the campaign and war was over for them. They were the survivors, Anthony gave instructions. They would finish burying the dead at the foot of the hill in trenches, if they knew a body to be that of a kin in which case they could take them home to their relatives. They would load up the carts and gather all the horses they could find. They would spend this day ensuring that their friends were buried and they would leave at first light on the following morning.

As the evening sun sank over the hills a shout rang out breaking the silence, all faces were turned towards the north. A group of cavalry approached slowly towards the hill. The soldiers grabbed for their swords and muskets expecting a surprise attack, they relaxed once they realised that these men were showing no sign of attacking them. They watched and as the horsemen traversed the hill to where the bodies were being collected. Someone called out “It’s our cavalry”. Anthony counted the horses as they came near. Forty two, surely that was wrong, only yesterday they numbered almost one hundred.

The cavaliers dismounted and Anthony along with John and several soldiers walked down the hill to meet them. A tall young man with a thick beard came to meet Anthony. This was Graham Pooley a Stratton man that Anthony had known since childhood. They shook hands. Graham’s face was haggard and blood splattered his top coat which was torn, his breast armour dirty with dust and blood. He told Anthony that all the officers were dead, they had perused the Parliamentarians out into open ground but they were caught in artillery and musket fire which cut through them as they charged. As darkness fell they were forced to retreat and had spent the previous day at Lord Hopton’s camp.  They had been informed of Sir Bevill’s death by Lord Hopton himself. They told Anthony how Hopton had retreated from the front line along with the cavalry. He had dismounted from his horse in front of his men and taking out his flask; he had drank deeply of the strong liqueur that he carried, he had surveyed the scene and now considered his position, he had succeeded in driving General Waller from his fortified position but at what a cost. His officers collected information from each regiment and it was clear that their losses were greater than he had feared several hundred dead infantry and even more wounded. Many of his finest officers were also gone. Bevill Grenville and William Slanning among them. As the messengers returned from each unit the list of causalities grew. He led his horse along the line of men and horses and came to what was left of Bevill Greenville’s cavalry. The men were sitting or lying on the grass, the exhausted horses stood silently by their riders. He asked for the officer in charge and Graham Pooley had come forward “none left sir, they are all dead”. Hopton was a clever and knowledgeable man. He was well aware that without Bevill Grenville and his officers these Cornishmen would no longer be able to function as a unit of cavalry. He told Graham Pooley to take command of the remaining horsemen and told him to join up with Mr. Payne at the site of the battle.

Anthony Payne listened to what Graham had to say and told him that as master at arms he would assume overall command; no one was in a mood to disagree. He told Graham and his men to rest up and see to their horses. They would leave at first light.

It was late evening and Anthony realised that he had not seen his good friend Daniel since the start of the battle, he had been sent to scout and gather information on the advancing cavalry when he had last been seen. Fearing the worse Anthony went in search of him. There were few bodies left on the battlefield, most had been removed to the trenches for burial. He searched further away from the hill, it was almost dark and he had almost given up hope of finding him. He turned to go back to the camp when he heard the snort of a horse. He went to investigate and found the man he was looking for. In a ditch Daniel was lying beside the body of his horse, it was dying from a pike driven into its chest it gave out its last breath. The rider had been thrown over its head and lay twisted and still. Anthony looked into the face of his friend and placed his hand on his neck, it was still warm and there was a pulse.  He rolled the body over and put his ear to the chest. Was that a heartbeat? Yes, he could detect a slow but steady thump. He sat down on the grass and lifted Daniels head; from his pocket he took out his hip flask and tipping back his head gently he poured the liquid between his lips. Daniel groaned and coughed and Anthony noted the trickle of bright red blood from the corner of his friend’s mouth.  Anthony knew from the bright colour of the blood that this was a chest wound. He lay Daniel’s head back on the ground and gently removed his chest plate and tunic. He was looking for the musket ball hole or the wound from a sword thrust. He was surprised to see that there was no sign of a wound. Only blackness across Daniel’s chest which he traced with his finger along the line of his ribs.

He gently examined Daniel’s chest, and could feel the breaks in the bone. He had seen many injuries during the war and now he was convinced that Daniel had fallen badly from his horse breaking several ribs which caused the bleeding inside. He made Daniel as comfortable as possible with the coat and horse blanket and went back to his men. He found the surgeon who was busy sewing up wounds and assisting as many of the wounded that he could. Anthony told him what he had found. They decided that Daniel should be brought to him as quickly as possible and Anthony rounded up a wagon and piled it with clothing and blankets. He drove back slowly in the darkness to where Daniel lay. He gently lifted the still body in his arms, no easy matter even for the giant as Daniel was a dead weight and a big and heavy man. Anthony laid the body on the blankets and slowly urged the horse forward using an old track he managed to avoid the rough ground and returned to where the exhausted surgeon continued his grisly work by the light of several lanterns. He finished sewing and dressing the wound of a musketeer who had taken a sword slash to his arm and came and examined Daniel. He confirmed what Anthony had suspected and told him that it was unlikely that Daniel would survive, his ribs were caved in and his lung was punctured, his breathing was ragged and each time he gave a small cough fresh blood trickled from his lips. The doctor said it was rare for a chest as damaged as this to repair itself and there was no treatment, he was unable to do anything with an internal injury of this nature. He had to admit that as Daniel was a strong young man there was always a chance of some recovery. With rest and special care who could tell, it is in god’s hands.

Daniel had many friends and as word spread several came forward, between them they made a comfortable bed in the wagon for the return journey, Daniel would be taken home.

It was now late in the evening and the only light came from the quarter moon just above the horizon. What was left of Sir Bevill Grenville’s regiment gathered in groups at the foot of the hill and settled down for the night? Anthony had sent pickets to watch from the top of the hill, the last think he wanted now was to be taken by surprise by an enemy who could be close by. He ordered the men to put out the fires as it might alert the enemy to their presence.

The soldiers slept until it was daylight when the pickets came down from the top of the hill to report to Anthony. There were no signs of the enemy or of their own army.

Anthony organised the men into parties and finished filling in the trenches of the dead. He had noticed several dead horses out in the open country and sent the drivers of the supply wagons to butcher the animals. They would at least eat well during the march. It was midday before the grizzly work was completed. The trenches were leveled so that in a few days there would be little trace of the graves, no one would know where the men had been buried.

They saddled the horses and loaded the carts. Eventually they were ready; everyone was keen to be gone from this place.

Anthony ordered the regiment to form a column. The foot soldiers led off, behind them at the head of the wagon train, Anthony Payne took the seat along with John Grenville. His father’s body lay in the wagon on its own, The Grenville banner wrapped loosely around it.

 The bodies to be returned to their families were in two wagons, eight wagons were loaded with wounded and four more were loaded with their supplies of food, water and munitions. Some of the cavalry were sent ahead and others travelled parallel to the column to ensure they did not fall into an enemy trap. Many of the cavalry had gathered abandoned horses and took them as spare mounts.

Anthony decided to avoid the main towns. Although they had been taken by the Royalists on their way north he was not to know if they were still under their control and it was not his intention that they should fight their way back to Cornwall. He calculated that it was all of a hundred miles which would take at least four days of hard marching.

The regiment marched for five hours following the cavalry who scouted far and wide ahead of the column. They were approaching the village of Wedmore when Graham Pooley came galloping back to speak to Anthony. He had found a deserted manor house with paddocks and high walls; it would make a good place to rest up for the night. Although it was still light and they could march for several hours more Anthony agreed and halted the column when they reached the manor gates. He told the men to make themselves comfortable and light their fires. They knew what to do and there was now no fear of a large enemy force taking them by surprise. The soldiers were well used to looking after themselves and broke off into their groups of twenty men to their fires, each man had a job to do, some gathered wood, and others set about lighting the fires and setting up the metal frames from which to hang the meat. The butcher of each group sliced and prepared the horse meat for cooking over the flames.  

It was obvious that the manor house had not been empty for long and all the contents were still in place. Anthony was sure the owners would not be far away, he concluded that they had seen the approaching soldiers and run away to hide, they would return once the danger from his regiment had passed. He ordered the men to search out fresh food and drink but not to damage or destroy the property. The regiment of Bevill Grenville would not go down in history as a band of looters; they were to be remembered as the finest soldiers of the Cornish army.

Graham joined up with Anthony in the main hall. This was a fine house, the home of a wealthy farmer there was no doubt. Soldiers foraged around the big house, they found a store house stacked with bread and stone jars of milk, still fresh. Below the main hall they found a cellar of wine bottles and several small kegs of gin.

One of his men came to report that he had found a barn with great vats and barrels. Anthony and Graham followed the soldier to the barn; along one wall were huge barrels which Anthony knew were for the storage of cider. This farmer was obviously a major cider producer. Anthony should have realised earlier as they had marched through several fine orchards laden with early apples.

 The giant vats were empty as the next crop would not be ready for several months.

Anthony thumped one of the large barrels stacked by the wall. It gave a dull sound. He knew that it was full. They searched the barn and discovered a canvas tarpaulin at the rear against the far wall. The men lifted a corner and Anthony gave a shout of delight, stacked from floor to roof were wooden kegs, each about two feet high.  Anthony took a tankard from a row of hooks secured to the barn wall and uncorked one of the kegs. He poured a small amount into the tankard and tasted it gingerly. Being the son of an innkeeper he knew all about cider, if it was not well made and well-kept it would be too like vinegar to drink. His face lit up, this was so smooth, and he immediately knew it to be of excellent quality. He filled the tankard to the top and drank the liquid down in one go. Maybe it was the fact that he had not drunk cider for a long while that he could not remember ever tasting better. The look of satisfaction was enough for Graham and the other soldier, they grabbed a tankard each and filled them to overflowing, they drank deeply and the three men grinned at each other. Anthony humped a barrel under each arm and told Graham to send men to take a barrel to each group. They would drink and eat well tonight.

Graham and the soldier hefted a barrel each and headed off to spread the word. Soon men were carrying barrels of cider around the camp.

The wounded that could be, were unloaded from the carts. The seriously wounded were made comfortable in the backs of the wagons. The drivers and doctor’s assistants had a fire alight in no time and began slicing up the horse meat ready for cooking over the flames. The arrival of the cider barrels was greeted with a cheer from the wounded men sitting around the now roaring fire.

Anthony went back to his own group who were making a fire outside the main entrance and gave them one of the kegs. The mood of the men changed in an instant. Anthony said he would join them later when the meat had cooked and went back into the main hall. The room was large and comfortably furnished with drapes and pictures covering most of the stone walls. A solid oak table, large enough to seat at least ten people had pride of place in the centre of the room with finely carved chairs neatly set out around it. He took off the bag he carried on his shoulder and brought out a large parchment. This was his map, a copy of Sir Bevill’s, Anthony was a very thorough man, during their march he had made detailed entries on the map with the main towns and rivers that they had passed through; he spread it out on the table.  Refilling his tankard he placed the barrel in the centre of the table. Graham Pooley had been instructed to bring one man from each group to the main hall and they were not long in arriving at the table. Anthony refilled his tankard once again with the strong fine cider and told the men to help themselves. They did not take long to discover the kitchen and return with jugs and tankards; they drank deeply of the cider as Anthony explained his plan for getting them home. He believed that telling the leader of twenty men would make his life easier as each would tell his group and in short time the plan would be known to all. He asked them all to look at the map and pointed out the route he thought they should take. He suggested they should skirt around Bridgwater and Taunton and although it was a long way, the countryside was flat and it was easy travelling, they should make Wellington by nightfall. Anthony said that if they met the enemy they would break up into their groups and meet up at their rendezvous near Wellington. Graham agreed and there were nods of approval all round Graham said he would take his horsemen ahead and scout the land; he would make sure there were no Parliamentarian forces between them and their destination.

With the meeting over Anthony went out of the house into the dark and joined his men. The group leaders returned to their respective fires. Graham returned to where the cavalry had gathered and unsaddled their horses. While he had been away they had fed them from hay that they had found stacked high in the paddock and watered them from a fresh water well. The smell of the meat cooking filled the air. The whole regiment ate of the huge pieces of succulent horse flesh and drank cider late into the night.

Anthony downed most of a barrel of cider before propping himself against a log and falling into a deep sleep. His snoring could be heard far and wide but no one noticed or cared, for the first time in a long while they slept without fear.  The night was dark and the fires died down to a dark red glow. All the men slept until well after the sun came up. They struggled to wake, many with thick heads from over indulgence in the cider. It was difficult to get themselves ready for the long march but eventually they came together in their customary places and formed the column. The regiment set off with Anthony cursing and threatening them with all manner of punishments if they did not reach their destination by nightfall. Inside however he knew they would be lucky to march a full day with stomachs full and heads thumping. It did not go unnoticed that each wagon carried at least two barrels of cider.

They marched almost in silence for several hours before Anthony called a halt. They had arrived at a river crossing and he decided that this would be a good place to rest for an hour where the men could refresh themselves with the cold water.

The sun was high above them and the flat plane over which they walked was baking hot. Many stripped off their heavy tunics and were soon sitting or lying on the ground at the river bank. Everyone was grateful for the cooling water and a number stripped off and waded naked into the gentle flowing river.

Anthony walked back along the line of wagons. He had not forgotten about the plight of his old friend Daniel but the burden of leadership was a strain on him. He notices that John Grenville was still driving the wagon with his father’s body. He had been silent since they had set off and there was little Anthony could think of to say. He made a mental note to seek him out when they rested for the night.

Daniel was in a wagon at the rear of the column; he looked peaceful and was no longer coughing. The blood no longer tricked from his lips. He had not regained consciousness which the doctor assured Anthony was probably for the best, he would be in considerable pain when he did eventually waken. 

The column was ordered once again to form up and continue the march. They passed around Bridgwater and Taunton without incident. The cavalry under the command of Graham Pooley kept a watchful eye for any potential danger but there were little sign of any parliamentarian forces. He sent scouts to Taunton and was informed that the town was still garrisoned by the Royalist troop that Lord Hopton had put in charge. Anthony decided that they should continue on to Wellington and Graham’s force rode on to establish a camp. He found a clearing in the forest close to the Blackdown hills, which would be suitable and sent riders back to Anthony and the column to tell them where he was. The cavalry set up defence positions and began collecting wood for their fires.

It was dark by the time the Cornish regiment arrived at the camp site. The marching soldiers were totally exhausted and the horses were dragging their feet as they hauled the heavy wagons, they too had had more than enough for one day.

The men were subdued and cooked their evening meal in their groups with little to say. They consumed the barrels of cider but it was not with such pleasure as the previous evening. The journey had taken its toll. Five of the wounded men had died during the day. There was nothing the doctor could do; the men had been too badly wounded. Anthony decided that as they would be in Cornwall in two days and that the bodies would be carried in the wagon with Sir Bevill and buried by their families.

The weather was changing; heavy cloud was being blown in from the west. Rain was in the air. During the night the rain came gusting in across the forest and soaking the soldiers where they lay. The morning brought the men awake, wet and uncomfortable they gathered their belongings and formed up for the next day of marching. This was to be another long march thirty miles to Jacobstowe, a village in the centre of Devon which would bring them within a day march of Cornwall.

The column was on the move soon after dawn. There was little point in sitting around in the rain. The rain eventually stopped and the sky cleared by mid-afternoon, the weather became more uncomfortable for the marching men. Their tunics were wet and the sun became hot and the air humid. Their bodies steamed and this was becoming a very uncomfortable day. Anthony was well aware of the men’s discomfort and ordered several rest stops.

Once again the regiment relied on Graham Pooley to find a suitable site for the night and he did not disappoint the men. Five miles before Jacobstowe the cavalry arrived at the narrow bridge crossing the fast flowing river Taw, this would be ideal.

 The marchers arrived as night fell and as soon as Anthony had given the order to rest many of the soldiers stripped off their tunics and dove naked into the water. It was a warm evening and the clear fresh water was refreshing and icy cold. Most of the men had not bathed since leaving their homes at the start of the campaign. They joked and laughed, in another day and they would be in their beloved Cornwall.

The regiment slept soundly but all too soon the summer sun came up in the early morning and they were wakened. They went through the routine of packing their meagre equipment and preparing a breakfast from their dry rations. They drank from the river and filled their leather flasks with the cool fresh water. They were ready; the column formed up and moved off, the cavalry went on ahead fanning out through the countryside to ensure a safe passage for the marching men.

It was mid-afternoon when they reached Holsworthy. The sky had been clear and the sun directly above them but the soldiers did not complain. Ten miles further and they would be home. Graham Pooley waited with his men at the crossroads. To the north the road to Bideford and to the south the road to Launceston. Anthony stopped the column and ordered the men to rest. He drove his wagon to the front of the column and held a meeting with Graham and the waiting cavalry. There would be no enemy forces in this area and he told them to ride to Stratton. He was to tell the townsfolk that the regiment was on its way and would arrive by nightfall. Graham was to ride to Stowe and break the news of Sir Bevill’s death to Lady Grenville. The remaining cavalry could return to their homes. Their job was done. Graham shook Anthony warmly by the hand and the cavalry turned their horses and galloped off into the distance. They would be in Stratton within the hour. The column rested for another hour until Anthony stood up on his wagon. His loud voice bellowed out so all could hear. “Time to go men” “time to go home” The men responded with a mighty roar of approval and the column set off for the last ten miles.

They arrived at Stratton as the sun was setting in the west; from three miles out the road was a steady climb from Holsworthy until they reached the summit of the hills above Stratton. When they reached the point where they could see the sea the column halted of its own accord. Each man stood and looked in wonder. The view from the hilltop was breathtaking. They were looking down through the heavily wooded hillside to the town of Stratton in the valley. Beyond the town the woodland sloped to the sea. On the horizon, the sun, like a huge ball of gold seemed to hang inches above the sea.

The summer air was so still only the call of birds could be heard. Anthony sat for a long moment watching as the sun touched the sea and slowly dissolve. He could not remember a more wonderful sight. The picture from that hill would remain with him forever. The lead soldiers set off down the hill and the column moved as one towards their home.

Chapter 18 the Final Days

The sun had set by the time they reached the outskirts of Stratton. A stream of people came slowly down the lane to meet them they had been alerted by Graham Pooley as he passed through the town earlier. Anthony reined in the horses and stood up in the wagon, the giant shape was clear to everyone. He spoke in his loud commanding voice; those that knew him well could detect a quiver in his words. “Thank you men, one and all, Cornwall will be justly proud of you and our brothers who did not come home with us. Go home and tell everyone who will listen of the great victories of the Cornish army and most of all the regiment of Sir Bevill Grenville. Let us all pray that the Cornish army will never again be called on to defend our country but if it is I know we will all answer the call, god bless you”  He sat down and flicked the reins, the horses moved slowly forward.

The column broke up and the men walked into the town, wives and families had arrived and walked among them. Some found their loved ones and scenes of joy and shouts of happiness filled the air. Others wandered around the men as they spread out through the town, looking for their men folk and not finding them, their cries of sorrow and anguish replaced the euphoria as so many realised that their loved ones were not among them.

The wounded would be reunited with their families and would get the best of care. Anthony left his wagon and walked slowly towards the inn. His mother came running from the front door and flung herself into his arms. The giant lifted her into his massive arms and she held his face in her hands. She could not speak and Anthony carried her like a child into his home. He placed her down in the kitchen and he heard his father’s shout of joy. The two men hugged each other as only a father and son could. “Thank god for your safe return my son but the whole town has been unable to come to terms with the death of Sir Bevill,” He turned and asked his wife to fetch ale. The two men sat in silence for a while and drank the tankards of cool beer. Anthony’s day was not yet over he would have to make sure Sir Bevill’s body was taken to his town house and properly attended to. He went in search of John Grenville but the young man had already taken charge of the staff at the town house and Sir Bevill’s body was taken into his bedroom and had been gently laid out on the bed.

Anthony went to the house, he found John giving orders to house staff. Anthony could see that the young man was already taking his place as master of the Grenville household. He had been brought up for this and taking command came so naturally to him. The staff obeyed him without question. Anthony told him that he would travel with him to Stowe in the early morning with his father’s body and report to Lady Grenville. John nodded his head in agreement and Anthony returned to the inn.

His mother prepared a huge meal, more like a banquet for her returning son. Anthony responded by eating enough for ten ordinary men.

Anthony and his father spent the rest of the evening in the main bar drinking a vast amount of ale. The room was full of people many of them the elderly men who had not been fit enough to go with the regiment, as well as a few of his closest friends who had travelled and fought with him. All present wanted to be told of the deeds of the army and of course an account of the death of Sir Bevill. David Payne gave freely of the inn’s ale to the soldiers and the more Anthony drank the more inclined he was to talk, he told them of the battle and their great victory and the death of so many of their friends, it was late into the night by the time the last of them left and David pushed the great bulk of his son up the staircase to his room. He fell face down on the bed with a crash and David left him where he was and went to find his own bed.

Anthony woke with a start, it took him several moments to realise where he was. Slow realisation that he was in his old familiar room. This was not a day he was looking forward too, what could he say to Lady Grace? How could he explain that he had failed to save her husband?

He dressed carefully. His mother has put out clean clothes for him and he felt comfortable in the soft material, so different from the heavy cloth that had been his uniform and he had worn for the past weeks.

He went down the stairs to the kitchen. His mother had been up for a while and already prepared his breakfast. He ate smoked bacon and ham, he found the jug of ale difficult to drink, he had little appetite which was unusual for him, his mother could tell he was disturbed and did not engage him in conversation.

He kissed her forehead and headed for the Grenville town house. John Grenville was already supervising the removal of his father’s body to the carriage. The old cart that he had brought his father home in was replaced by one of the family carriages. This was in turn drawn by two jet black horses from Sir Bevill’s stable.

 John had decided that his father would have the treatment that befitted his position in society. The staff had prepared the body in Sir Bevill’s fine clothes and his face was now uncovered. Anthony looked at the now rigid features, even in death, such a strong handsome face.

“Good morning Mr Payne” john spoke first “Let us be on our way. I wish to see my mother as soon as possible.

Anthony nodded and climbed onto the driving seat. John Grenville took the reins and urged the horses into a walk. It was less than an hour ride from Stratton to Stowe and the two men rode in silence. The weather was set fare and the birds sang and swallows darted overhead. At any other time this would have been a fine summer’s day.

Arriving at the great house they were met my members of the household staff. Lady Grace came quickly into the courtyard. She stopped at the carriage and looked for several minutes at the face of her beloved husband. She ordered the staff to take his body to Sir Bevill’s study.

She finally turned to Anthony and looked up into the great sat eyes of the man who had become such a favourite of her husband and also of herself. She held out her hand and Anthony took it gently in his own. He began to say “I’m sorry” but she held up her other hand to his lips and said “I do not blame you Mr Payne, I know if there was any way to save my husband you would have done so” “ I would like to know what happened, would you join me?” Anthony followed her into her day room and they sat and talked. Anthony spoke quietly and told her of all they had been through and the final battle.

When he was done she stood up and took his hand in hers. “I would like you to make arrangements for my husbands’ burial. I want a small service at Kilkhampton church his body will be buried with our family members in the crypt beneath the church. I would like you to send for my mother and father and also to Sir Bevill’s mother at Bideford and tell her of the events and of the arrangements. Anthony nodded not knowing what else to say, he left the big house and went back to Stratton to make the arrangements as ordered.

One Week later hundreds of people gathered outside the little church at Kilkhampton. Bevill and Grace’s family were present. Grace had insisted that the service would be small and informal but that was never going to happen. The gentry from all over the area gathered to pay their respects to a man who had been part of their lives for so long. Following the service Sir Bevill’s body was placed in a stone coffin and lowered into the crypt below Kilkhampton church. Family members and close friends returned to the great house of Stowe for the wake.

Anthony Payne and the remaining soldiers of Sir Bevill Grenville’s regiment returned to the Inn at Stratton.

THE END

And so it was:-

Daniel did not recover from his injuries and died shortly after his return to the cottage in the valley. He was buried in the church cemetery at Stratton where he had become so popular. The service was attended by many of his friends.

His mother did not live through the following winter and was buried alongside her son at Stratton.

Rachel and Will lived on by the sea into their old age. They had another son, both boys moved away to find work when they reached the age. After the death of Will and Rachel the cottage in the secret valley was abandoned and left to return to the ruin it had been when they had first found it.

Following the restoration of the monarchy, Sir John Grenville was appointed Earl of Bath and Governor of Plymouth. For his loyal service to the king Anthony Payne was appointed Yeoman of the guard and Halberdier of the guns of Plymouth. Anthony Payne died at the age of eighty years and was buried in Stratton churchyard

 Grace left the great house of Stowe and returned to her father’s estate, unable to live there without her beloved husband.

The lands and estates were sold off to pay the family debts that Bevill had incurred during the war and the great building was abandoned and fell into ruin, eventually the surviving relatives of Sir Bevill had the buildings demolished. Over the years that followed the stonework was taken by local people to build and repair their own houses so that eventually no trace of the house remains apart from an ornate stone fireplace which is part of the stone farmhouse that stands where the great house once stood. The farm and surrounding land now belong to the National Trust.

Sir Bevill Grenville’s remains and that of his family still lie in the crypt below Kilkhampton church.  Grace lived at the family home in Fowey and died four years after Sir Bevill some said it was from a broken heart.

96,789